Quarterlytics / Basic Materials / Gold / Gold Fields

Gold Fields

gfi · NYSE Basic Materials
Claim this profile
Ticker gfi
Exchange NYSE
Sector Basic Materials
Industry Gold
Employees 10,000+
← All annual reports
FY2014 Annual Report · Gold Fields
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
Integrated Annual Report
for the year ended 31 December 2014

G

o

l

d

F

i

e

l

d

s

I

n

t

e

g

r

a

t

e

d

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

2

0

1

4

G

o

l

d

F

i

e

l

d

s

I

n

t

e

g

r

a

t

e

d

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
About Gold Fields

Gold Fields Limited is an unhedged, globally diversified 

producer of gold with eight operating mines in Australia, 

Ghana, peru and south Africa. in February 2013, Gold 

Fields unbundled its mature underground Beatrix and KDC 

mines in south Africa into an independent and separately 

listed company, sibanye Gold Limited. it also expanded its 

presence in Australia, acquiring the Darlot, Granny smith 

and Lawlers mines (known as the Yilgarn south Assets) 

from Barrick Gold in october 2013. 

Gold Fields has attributable annual gold production of 

approximately 2.2 million ounces, as well as attributable 

Mineral reserves of around 48 million ounces and Mineral 

resources of around 108 million ounces. Attributable 

copper Mineral reserves total 620 million pounds and 

Mineral resources 1,001 million pounds. Gold Fields has a 

primary listing on the Jse Limited, with secondary listings 

on the New York stock exchange (NYse), NAsDAQ Dubai 

Limited (NYX) and the swiss exchange (sWX).

Cover piCtures

the processing plant at Gold Fields’ 
Granny smith mine in Western 
Australia

revegetation of the tailings dam at 
Gold Fields’ south Deep mine in 
south Africa

Contents

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

IntRoductIon

About this report

About Gold Fields

ouR busIness

Our DNA

Our global footprint – 2014 in perspective

Our business model

LeAdeRshIp And peRFoRmAnce

Vision of  the Chairperson

CEO report

CFO report

Corporate governance

Summarised remuneration report

stRAteGIc AnALysIs

Strategic trends

Risk and materiality

optImIsInG ouR opeRAtIons

Ensuring our mines deliver

Pursuing zero harm

Promoting environmental stewardship

GRowInG GoLd FIeLds

Redefining growth

An integrated approach to growth

Near-mine exploration performance

Update on remaining growth projects

1.1

1.2

1.2

2.1

2.2

2.3

2.4

2.5

3.1

3.2

4.1

4.2

4.3

5.1

5.2

5.3

5.4

5.5 Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Statement

secuRInG ouR FutuRe ResponsIbLy

Gold Fields as an employer of  choice

Government and social relations

Community relations

AssuRAnce

First party: Internal Audit statement

Independent Assurance Report to the Directors of  

6.1

6.2

6.3

7.1

7.2

Gold Fields Limited

7.3

Assured data

Administration and corporate information

IFc

IFc

IFc

1

2

4

9

12

14

18

28

32

37

40

42

47

54

56

67

72

78

80

82

84

88

90

96

98

102

108

116

118

119

123

125

iNtroDuCtioN

About this report

Integrated Annual Report
for the year ended 31 December 2014

Annual Financial Report
for the year ended 31 December 2014

mineral Resource and mineral Reserve  
supplement to the Integrated Annual Report
for the year ended 31 December 2014

Our 2014 Integrated Annual Report comprises the 
following three volumes:

•	 The Integrated Annual Report (IAR) 2014, 
which examines the integrated nature of 
our operational, financial and sustainability 
performance

•	 The Annual Financial Report 2014, which fulfils 
our statutory financial reporting requirements
•	 The Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves 

Overview 2014, which provides detailed 
technical and operational information on our 
mines and growth projects

The aim of  our integrated approach is to enable 
investors and other stakeholders to make a more 
informed assessment of  the value of  Gold Fields 
and its prospects. The IAR also forms part of  our 
Communication on Progress to the United Nations 
Global Compact. A summary of  our adherence 
to the Global Reporting Initiative (GRI), the 10 
Principles of  the United Nations Global Compact 
and the 10 Principles of  the International Council 
on Mining & Metals (ICMM) and its mandatory 
requirements of  the position statements are 
presented online.

Forward looking statements

Gold Fields’ forward looking statements which 
apply to this Integrated Annual Report, can be 
found on our website at www.goldfields.com. 

scope and boundaries of this report

This is Gold Fields’ 2014 Integrated Annual 
Report. It covers the reporting period from 
1 January 2014 to 31 December 2014. 
The previous IAR was published in March 2014 
and covered the financial reporting period from 
1 January 2013 to 31 December 2013. 

This Integrated Annual Report provides an 
overview of  Gold Fields’ eight global operations 
in Australia, Ghana, Peru and South Africa, as 
well as our exploration and business development 
activities. Detail on the exact location of  each 
operation can be found on the global map on  
p4 – 5, while growth and exploration projects can 
be found on page 89.  

We use an integrated approach to reporting 
that examines our operational, financial and 
sustainability performance. All non-financial data 
for 2013 exclude the newly-acquired Yilgarn South 
Assets, unless otherwise indicated. All 2014 non-
financial data are inclusive of  the Yilgarn South 
Assets. The existing Agnew and newly acquired 

Lawlers operations were combined in Q4 2013 
and it is therefore not possible to separate out 
the data for the Yilgarn South Assets in 2014 to 
allow for a year-on-year comparison with 2013. 
Furthermore, all 2012 data, where stated, cover 
only the continued operations of  Gold Fields, i.e. 
they exclude the contributions from the Sibanye 
Gold assets. This report has been compiled in 
accordance with the GRI’s G4 Guidelines and 
the International Integrated Reporting Council 
 Framework. Gold Fields also references 
a broad range of  additional codes, frameworks 
and standards in compiling the report, the full list 
of  which can be found on p48. We believe the 
Integrated Annual Report, together with additional 
documents held online, complies with the GRI G4 
Core Reporting Guidelines.

An average exchange rate for 2014 of  R10.82 and 
A$1.11 to the US$ have been used in this report.

Assurance

Our auditors, KPMG, have provided reasonable 
assurance on selected sustainability information in 
this report, which is prepared in accordance with 
the G4 guidelines. As a member of  the ICMM we 
are committed to obtaining assurance in line with 
the ICMM Sustainable Development Framework: 
Assurance Procedure. KPMG has provided 
assurance on the four subject matters of  the ICMM 
(ICMM subject matter 5 is not applicable due to 
Gold Fields’ transition to GRI G4 Core). The key 
sustainability performance data for assurance by 
KPMG in 2014 can be found on p123 – 124.

board approval

The Gold Fields Board of  Directors considers 
that this Integrated Annual Report complies in 
all material respects with the relevant statutory 
requirements of  the various regulations governing 
disclosure and reporting by Gold Fields and 
that the annual financial statements comply 
in all material respects with the South African 
Companies Act No 71 of  2008, as amended, 
as well as with International Financial Reporting 
Standards. As such, the Board approves the 
content of  the Integrated Annual Report 2014, 
including the Annual Financial Report 2014.

cheryl carolus
Chairperson of  the Board

23 March 2015

the Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014

1

1

Tailings storage facility at Cerro Corona in Peru

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

Our DNA

Our global footprint

Annual performance dashboard

Our business model

2

4

6

9

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 20142

introduction

introduction

3

1.1  our dnA

OUR STRATEGIC  
PILLARS

• Safe and productive teams

•  Cost discipline in support of 
sustainable cash generation

•  No marginal mining – not 
“ounces for ounces’ sake”

•  To structure our business such 
that the Group will generate a 
15% free cash flow margin at a 
gold price of  US$1,300/oz

•  A dividend-first policy – we pay 
out 25% to 35% of  normalised 
earnings

e
c
n
e
l
l
e
c
x
e
l
a
n
o
i
t
a
r
e
p
O

l

s
d
l
e
i
F
d
o
G
g
n
w
o
r
G

i

•  Prioritisation of  low-risk, high-

return assets

•  Assets in regions where we 
already have a presence

•  Growth of  reserves per share 
and cash flow per ounce and 
per share

•  Prioritisation of  cash flow, 
profitability and return on 
investment – not ounces

•  Active portfolio management 

“backing only franchise 
assets”

e
r
u
t
u
f

r
u
o
g
n
i
r
u
c
e
S

•  Attraction and retention of 

critical employees

• Employee development

• Employee health

• Shared Value

• Stakeholder relations

• Human rights and ethics

•  Responsible environmental 

management

•  Energy and carbon

l e n c e

c e l

x

a l  e

n

Operatio

S
u

s

t

a

i

n

a

b

s

ield

F
d
l
o
G
g
n

i

w
o

r

G

R   S

U

O

Safety 

H
o
n
e

s

t

y

R

e

s

T R A T EGIC OBJE

C

T

I

V

S

O U R   VALUE
O U R   VISIO

N

E

y

r

e

v

i

l

e

D

To be the 
global leader in 
sustainable gold 
mining

l
e

c

p

a

s

ect  Respo n s i
h generation to  u n d e r
Securing o

e

r

u
t
u

ur f

n
o
i
t
a
v
o
n
In

n
o
uti

alu e distrib

b ility 

p i n   v

OUR STRATEGIC  
PRIORITIES

OUR COMMITMENTS  
TO STAKEHOLDERS

Focus on a 
15% free cash 
flow margin at 
a gold price of 
uS$1,300/oz

Proactive 
portfolio 
management – 
clean up portfolio 
and divest non-
core assets

Growth 
through 
value accretive 
acquisitions and 
near-mine 
exploration

Employee Charter

•	 To	be	a	company	of	which	employees	can	be	proud

•	 To	celebrate	achievement

•	 	To	treat	employees	with	respect	and	to	work	with	them	to	ensure	

their	health	and	safety

•	 	To	provide	the	right	development	and	support	for	employees	

to	succeed

•	 With	employees’	help,	to	make	Gold	Fields	the	best	place	to	work

A	safe,	winning	and	productive	team

Investor Charter

Strengthen the 
balance sheet by 
reducing debt

•	 To	build	a	quality	portfolio	of	productive	mines

•	 To	provide	superior	returns

•	 To	deliver	on	our	commitments

Pay dividends 
of between 
25% and 35% 
of normalised 
earnings

Deliver  
South Deep

Focus on 
safety and 
maintaining our 
social licence to 
operate

A	quality	portfolio	of	assets,	providing		
superior	returns	on	gold

Society and Community Charter

•	 To	build	strong	relationships	and	trust

•	 To	create	and	share	value

•	 To	measure	our	actions	and	impact

•	 To	deliver	against	our	commitments

The	most	trusted	and	valued		
mining	partner

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
4

INTRODuCTION

INTRODuCTION

5

1.2  Our global footprint – 2014 in perspective

West Africa region

GHANA

NET CASH FLOW 7
US$123 million

Tarkwa

Damang

Accra

Mine

Damang

Tarkwa

Managed production (Au ’000oz) 

All-in Cost (AIC) (US$/oz)

Mineral Reserves (million Au oz)1

Mineral Resources (million Au oz)1

Mine workforce2 (number) 

178  

558

1,175  

1,068

1.23  

5.26  

7.49

9.57

1,756  

4,3584

Total Recordable Injury Frequency Rate (TRIFR)6

1.54  

0.52

SOUTH AFRICA

NET CASH FLOW DEFICIT 7
US$116 million

Johannesburg

South Deep

AUSTRALIA

NET CASH FLOW 7
US$218 million

Agnew/Lawlers

Darlot

Granny Smith

St Ives

Perth

KEY

  Mines

  Corporate office

  Regional offices

For growth and 

exploration projects, 

see map on p89

PERU

Cerro Corona

Lima

NET CASH FLOW 7
US$150 million

Americas region

South Africa region

Australia region

Mine

Cerro Corona

Mine

South Deep

Mine

Agnew/Lawlers

Darlot

Granny Smith

St Ives

Managed production (Au-eq ’000oz) 

All-in Cost (AIC) (US$/oz)

Mineral Reserves (million Au oz)1

Mineral Resources (million Au oz)1

Mine workforce2 (number) 

Total Recordable Injury Frequency Rate (TRIFR)6 

327

316

1.76

3.02

1,710

0.38

Managed production (Au ’000oz) 

All-in Cost (AIC) (US$/oz)

Mineral Reserves (million Au oz)1

Mineral Resources (million Au oz)1

Mine workforce2 (number) 

Total Recordable Injury Frequency Rate (TRIFR)6

201

1,732

34.90

69.80

5,2463

4.65

Managed production (Au ’000oz) 

All-in Cost (AIC) (US$/oz)

Mineral Reserves (million Au oz)1

Mineral Resources (million Au oz)1

Mine workforce2 (number)5

271

990

0.87

2.57

580

Total Recordable Injury Frequency Rate (TRIFR)6 

18.13

84

1,222

0.09

0.26

263

13.17

315

809

0.87

3.70

574

9.30

362

1,164

1.80

3.51

741

22.39

1   Managed Mineral Reserves and Resources
2  Employees and contractors
3  Excludes Corporate office (82 people)
4  Excludes Accra office (18 people)
 Excludes Perth office (112 people)
5 

6   TRIFR includes the total number of  Fatalities, Lost Time Injuries, Medically Treated 

Injuries and Restricted Work Injuries (for both employees and contractors). 
Gold Fields believes that TRIFR – which is aligned with the health and safety metrics 
of  the International Council on Mining and Metals (ICMM) – is the most useful overall 
measure of  safety performance.
 Net cash flow from operating activities after taking account of  net capital 
expenditure and environmental payments

7 

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 20146

our buSinESS

1.3  Gold Fields’ annual performance dashboard

  2014 performance drop against 2013
  2014 performance on a par with 2013
  2014 performance improvement on 2013 OR achievement in line with strategy

1Optimising our operations

p54

Category

Total workforce1

•  Total employees

•  Contractors

Gold produced – attributable (’000 oz)

Revenue (US$)

All-in-Cost (US$/oz)2

Gold price received (US$/oz)

Net cash-flow (US$)

Free cash-flow (FCF) margin (%)

Headline earnings/(loss) (US$m)

Dividends declared – SA cents per share3

Total assets (US$m)

Fatalities

TRIFR (rate per million)4

Energy consumption (TJ)

CO2 emissions (‘000 tonnes)5
Environmental incidents (Level 3)

Water withdrawal (Mℓ)

Water intensity (Kℓ withdrawn/oz gold produced)

1  Employees and contractors, including head offices
2   AIC include all cash costs plus costs related to sustaining and growing  

production of  a company, excluding taxes

3  Excludes dividends in specie

PErForMAncE

2013

16,852

10,167

6,685

2,022

2,906

1,312

1,386

(235)

n/a

(81)

22

7,296

2

4.14

10,569

1,731

3

30,302

15.01

2012

n/a

9,684

8,961

2,031

3,531

1,537

1,656

(280)

n/a

350

235

8,691

0

n/a

10,818

1,831

6

23,688

n/a

2014

15,440

8,954

6,486

2,219

2,869

1,087

1,249

235

13

27

40

6,858

3

4.04

10,4666

1,694

4

30,207

13.16

4   Per million hours worked, including employees and contractors
5  Scope 1, 2 and 3
6   The sum of  direct and indirect energy consumption reflects a conversion factor 

used by the Granny Smith power station for comparability to other operations. If  the 
conversion factor is not applied total energy consumption is 10,997 TJ

•  Ranked fifth in EY 

Excellence in Integrated 
Reporting Awards

•  96% score in SA CDP 

CDLI Index

•  Platinum award in Ghana-
Africa Business Awards

AWARDS

n
o

i
l
l
i

m
$
S
U

Net cash flow by Gold Fields operations7

2013
Gold: US$1,386/oz
Net cash: (-US$235 million)

2014
Gold: US$1,249/oz
Net cash: US$235 million

250

1,686

1,625

1,372

1,315

1,265

1,283

1,275

1,265

1,179

150

50

(50)

(150)

(250)

Q4 2012

Q1 2013

Q2 2013

Q3 2013

Q4 2013

Q1 2014

Q2 2014

Q3 2014

Q4 2013

Net cash flow

Gold price

7 Net cash flow from operating activities after taking account of  net capital expenditure and 
   environmental payments.

2,000

1,500

1,000

500
0
(500)

(1,000)

(1,500)

(2,000)

U
S
$

/

o
z

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014 
 
 
our buSinESS

7

  2014 performance drop against 2013
  2014 performance on a par with 2013
  2014 performance improvement on 2013 OR achievement in line with strategy

2Growing Gold Fields

p78

Category

Attributable Gold Mineral Resources (Moz)

Attributable Gold Mineral Reserves (Moz)

Attributable Copper Mineral Resources (Mlb)

Attributable Copper Mineral Reserves (Mlb)

Resource delineation and project holding costs2 (US$m)

Brownfields exploration (US$m)

Brownfields exploration – metres drilled

Number of  growth projects in portfolio1

PErForMAncE

2013

2012

113.393

125.499

48.608

1.119

708

122

32

250,138

5

54.856

1.284

1,024

202

51

n/a

5

2014

108.843

48.123

1.001

620

36

58

349,511

2

1 Advanced growth projects (excludes those that have been put up for disposal)
2 No greenfields exploration spend in 2014. This figure refers to resource delineation and holding costs for Salares Norte and Far Southeast

NEAR-MINE  
EXPLORATION SPEND

US$58m

RESOURCE  
DELINEATION2

US$36m

SOUTH DEEP  
LIFE-OF-MINE

70 years+

Gold Mineral Resources (attributable Moz)

Gold Mineral Reserves (attributable Moz)

125.499

113.393

108.843

54.856

48.608

48.123

60.000

50.000

40.000

30.000

20.000

10.000

0

2012

2013

2014

2012

2013

2014

•  IAS-SAMREC Award for best Mineral Reserve and Resource reporting

150.000

120.000

90.000

60.000

30.000

0

AWARDS

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014 
our buSinESS

8

  2014 performance drop against 2013
  2014 performance on a par with 2013
  2014 performance improvement on 2013 OR achievement in line with strategy

3Securing our future responsibly

p96

Category

National value distribution (US$m)1

Socio-economic development spend (SED) (US$m)1

Payments to businesses (US$m)1

Payments to capital providers (US$m)1

Payments to governments (US$m)1

Employee wages and benefits (US$m)1

Minimum wage ratio2

Ratio of  basic salary of  men to women

Average training per employee (hours)

PErForMAncE

2013

2,980

16

1,817

172

380

595

3

1.2

97

2012

3,7683

10

2,5293

4353

4583

3363

3

1.4

142

2014

2,650

16

1,835

137

194

468

1.7

1.1

181

1  Details on p106 of  this report
2  Entry level wage compared to local minimum wage restated, where applicable
3  Excludes Corporate and GIP expenditure

SED contributions by type 2014 (US$m)

SED contributions by region 2014 (US$m)

1,1

5,5

3,3

2,1

2,5

1,9

Local environment

Infrastructure

Education and training

Health and wellbeing

Economic diversification

SLPs (South Africa)

1,5

3,2

8,3

3,4

Australia

South Africa

Americas

West Africa

Total value distribution by region 2014 (US$m)

Total value distribution by type 2014 (US$m)

359

1,070

344

866

Americas

Australia

South Africa

West Africa

194

1,835

468

16

137

Government

Business

Employees/contractors

SED

Capital providers

•  Silver Award in 2015 Sustainability Yearbook

• Top SA Mining Company in 2015 Sustainability Yearbook

• 81% performance rating on Dow Jones Sustainability Index

AWARDS

• Gold Fields Peru wins Peru 2021/CEMEFI Socially Responsible Company Distinctive Award

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014 
9

our buSinESS

1.4   Our business model – Unlocking the value 

of gold

The untapped value inherent in a gold-containing ore body 

5.  Loss of  “social licence” to operate

can only be accessed through the input and collaboration 

of  a number of  different stakeholders. While Gold Fields has 

the expertise, the financial and human resources as well as 

the technical experience to mine gold, we recognise that we 

cannot do so without the financial backing of  investors, the 

relevant licences from governments, the consent and buy-in 

from neighbouring communities, sufficient access to water and 

energy, the services of  a range of  suppliers and contractors, 

and the skills and manpower of  our people. 

Only when all of  these fundamentals are in place, is accessing 

the ore body feasible. It is at this point that Gold Fields’ expertise 

really comes into play. As experts in mechanised gold mining, 

we are best positioned to extract maximum value from what we 
recognise to be national assets and deliver it to our stakeholders. 

The mining cycle – from exploration right through to mine 

closure – is made optimally effective by the business’ strategic 

imperatives that seek to deliver maximum value through safe 

gold extraction. Our 2014 strategic focus areas were:

1.  Drive safety and the goal of  Zero Harm

6.  Regulatory uncertainty and litigation

7.  Security of  power supply and cost of  energy

8.  Non-compliance with the Mining Charter in South Africa and 

its Social and Labour Plans (SLPs)

9.  Labour relations/wage negotiations

10.  Safety and health of  our employees

We remain acutely aware of  our responsibilities to our investors, 

our communities and our employees. Our commitment to these 

three critical stakeholder groups is upheld in our Investor, Society 

and Community and Employee Charters. By adhering to the 

Gold Fields Values of  Safety, Responsibility, Honesty, Respect, 

Innovation and Delivery we seek to honour these commitments. 

Living the Gold Fields Values also ensures that we achieve our 

goal of  causing Zero Harm to people, the environment and 

communities, while delivering maximum value to shareholders. 

(See Our DNA on p2 – 3).

The extraction of  gold – and the generation of  cash – is the end 

2.  Focus on a 15% free cash flow margin at a gold price of 

result of  all our efforts. From this flows a number of  outcomes 

US$1,300/oz

3.  Proactive portfolio management – clean up portfolio and 

divest non-core assets 

4.  Growth through value accretive acquisitions and near-mine 

exploration

that deliver value to a broad range of  stakeholders. On the 

financial side, shareholders receive dividends, governments 

benefit from royalties and taxes, and banks earn interest on 

the debt funding they provide. The economy benefits from the 

jobs we have created and sustained, the payments we have 

made to our contractors and supply chain partners, and the 

raw material – gold – that we send to the refineries and that 

5.  Strengthen the balance sheet and reduce debt

they distribute to the downstream jewellery industry or financial 

6.  Pay dividends of  between 25% and 35% of  normalised 

earnings

7.  Deliver South Deep

8.  Maintain social licence to operate.

institutions for investment purposes. Employees receive salaries 

and, where appropriate, bonuses, and benefit from skills 

development and training. They also derive job security from 

working for a strategically fit-for-purpose, sustainable company 

with a strong balance sheet. Our host communities benefit from 

the investments we make in infrastructure, education, sanitation, 

housing and healthcare as well as our Shared Value projects. 

In mining our assets we also take into account a range of  local 

and global risks. The top 10 risks for the year were (further detail 

This value, extracted from a previously untapped ore body 

can be found on p50 – 51):

1.  South Deep – Failure to deliver the business plan and loss of 

investor confidence 

2.  Lower gold price and volatility

3.  Non-achievement of  a 15% free cash flow margin at a gold 

price of  US$1,300/oz

4.  Replacing mineral resources and reserves at international 

operations

and delivered to such a broad group of  beneficiaries, is 

considerable. However, we recognise that not all of  the 

outcomes of  gold mining are value-adding. Mining waste and 
CO2 emissions represent the consequences of  mining and 
can have a potentially negative impact on people, communities 

and the environment. These need to be actively managed 

and reducing the negative impact of  these outcomes is a key 

component of  ensuring that we deliver net value through the 

extraction of  gold. 

The end-to-end Gold Fields business model is captured in the 

infographic on the two pages that follow. 

ORE 

BOdy

E

U

L

A

V

D

E

P

P

A

T

N

U

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014 
 
10

Our business

Our business

11

INPUTS

OUR BUSINESS

OUTPUT

OUTCOMES

SKILLS ANd eXPerTISe

We draw on the manpower, experience and  

intellectual capital of  our people.

Ore 
bOdy

E

U

L
A
V
D
E
P
P
A
T
N
U

eQUITy ANd debT CAPITAL

The financial capital provided by banks, 

shareholders and bond holders delivers 

necessary funding.

WATer, eNerGy ANd LANd
These natural capitals are critical to 

support the mining process.

CONTrACTOr ANd 
SUPPLIer ServICeS
These partners supply the manufactured 

capital (goods and services) for the 

development and maintenance of   

our mines.

GOverNMeNT LICeNCeS
We are required to meet the regulatory, 

legal and fiscal requirements of  our host 

governments.

COMMUNITy CONSeNT

Community consent – or social capital –  

ensures we secure and maintain our social  

licence to operate.

STrATeGy

rISK

STrATeGy

rISK

rISK

N

UISITI O
ATIO

N

M

I

N

e

C

L

O

G
N
I
N

I

M

C

Y
C
L
E

S

U
r
e

r
O
Q
L
C
P
A
X
e
r
O

G

C e SSIN

O

r

P

M

I

N

I

N

G

STrATeGy

rISK

rISK

US$194 million 
Taxes and royalties  

paid to governments

15 440 

Total workforce

US$13 million  
Training and  

development

VA
L
U
E D

GOLd
=  
CASH

US$1.84 billion 
Payments to businesses 
and suppliers

US$105 million 
Interest paid to financial 
institutions

R0.40/share 
Dividends declared  
to shareholders

US$16 million 
Community  
investment

E
L
I
V
E
R
E
D

,

I

M
P
A
C
T
S

M
A

N

A

G

E

D

rISK

US$235 million  
net cash generated  
in 2014 

STrATeGy

139Mt 
Mining waste

1,69Mt 
CO2 emissions

30,207Mℓ 
Water withdrawal

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014 
 
 
 
 
 
2.1

2.2

2.3

2.4

2.5

Vision of the Chairperson

CEO report

CFO report

Corporate governance

Summarised Remuneration Report

14

18

28

32

37

and performance

2US$2.7bn

14

LEAdErSHiP

2.1 Vision of the Chairperson

We would not be in this 
business if we did not 
have confidence in the 
long-term value of gold

Cheryl Carolus – Chairperson

Dear Gold Fields Stakeholders,

I believe that the impact of  the Company’s 

transformation has not been fully appreciated 

Gold Fields has achieved a notable turnaround in 

by many commentators, particularly as it was 

its financial performance during 2014. It has 

achieved in a weakening gold price environment.

strengthened its balance sheet by significantly 

reducing its debt and returned to a positive cash 

generating position despite a lower gold price in 

the year under review. 

Since 2012 the Company has reduced its cost 

base – as measured by All-in Costs (AIC) per 

It is therefore worth reflecting on some of  the 

measures taken by Gold Fields’ management, 

which, I believe, make Gold Fields a leader in 

the gold sector. Many of  these were instituted 

well before our peers were forced to act amid 

the decline in the gold price during 2013. 

ounce – by 35%, while at the same time achieving 

They include:

a US$470 million swing in net cash generation from 

operations – from an outflow of  US$235 million 

in 2013 to an inflow of  US$235 million in 2014. 

Our seven international mines in Ghana, Australia 

and Peru managed to meet or even better their 

production and cost guidance for the second 

year running despite the continued decline in the 

gold price.

These achievements contributed to 2014 being a 

year in which Gold Fields’ shareholders and other 

stakeholders derived significant benefits from the 

wide-ranging restructuring of  the Group, which 

commenced in mid-2012. The restructuring had 

been brought upon by the disenchantment of 

investors in the gold sector, long before the sharp 

•  The formulation and strict implementation of 

the strategy to move away from a focus largely 

on production to a focus on sustainable cash 

delivery and achieving a 15% free cash flow 

margin at a gold price of  US$1,300/oz
•  A strategic shift from the capital and time-

intensive greenfields exploration-led growth 

to brownfields (near-mine) exploration and 

opportunistic, value-accretive acquisitions

•  The restructuring of  all corporate, regional and 
operational structures to be fit-for-purpose. 

Gold Fields’ head office costs are now amongst 

the lowest in the industry

•  The acquisition of  the Yilgarn South Assets 

in Australia, which is undoubtedly one of  the 
most value-accretive deals in the industry. Gold 

fall in the gold price from April 2013 onwards, 

Fields is likely to recoup its investment in the 

which underpinned the need for change in 

transaction by the end of  this year, a mere two 

the industry. 

years after they were acquired 

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014

LEAdErSHiP

1515

GOLD FIELDS’ VALUE 
DISTRIBUTION

US$2.7bn

•  The unbundling of  the Sibanye Gold assets 
from Gold Fields. The share prices of  both 
companies performed well last year, buoyed 
by the clearer management focus and access 
to dedicated resources that the split enabled. 
An investor in Gold Fields, who held on to 
both shares after the unbundling, would have 
outperformed the share prices of  most of  our 
major peers in the industry during 2014

performances by all its seven international mines. 
The successful integration of  the Yilgarn South 
Assets with our existing mines in Australia ensured 
that the Australia region now accounts for almost 
half  of  our total production with a significantly 
reduced cost base. The Company has also 
invested significantly in brownfields exploration 
at its mines in Australia to extend their Mineral 
Reserves and Resources.

COSTS BELOW 
GUIDANCE

7%

Gold 
Fields has 
achieved a 
notable turn-
around in its 
financial and 
operational 
performance 
over 2014

It is pleasing to reflect on the Company’s 
achievements, but risks and challenges remain. 
Now is not the time to grow complacent, 
particularly when it comes to the safety and 
wellbeing of  Gold Fields’ employees. Tragically, 
we had three fatalities – all at our South Deep 
mine in South Africa – during the year. My heartfelt 
condolences go out, once again, to the relatives, 
friends and colleagues of  Dirk Coetzee, Max Lehihi 
and Olimpio Langa. It is in their memory, and those 
who died at our mines before them, that this Board 
continues to drive the achievement of  Zero Harm 
as a reality at all our operations. Similarly, reducing 
the exposure of  our employees to occupational 
and non-occupational diseases such as Silicosis, 
Tuberculosis, HIV/AIDS, Noise-Induced Hearing 
Loss and Malaria must remain a priority.

Communities around the world are finding their 
voice and are, rightfully, demanding to see greater 
social and economic benefits from the mines that 
they host. During 2014 Gold Fields’ total value 
distribution – as measured by World Gold Council 
standards – was almost US$2.7 billion in the 
form of  payments to capital providers, business 
suppliers and employees, as well as in tax, royalty 
and dividend payments to governments. These 
are substantial contributions, but unfortunately 
not much of  this value is necessarily channelled 
back to our host communities. In order to maintain 
its social licence to operate, the industry needs 
to build closer relationships with the communities 
in which it operates. Gold Fields has taken a 
significant step forward in putting its community 
contribution on a more sustainable footing by 
using the Shared Value framework to structure 
its investments – but undoubtedly more needs to 
be done.

On the operational front, Gold Fields improved 
production and costs against previous year and 
against 2014 Group guidance as a result of  strong 

The South Deep mine, however, again posed 
some significant challenges. The implementation 
of  a safety-critical, ground support remediation 
programme underground halted the bulk of  the 
mine’s production for four months. However the 
programme had the full backing of  the Board, in 
line with our absolute commitment to ensuring the 
safety of  our people. 

More fundamentally, many of  the challenges 
at South Deep are related to the shortage 
of  mechanised mining skills in South Africa. 
Gold Fields has started to address this by 
putting in a strong senior management team 
with underground mechanised mining experience 
gained in the platinum industry. The Board has 
given management the mandate to determine 
the way forward. As a consequence, long-term 
targets have been taken off  the table. We have 
full confidence that the South Deep team will set 
the mine up for long-term sustainable delivery 
– though it will require more time than we had 
originally anticipated. 

Globally, our operations are confronted by a 
range of  external regulatory, political, labour and 
price dynamics that will impact on their future 
business performances. Gold Fields’ approach 
is to deal with these issues in open and honest 
engagement with its key stakeholders. We can 
report some success in this regard, such as the 
commencement of  talks around a tax stability 
agreement with the Ghanaian government and 
stable labour relations at all our operations in the 
year under review. 

In South Africa, December 2014 was the deadline 
for targets set under the 2010 Mining Charter. 
We feel that we have substantially complied with 
the elements of  the Charter, ownership included, 
and are actively engaging with the South African 
Department of  Mineral Resources to achieve 

common ground.

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014 
 
16

LEAdErSHiP

2.1  Vision of the Chairperson (continued)

Furthermore, the gold sector in South Africa is bracing for its 

Appreciation

bienniel wage talks with the trade unions, scheduled to start in 

April 2015. Gold Fields is considering not participating in these 

centralised wage talks but is planning to move to company-

level negotiations with its recognised trade unions to reflect the 

different skills-levels of  the South Deep mine when compared 

with legacy gold mines in the country (p101). 

As part of  the rightsizing of  the Company, the number of 

directors was reduced from twelve to nine in 2013. The onus 

on the remaining directors to guide Gold Fields and ensure 

adherence to sound governance standards therefore took 

on even greater significance last year. I believe they carried 

out their duties and responsibilities with enthusiasm and 

The industry around the world is also facing other cost 

great competence. I want to express my sincere appreciation 

pressures, particularly high electricity tariffs, which are 

for their continued commitment to the Company and the 

exacerbated by regular power outages. This is most acute 

considerable experience and guidance they offered in the 

at our Ghanaian and South African mines and we have 

Board’s deliberations.

implemented measures to limit the impact of  power shortages at 

our operations.

Finally, I would like to thank Nick Holland, our CEO, his 

management team and all Gold Fields employees for continuing 

As a committed corporate citizen, Gold Fields is more than 

on the path that the Group has embarked upon since mid-2012. 

willing to play its role in addressing these challenges and finding  

It is the correct path to take as it helped reduce the cost base 

solutions that benefit all stakeholders. But I fear that we have not 

to a level where Gold Fields can operate sustainably even at the 

yet found the shared mutual interests with our key partners in the 

current low gold price. However, it has not been an easy one for 

sector – the governments and communities that host us, and our 

our employees, who have seen many of  their valued colleagues 

trade unions. This can only be done through open dialogue and 
genuine partnerships and not by additional regulatory, fiscal and 

leave over the past two years. In light of  this, our employees are 
to be commended on their resilience and ongoing dedication to 

cost imposts, which will be difficult to absorb by the embattled 

the implementation of  our business strategy. I have the utmost 

confidence that they will continue to deliver results that will 

benefit them as well as all our other stakeholders.

Cheryl Carolus
Chairperson

gold industry, particularly in South Africa.

The wider global economic environment in which Gold Fields 

operates remains a challenge, as the gold price continues to 

languish at levels of  between US$1,100/oz – US$1,300/oz. 

Despite continued strong demand for the physical metal in the 

East, current global macro-economic circumstances mean that 

the gold price is unlikely to return to its 2012 levels in the short 

term. Investors have started to return to the gold equities sector 

– Gold Fields’ share price has risen from its low of  R31.40 in 

December 2013, but remains volatile and largely follows the 

movements of  the gold price. Overall though the markets have 

shown that those companies that do the right things will be 

rewarded, as Gold Fields has over the past year.

That said, Gold Fields believes in gold and the metal’s medium- 

to long-term price fundamentals remain strong. This means we 

will continue to focus on gold mining and will not hedge. In the 

short term, and given the current low-price environment, the 

Company will continue the course on which it has embarked 

with a clear emphasis on sustainable cash generation. This 

will ensure the sustainability of  our operations even if  gold 

falls further and will deliver considerable upside when the 

price recovers, as it inevitably will. All other things being equal, 

I believe that Gold Fields’ good performance in 2014 has 

provided a sound platform for 2015.

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014LEAdErSHiP

17

Blast hole drill rig at the Tarkwa mine in Ghana

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 201418

LEAdErSHiP

2.2 CEO report

A new strategy that 
is firmly focussed on 
cash generation – and 
providing investors with 
superior leverage to  
the price of gold

Nick Holland – CEO

Dear Shareholders

2014 was the second full year in Gold Fields’ 

journey of  strategic transformation to turn 

the Group into a focussed, lean and globally 

diversified gold mining company that generates 

meaningful free cash flow and provides investors 

with superior leverage to the price of  gold. We 

have made significant progress in this regard, 

which is critical to our Vision of  being the global 

leader in sustainable gold mining.

Key to the continued success of  this journey 

is further embedding the Group’s overarching 

strategic objective at all its operations:

Gold Fields seeks to generate a sustainable free 

cash flow margin of at least 15% at a planning 

gold price of US$1,300/oz, without compromising 

the long-term sustainability of its ore bodies.

Financial highlights for 2014

Gold Fields exceeded its guidance for 2014 with 
attributable gold equivalent production of 2.22 
million ounces (2013: 2.02 million ounces) and a 

significantly reduced cost profile.

Tight cost control across all of  its operations 

ensured that unit costs were lower than guidance 

for the full year:

Actual 

Feb 2014 

Actual 

2014 costs

guidance

2013 costs

All-in 

Sustaining 

Costs (AISC) US$1,053/oz US$1,125/oz US$1,202/oz

All-in Costs 

(AIC)

US$1,087/oz US$1,150/oz US$1,312/oz

If  one strips out South Deep, which is a mine in 

development, the rest of  our mines at an AIC of 

US$1,020/oz are in the lower quartile in the gold 

sector and are amongst the most cash generative 

in the industry. 

Other financial highlights included:

•  The Group’s free cash flow (FCF) margin 
for 2014 was 13% despite the fact that, at 

US$1,249/oz, the actual annualised gold price 

received was 4% lower than the planning price 

of  US$1,300/oz. If  the price received for the 

year was normalised to US$1,300/oz, then the 

free cash flow margin would have been 14%.
•  Notwithstanding a 10% decline in the average 

gold price from US$1,386/oz in 2013 to 

US$1,249/oz in 2014, cash flow from operating 
activities – after taking account of  net capital 

expenditure and environmental payments – 

improved from an outflow of  US$235 million in 

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014

 
LEAdErSHiP

19

The strong 
cash 
generation 
during 2014 
enabled the 
Group to 
reduce its 
net debt by 
US$282 million

2013 to an inflow of  US$235 million in 2014, a 

overarching objective of  a 15% FCF margin at a 

positive swing of  US$470 million. 

gold price of  US$1,300/oz, which has become the 

•  The strong cash generation during 2014, 
together with the sale of  non-core assets, 

guiding principle for what we do in Gold Fields, 

and is germane to the progressive transformation 

enabled the Group to reduce its net debt by 

that we have seen in the Group over the last two-

US$282 million to US$1,453 million at the end 

and-a-half  years.

of  2014. 

•  Debt reduction, together with agreements 

reached with our group of  bankers to restructure 

our debt has significantly improved the Group’s 

solvency and liquidity.

The early adoption of  our focus on improving cash 

flow proved prescient by providing Gold Fields 

with a built-in safety cushion able to withstand 

lower gold prices, especially when the gold price 

declined dramatically early in 2013 and again 

In addition, the strong cash generation during 

in 2014.  

2014 has enabled the Group to declare a final 
dividend for 2014 of  R0.20 per share which, 

together with the interim dividend of  R0.20 per 

share declared on 21 August 2014, brings the total 

dividend for 2014 to R0.40 per share. This is equal 

to 34% of  normalised earnings and in line with 

our policy of  paying out between 25% – 35% of 

normalised earnings to shareholders.

our strategic journey

The transformation of  Gold Fields has its roots 

in my keynote address to the Melbourne Mining 

Club in August 2012. In this speech, I challenged 

the gold-mining industry to re-invent itself  with 

a more credible case for gold mining equities, 

by addressing investor perceptions prevailing at 

the time, that, collectively, we were not offering 

sufficient leverage to the then high gold price.

Our response to this challenge in the second half  of 

2012 was the adoption of  an ambitious and ongoing 

transformation process aimed at turning Gold 

Fields into a focussed, lean and globally diversified 

gold mining company that generates significant 

free cash flow (FCF) and provides investors with 

superior leverage to the price of  gold. At the same 

time our ability to generate cash enables us to meet 

the legitimate socio-economic demands of  many 

of  our other stakeholders, in line with our vision of 

leadership in sustainable gold mining.

At its core, the transformation process entails 

a shift away from a focus on the pursuit of 

production growth and reserve ounces at any 

cost, and the adoption of  a new focus on growing 

the margin and improving FCF per ounce. This 

fundamental shift in strategy was embodied in our 

The trade-off  between production volumes and 

production quality inherent in our strategy has 

resulted in the Group adopting a number of 

supporting and complementary programmes, first 

reported on in our 2013 Integrated Annual Review. 

Progress on these is outlined below.

FocuS on whAt we Are GooD At

The philosophical orientation guiding the Gold 

Fields’ transformation journey is to focus on those 

activities that we are good at. Following a process 

of  serious analysis and introspection, we came 

to the conclusion that our core competencies are 

the operation of  mechanised mines, mergers and 

acquisitions (M&A) and brownfields (or near-

mine) exploration.

One area in which we have been less successful 

is greenfields exploration and in taking projects 

from initial discovery, through construction into 

production. Despite having spent in excess of 

US$1 billion on greenfields exploration since the 

founding of  the modern Gold Fields in 1998, and 

having some of  the best exploration professionals 

in the business, Gold Fields has never taken 

a single project through this entire process. 

This shows how elusive greenfields exploration 

success is. 

In fact, Gold Fields’ entire portfolio of  current 

operating assets has been acquired. In contrast 

to our lack of  success in greenfields exploration, 

we have been very successful at brownfields 

exploration, in particular at our orogenic-style 

assets in Australia and at Damang in Ghana. 

As a consequence of  this outcome we made 

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 201420

LEAdErSHiP

2.2  CEO report (continued)

the hard decision to stop greenfields exploration as the key 

driver of  growth, and to rather focus on acquisitions and 

•  The rationalisation and prioritisation of  capital expenditure and 
the deferral of  non-essential capital, while not effecting the 

brownfields exploration. We therefore disbanded our Growth and 

sustainability of  our mines

International Projects (GIP) division in late 2013, and refocussed 

•  The cancellation of  near-mine growth projects that 

our growth efforts on M&A and brownfields exploration. 

demonstrated inadequate returns

Our growth strategy and philosophy is discussed in more detail 

in the Growing Gold Fields section on p80.

•  The disbandment of  the Group’s GIP division
•  General cost savings driven by ongoing business process 

As far as operating mines are concerned, we concluded 

re-engineering

early in 2012 that our core competency lies in the operation of 

During 2014 these efforts continued apace with a view to 

mechanised mines rather than in hard-rock, deep level, labour-

protecting the Group’s margins in the current low-gold price 

intensive mining that characterised the KDC and Beatrix mines in 

environment. Effective cost management will also prove 

South Africa, which at that stage formed part of  the Gold Fields 

beneficial to our margin when the gold price eventually recovers, 

portfolio. In late 2012, we therefore decided to separate those 

as it will. 

assets from Gold Fields by creating Sibanye Gold under a new, 

focussed management team. Gold Fields’ remaining portfolio is 

one of  mechanised operations throughout the world.

In addition to the focus on operational cost containment, we took 

the decision to scale down our involvement in activities which are 

typically the domain of  larger, industry-leading companies. We 

Fit-For-purpoSe corporAte, reGionAl AnD 

no longer aspire to be pioneers of  research and development 

operAtionAl StructureS

The transformation of  Gold Fields, combined with our relentless 
focus on cash generation, necessitated the implementation of 

fit-for-purpose corporate, regional and operational structures 

in which managers and employees are encouraged to act as 

dynamic, engaged owners – and are rewarded for doing so. 

In response we devolved full operational accountability for 

sustainable cash generation to our regions, supported by 

appropriate resourcing of  our management teams at the 

different levels in the organisation. Inevitably there was a 

corresponding rationalisation of  our corporate office functions, 

mainly housed at the Group head office in Johannesburg, which 

now only focusses on a relatively narrow set of  strategic and 

Group activities.

in areas such as technology, but to be fast-adopters of  best 

practice. This has helped us to reduce the costs of  developing 
and applying cutting-edge practices, while still ensuring that we 

are able to leverage their benefits. A noticeable exception is at 

South Deep, where Gold Fields is continuing to invest heavily 

in the training of  mechanised mining skills, of  which there is a 

critical shortage in South Africa.

Furthermore, we have scaled back our participation in a wide 

range of  professional and industry bodies which in the past 

inflated our corporate costs and general and administrative 

expenditure. One example of  this is our suspension of  our 

membership of  the World Gold Council. During 2014 we 

reduced our overall corporate costs to approximately US$10/oz, 

which is amongst the lowest in the industry.

During 2014 the new corporate, regional and operational 

protectinG the lonG-term SuStAinAbility oF our 

structures were further bedded down and entrenched through-

ore boDieS

out the Group, including in the South Africa region. As a result 

One of  the serious risks in a low gold price environment and 

Gold Fields now enjoys a cost-effective, focussed, flexible and 

the attendant rationalisation, prioritisation and deferral of 

fit-for-purpose management structure that is appropriate to both 

scarce capital, is that producers may be tempted to engage in 

our size and strategic priorities.

FocuS on cASh GenerAtion AnD Free cASh Flow 

mArGin, not ounceS For ounceS’ SAke

practices that may have a short-term beneficial impact on cash 

flows, but have a potentially devastating effect on the long-

term sustainability and integrity of  their ore bodies. Regrettably 

evidence of  this is starting to emerge throughout the industry 

Cost containment is a critical pillar of  Gold Fields’ cash-

in the form of  high-grading as well as excessive cutbacks in 

generating strategy and the Group made considerable progress 

brownfields exploration, stripping and ore reserve development.

as reflected in the 17% decline in AIC per ounce during 2014. 

This was on top of  a 15% decline in AIC during 2013, bringing 

cumulative cost reductions between 2012 and 2014 to 29%. 

A number of  initiatives were pivotal in achieving the lower 

cost base: 

•  The cessation of  marginal mining at various operations 
•  The restructuring and rightsizing of  our corporate, regional 

and operational structures

•  An 8% reduction in our global workforce – equivalent of 

1,309 employees and contractors – during 2014, which is in 

addition to the 711 employees and contractors that left the 

Group in 2013

To ensure that our business has a strong future, we have made 

continued exploration and development of  our underground 

and surface ore bodies a strategic priority. These are amongst 

the last activities we would cut in a sustained low gold 

price environment. 

In addition, Gold Fields’ strategic objective of  generating a 

sustainable FCF margin of  at least 15%, at a planning gold price 

of  US$1,300/oz, provides the Company with a built-in safety 

cushion able to withstand a further drop in gold prices. Included 

in this price are the costs associated with maintaining the 

integrity of  our ore bodies. Should prices go down to levels of 

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014LEAdErSHiP

21

around US$1,100/oz or lower for a sustained period of  time, we 

the quality of  the portfolio. The process is captured in the 

would be looking at a new operating and planning protocol for 

diagram below.

these lower prices to protect the integrity of  our ore bodies.

Our strategic guidance to all of  our mines is to mine at or below 

the reserve grades of  their ore bodies and, when prices again 

recover, to maintain and grow the margin rather than to be lured 

by incremental ounces.

STRATEGIC PORTFOLIO REVIEW

A new pArADiGm in Growth – proActive portFolio 

mAnAGement

Acquire?

Operate?

Gold Fields’ new strategy has a direct bearing on our approach 

Restructure?

Divest?

M&A
Franchise	
assets

DIVEST
Non-franchise	
assets

to growth. Not only does it mean that we must scrutinise every 

dollar spent on growth, but it also defines the quality of  the 

assets that we seek to acquire.

In essence it means that we can no longer afford the capital 

and time-intensive greenfields exploration-led growth strategy of 

prior years, hence the disbandment in 2013 of  our GIP division; 

the closing down of  our greenfields exploration portfolio; and 

the disposal of  the projects in the portfolio that were not aligned 
with our Group objective (including the Chucapaca and Yanfolila 

projects in Peru and Mali respectively). 

The projects remaining in the portfolio are the Woodjam Project 

in British Columbia, Canada, and the Arctic Platinum Project in 

Finland, which are earmarked for disposal. The Far Southeast 

Project in the Philippines and the Salares Norte Project in Chile 

will be retained in the portfolio, as we recognise the embedded 

value in these assets (p88 – 89). 

To replace our previous exploration-led approach to growth we 

have adopted a more opportunistic acquisition approach, with 

the main criteria being:

•  that all new opportunities must be in production and improve 

the quality of  our portfolio on a FCF per ounce basis

•  are located in or near our existing regions, in well-understood, 
stable countries that offer favourable regulatory regimes – and 

offer near-mine growth potential and/or synergies with our 

existing operations or regional structures.

A
C
q
U
R
E

I

R
E
S
T
R
U
C
T
U
R
E

O
P
E
R
A
T
E

OPERATE FRANCHISE ASSETS

•	 Operational	excellence

•	 	Sustainable	15%	FCF	margin	 
@ US$ 1,300/oz gold price

Gold Fields is comfortable with its corporate structure defined 

by limited red tape and without too many levels of  hierarchical 

responsibilities. We believe that our size makes us more flexible 

and nimble. We currently have eight operating mines and 

conceptually we would ideally like to add two more mines to 

our portfolio in the short to medium term.

innovAtion, upSkillinG AnD mechAniSAtion 

The transformation of  Gold Fields into a mid-tier producer has 

clearly had a profound impact on the profile of  our workforce. 

These criteria mean that in future our growth portfolio will be 

The most obvious, and painful, has been the need to reduce the 

premised on a larger number of  smaller, higher quality and 

number of  employees to bring down the cost base to a more 

lower cost mines that offer immediate cash flow benefits. 

sustainable level. This process started in 2013, when just over 

Our acquisition in October 2013 of  the Yilgarn South Assets in 

711 employees were made redundant, and continued in 2014 

Western Australia provides the benchmark in this regard.

with 1,309 retrenchments (8% of  our total workforce), mostly at 

Central to our new growth strategy is the adoption of  an Active 

Portfolio Management approach.

This requires an ongoing strategic review of  all existing assets 

as well as potential acquisition targets with a view to improving 

the quality of  our overall portfolio. It implies that we are prepared 

to trade existing assets for better, new assets, if  they will improve 

our Ghanaian mines and at South Deep. With 8,954 employees 

and 6,486 contractors on our books at the end of  2014, we 

believe our human resource base is now close to where it should 

be in terms of  numbers.

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 201422

LEAdErSHiP

2.2  CEO report (continued)

However, Gold Fields’ transformation has also required a 

be dramatic, there is potential for operational disruption or even 

different skills set. The profile of  our employees at our Australian, 

project delays and cancellations. 

Peruvian and Ghanaian operations by and large meets our 

skills requirements, supported by the continued development 

and training of  the workforce. At South Deep, Gold Fields is 

pioneering mechanised gold mining on a scale and depth not 

previously seen in South Africa, and the success of  the operation 

is largely dependent on its people. Our strategy is to grow our 

own people through focussed internal training efforts and to 

recruit the best local mechanised mining skills to supplement the 

existing talent pool. During 2014 Gold Fields globally spent over 

US$13 million on training and developing its employees.

A significant effort has been made to introduce international 

best practice standards at South Deep. In addition to our 

existing mechanised mining training centre, we brought over an 

experienced team from our Australian mines to transfer skills and 

we are starting to collaborate with the South African platinum 

industry in setting training baselines for mechanised mining. 

We have also recruited new leadership from the successful 

Two Rivers mechanised underground platinum mine. 

collAborAtive vAlue-creAtion At nAtionAl- AnD 

community-level

Mining, executed responsibly, is a significant force for 

sustainable growth. Our investment has significant multiplier 

effects on employment, livelihoods and the national economy. 

This value creation impacts a wide range of  stakeholders, 

including employees, host governments, host communities, 

businesses and suppliers as well as the providers of  risk 

capital (p106). 

I believe though that the mining industry’s ability to create and 

distribute value could be significantly enhanced if  we worked 

more closely with governments, trade unions and communities 

in boosting mining economies. In 2013 I alluded to efforts to 

grow the mining pie, thus enabling all stakeholders to receive a 

greater share of  the wealth created by mining.

We remain of  the view that this will only be achieved through 

strong partnerships with all stakeholders, supported by stable 

fiscal, legislative and regulatory environments and underpinned 

by recognition of  the full costs and benefits of  mining. As a 

committed corporate citizen in all our jurisdictions we continue to 

play our role in maintaining and developing these partnerships.

Whole communities are directly and often exclusively dependent 

on the sustainability and growth of  the mining sector and one of 

the biggest challenges facing mining companies is addressing 

what is known as ‘the social licence to operate’ – building 

relationships and trust with our host communities. While the 

consequences of  not obtaining this social licence will not always 

It takes substantial time, effort and resources to establish and 

maintain a strong social licence to operate and, once it is 

lost, it is very hard to regain. Furthermore, our ability to grow 

Gold Fields through the expansion of  existing mines and the 

development of  new projects will – as and when deemed 

appropriate – be determined by our ability to win the trust of 

communities in our areas of  interest.

While we have always invested heavily in communities through 

our corporate social investment programmes, in 2013 we 

committed to a different strategy for community-level value 

creation, namely the creation of  Shared Value. This means 

pursuing mine-level business strategies that not only generate 

positive socio-economic impacts but also enhance the value of 

our business. Last year we commenced with the implementation 

of  a number of  Shared Value projects (p114 – 115), focussing 

on local procurement and enterprise development, mathematics 

and science skills and water supply and quality. A range of  new, 
value-creating projects is currently being rolled out.

our StrAteGic prioritieS For 2015

During the current financial year Gold Fields will continue to 

build on the strategies that it has implemented and rolled-out 

over the past two years. The five strategic priorities for 2015 

reflect this continued focus:

•  South Deep – the top priority
•  Cash flow and margin – making money at current prices
•  Dividend payments of  between 25% – 35% of  normalised 

earnings

•  Balance sheet – reducing the net debt to EBITDA ratio to 

1.0 times by end-2016

•  Growth – brownfields exploration and opportunistic, value-

accretive acquisitions

These priorities support our long-term Vision for Gold 

Fields, namely global leadership in sustainable gold mining. 

The sustainability of  our business is ensured by understanding 

the linkages between all of  the inputs and outputs of  our 

operations, enabling us to maximise the benefits for all 

stakeholders and reduce the risks to the business.

Integrated thinking, which is defined by the SA Institute of 

Chartered Accountants as “ensuring the long-term sustainability 

of  organisations through the sustained creation of  value for 

all stakeholders”, underpins this approach. While integrated 

thinking, integrated management and integrated reporting 

are embedded into the business, not all the linkages are 

as yet formalised through defined management processes 

and systems.

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014LEAdErSHiP

23

Nevertheless, we believe that the four key performance areas 

The diagram below depicts the Group performance scorecard 

the Group will be focusing on in the years ahead, will ensure that 

for 2015. It illustrates specific key performance indicators, 

integrated thinking is further entrenched in the business. These 

which are approved on an annual basis by the Remuneration 

four key performance areas are:

Committee of  the Board of  Directors. 

The Gold Fields Group performance scorecard filters down 
to Group executive, regional, operational and individual 
scorecards. The 2015 CEO scorecard and how I performed 
against my 2014 scorecard can be found in the Remuneration 
Report in the Annual Financial Report on p32 – 45.

•  Business optimisation
•  People
•  Finance
•  Social licence to operate

These broad performance areas will inform how we measure 

the business performance of  our senior managers and will 

determine their annual bonus payments. 

FIGURE 2.1: Group Performance Scorecard for 2015

I M P R O V I N G  
I N V E S T O R  
A N D   A N A L Y S T  
C O N F I D E N C E
  s h a r e   p r
i o n   o u r
l e   o f
i
t
  q u a r
t
P o s i
i n   u p p e r
  g r o u p
  p e e r
o u r

i c e  

SAFETY
Improve safety 
record by 10% and 
work towards  
Zero Harm

R E D U CIN G 
D E B T
net debt: EBITD A ratio  
Further reduce  
to 1:1 by 2016

q

O

P

O

U

A

R

F A

T

F

S

S

O

LIT
Y 
LIO  

T

S

E

Divest re
non-franchise  
aining 
assets

m

G

R

O

W

T

H

F

e

b

x

r

o

v

p

o

c

a

l

l

w

u

o

s

r

n

a

u

c

e

q

a

u

i

s

a
t
i

fi

o

n

e

l

d

c

o

c

n

s

i
t
i

o

r

a

e
t
i

v

n

d

n

FINANCIAL

BUSINESS  
OPTIMISATION

t

e

r

v

d

e

s

n

s

e

c

a

s

W
o

h

r

k

t

b

a

r

t

r

e

g

a

e

k

o
w
a

S
O
U
T
H

D
E
E
P

S

i

d

I

h

a

m
p

e

n

r

t

p

SOCIAL LICENCE  
TO OPERATE

PEOPLE

st  
d 
e 
r
nt of 
a
u
riv
c
b
e
als
o
s to d
r
nt r
e
o
o
m
c
s g
d s
e
e
m
v
s
hie
ctiv
e
ple
e
c
sin
n
c
Im
bje
ala
e a
u
b
b
o
th

e

E
C
N
A
M
R
O
F
R
E
P

T
N
E
M
E
G
A
N
A
M

e 
e

E  
E
R
F

W
O
L
F
-
H
S
A
C

a

r
a

gin of  
ble fr
e of 
ric
z 
stain
0/o
old p
w m
0
u
3
e s
o
1
% at g
h fl
$
S
v
hie
U
s
a
c
c
A

5
1

S
H
A
R
E
D

V
A
L
U
E

r

o

e

l

i

e

f

d

y

j

e

c

t

s

m

V
a

e

n

l

u

t

e

a

n

d

e

n

P

u

t

r

e

r

p

l

a

g

5
-
y

e

g

i

n

y

e

o

E

R

N

E

E

D

s

 i

s

e

r

a

n

a

l

E

R

U

C

M

G

C

A

n

c

p

u

l

a

c

r
i
t
y

I

R

Y

I

e

S

N

B

S

A

G

I

O

N

O

N

D

N

S

Im

ple

m

m

assess
baseline 
ent  
put action plans  
ents and  
in place

R

P

IM

C

O

M

O

R

E

L

M

U

V

E

A

NIT

TIO

D 
Y 

N

S

Enhance our  
reuse, recycling  
and conservation 
initiatives
ENHANCED  
WATER  
MANAGEMENT

Enhance proactive 
engagem ent and  
co m m unication
two-way 
E M P L O Y E E 
E N G A G E M E N T

r a i n i n g  
t
i a t e  
t h e  
A p p r o p r
t o   m e e t
p r o g r a m m e s  
r e n t
  c u r
b u s i n e s s ’
l s   n e e d s
l
f u t u r e   s k i
a n d  
T R A I N I N G ,
D E V E L O P M E N T   A N D  
T A L E N T   M A N A G E M E N T

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
24

LEAdErSHiP

2.2  CEO report (continued)

operational overview for 2014 

Detailed overviews of  all our mines are provided online and 
in the Optimising our Operations section in this Integrated 
Annual Report (p54), but I would like to comment on some key 
operational aspects of  our portfolio. 

AUSTRALIA 

The Group’s Australian operations, in aggregate, exceeded 
guidance for 2014 both in terms of  costs and ounces produced. 
The four mines in the portfolio (St Ives, Agnew/Lawlers, Granny 
Smith and Darlot) reported gold production of  1,031,000 ounces 
at an AIC of  US$1,015/oz against guidance for the full year of 
975,000 ounces at an AIC of  US$1,130/oz. The region reported 
a net cash inflow of  US$218 million during 2014.

Central to this performance has been the Yilgarn South Assets 
(Granny Smith, Lawlers and Darlot), acquired from Barrick 
Gold in October 2013. After initial criticism the acquisition is 
now being widely lauded. This change in perception is largely 
attributable to the rapid integration of  the Yilgarn South Assets 
into the Gold Fields portfolio and the application of  Gold Fields’ 
operating model to the acquired assets. We are likely to pay off 
the cost of  the acquisition this year.

During the year, the Australian legislature repealed the 
controversial carbon tax laws which will bring welcome tax 
relief  to the gold mining sector in particular. The savings to the 
mines in the Gold Fields portfolio are approximately A$15 million 
(US$13 million) per annum.

PERU

Our Cerro Corona mine increased gold equivalent production 
by 3% to 326,600 ounces in 2014 at an AIC of  US$316/oz. This 
was against guidance of  290,000 gold-equivalent ounces at 
an AIC of  US$490/oz. The mine reported a net cash inflow of 
US$150 million.

GHANA

The Group’s operations in Ghana, West Africa, exceeded 
guidance for 2014 both in terms costs and ounces produced. 
The two mines in the West Africa portfolio (Tarkwa and Damang) 
reported gold production of  736,000 ounces at an AIC of 
US$1,094/oz against a combined guidance of  685,000 ounces 
at an AIC of  US$1,134/oz. The region’s net cash inflow during 
2014 was US$123 million.

At Tarkwa the expansion of  the Carbon-in-Leach (CIL) plant from 
an annual throughput of  12.3 to 13.3 million tonnes per annum 
was completed by the end of  December 2014. The expansion 
is expected to enable Tarkwa to increase its future production 
profile to a steady state level of  approximately 550,000 ounces 
per annum. 

During 2014 Damang consolidated its return to profitability with a 
strong performance after having been loss-making during 2013, 
and is expected to continue to deliver steady performances for 
the foreseeable future. The main focus at Damang remains the 
identification of  additional ore sources below our existing pit and  
along the 27km of  strike between Damang and Tarkwa, where 

historical open pits were last drilled and mined when the gold 
price was between US$300/oz and US$400/oz. This strategy 
could contribute to an appreciable addition to Mineral Reserves 
and Mineral Resources over the next three years.

SOUTH AFRICA 

The South Deep mine in South Africa represents a key 
opportunity for the Group to create long-term value for 
shareholders. Indeed, with the rest of  the Group’s portfolio 
performing to expectations, the successful delivery of  South 
Deep – which accounts for 59% of  the Group’s Mineral 
Resources and 73% of  Mineral Reserves – has taken on much 
greater urgency for 2015 and beyond. 

2014 has been a challenging year for South Deep with the 
project’s build-up interrupted by an unplanned four-month long 
ground support remediation intervention, necessitated by safety 
considerations, as well as three fatal accidents.

During 2014 production decreased by 34% to 200,500 ounces 
(2013: 302,100 ounces) and AIC dropped by 2% to US$1,732/
oz (2013: US$1,763/oz). Guidance for the year was 360,000oz 
at an AIC of  US$1,350/oz. Destress mining fell 46% during the 
year from 53,694m2 to 29,071m2. However, despite the lower 
production levels, South Deep made significant progress with 
the restructuring of  its cost base, with operating costs reduced 
by 14% to R2.66 billion (US$246 million).

Management utilised the unplanned four-month hiatus in 
production to fast-track a number of  critical interventions aimed 
at setting South Deep up for long-term success:

•  A programme was implemented to address the surplus of 

people and old, high-cost equipment on the mine, to improve 
the safety culture and productivity, and deemed critical to  
de-risk the mine’s build-up to full production

•  The process of  rationalising the equipment entailed the 

removal of  surplus and redundant equipment as well as the 
limited introduction of  more appropriate, specialised new 
equipment in certain areas

•  A voluntary separation process was implemented which was 
accepted by 529 people (representing 14% of  employees)

•  In addition, management and the trade unions reached 
agreement on changes to the shift roster to facilitate the 
optimal re-deployment of  employees to further improve 
productivity

•  The South Africa regional office was closed and regional 
management, under a new Executive Vice-President, 
Nico Muller, firmly embedded at South Deep. Mr Muller, who has 
extensive mechanised mining experience in the South African 
gold and platinum industry, has strengthened the South Deep 
management team by recruiting a number of  experienced 
mechanised mining executives from the platinum sector.

South Deep is almost fully capitalised. Since 2007, Gold Fields 
has built most of  the infrastructure needed to support the build-
up to full production. Of  the initial project capital expenditure of 
approximately R9 billion approved in 2009, 85% has been spent. 
Approximately R1.2 billion in 2009 money terms (R1.7 billion in 
2015 terms (US$170 million)) remains to be spent over the next 
10 years.

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014LEAdErSHiP

25

The current impediments to the build-up of  South Deep do 

enhancement of  these practices can deliver multiple benefits 

not relate to the integrity of  the ore body or the installed 

including cost savings, reduced impact in water scarce areas, 

infrastructure but rather to the mining and production processes. 

improved regulatory compliance and enhancing Gold Fields’ 

The focus during 2015 and 2016 will be the adoption of  a 

social licence to operate.

‘getting the basics right’ programme aimed at addressing the 

key obstacles that have prevented South Deep from realising its 

full potential. The key components of  this programme, which is 

discussed in more detail on p59 – 61, are:

Energy remains a major performance driver at 21%  of  Group 

operating costs in 2014, having risen from 18% in 2013. This 

trend will continue in future amid increasing energy demand and 

supply constraints in all of  our operating regions, unless we act 

•  A prioritised focus on delivering short-term objectives instead 

to find more efficient and alternative energy sources. As part of 

of  long-term build-up targets

the Integrated Energy and Carbon Management strategy, each 

•  The adoption of  specific key deliverables for 2015, the most 

of  our regions has set energy reduction targets (apart from 

important of  which is to urgently address the critical shortage 

South Deep, which is in a ramp-up phase), which cumulatively 

of  mechanised mining and supervisory skills

should reduce our energy costs by more than 8% by 2016, 

•  Achieve cash breakeven during the latter half  of  2016

delivering about US$20 million in savings per year. 

STRENGTHENING OUR BALANCE SHEET

As previously stated, our priorities in terms of  cash generation 

are to:

•  reward our shareholders with dividends;
•  improve our balance sheet by further reducing net debt; and
•  pursue accretive acquisitions, ideally of  ‘in-production 

ounces’.

Despite the robustness of  our balance sheet, we focussed 

in 2014 on further strengthening it by adjusting the maturity 

schedule of  our outstanding debt, reducing the absolute amount 

of  our debt, as well as improving our net debt to EBITDA ratio.

The strong cash generation during 2014, together with the 

sale of  non-core assets, enabled the Group to reduce its net 

debt by US$282 million to US$1,453 million at the end of  2014. 

The Group’s net debt to EBITDA ratio improved from 1.5 times 

in December 2013 to 1.3 at the end of  December 2014. 

The medium-term objective is to reduce the net debt to EBITDA 

ratio to about 1.0 times by 2016.

The net debt reduction, together with the agreement reached 

with our group of  bankers to amend and extend the maturity 

date of  commitments, totalling US$715 million, by two years on 

the same terms, has significantly improved the Group’s solvency 

and liquidity.

At the same time the regions have been tasked with ensuring 

security of  access to future energy sources. This is amid an 

increasing shortage of  energy supplies and rising energy costs 

in many of  the regions in which we operate. In Ghana, where 

our mines have been asked by the government to reduce their 
electricity consumption by 25% – 30% this year, the operations 

have reached an agreement with a private utility which will 

deliver the bulk of  their energy requirements within the next two 

years. In Peru and Australia new long-term supply agreements 

have been signed with utilities, while South Deep has reached 

agreement with the state-owned Eskom to implement load-

curtailment programmes that will have a limited impact on the 

mine’s production and development in the short term.

A critical component of  energy security and cost efforts 

will be to find renewable sources of  energy. We have set a 

goal of  20% renewable energy generation on average in 

all new mine developments, and renewable energy should 

be considered as a component of  the energy mix for new 

projects. Greater use of  renewables has the added benefit of 

reducing our carbon footprint, which is one of  Gold Fields’ key 

environmental priorities. 

Growing Gold Fields

As mentioned, our new strategic focus has meant that we could 

no longer pursue the capital and time-intensive greenfields 

exploration-led growth strategy of  prior years, resulting in the 

WATER, ENERGY AND CARBON

closure of  our GIP division as well as the greenfields exploration 

Responsible water management remains a vital component 

portfolio. We also disposed of  the vast majority of  growth 

of  Gold Fields’ licence to operate and social licence at all 

our operations and projects. Managing current and future 

anticipated water security risks, which include both quantity and 

quality of  supply as well as costs, is also essential to ensure 

sustainable production for existing operations and the future 

viability of  projects. 

In 2014 we implemented a Group water management 
guideline with a focus on water stewardship, which includes 

identifying opportunities to enhance water reuse, recycling 

and conservation practices at all Gold Fields operations. 

This remains a key group objective for 2015 and beyond – 

projects in the portfolio. 

In contrast to our lack of  success in greenfields exploration, 

we have been very successful at brownfields (near-mine) 

exploration, in particular at our orogenic-style assets in 

Australia and at Damang in Ghana. Our future growth strategy 

will therefore focus primarily on brownfields exploration and 

accretive acquisitions.

NEAR-MINE EXPLORATION IN AUSTRALIA 

All of  Gold Fields’ mines in Australia are orogenic in nature. 

Orogenic deposits are generally attractive because they are 

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 201426

LEAdErSHiP

2.2  CEO report (continued)

well understood, they can be large and of  good grade, and 
they tend to occur in clusters at different scales. Together this 

provides a good deal of  flexibility and optionality on large 

tenement packages. Orogenic deposits are a Gold Fields’ core 

competency. We know how to find them, how to define them and 

how to mine them.

St Ives and Agnew are good examples of  the longevity of 

operations leveraging off  orogenic gold camps. In 2002 when 

Gold Fields acquired St Ives, it had reserves of  2.3 million 

ounces and a six-year Life-of-Mine. Ten years of  production 

later, during which time St Ives has produced 6.1 million ounces, 

reserves and the Life-of-Mine remained similar at 2.2 million 

ounces and seven years. Agnew has provided a similar 

example of  successful reserves replacement. 

Gold Fields is now leveraging off  its understanding of  the 

orogenic systems by putting it to use at the Yilgarn South 

operations, acquired in October 2013. 

Against this backdrop, the key strategic objective of  the Australia 

region is to make significant investment in near-mine exploration 

to extend the life of  its mines. In this context, Gold Fields 

invested a total of  A$60 million (US$54 million) in near-mine 

exploration at its Australian mines last year, aimed principally 

at improving the Mineral Resource and Reserve positions of 

these mines over the next two to three years. In 2015 a further 

A$85 million (US$77 million) is in the process of  being invested 

in near-mine exploration at all our mines in Australia.

Discovery of  orogenic-style ore bodies requires consistent 

funding and is by nature episodic, as targets are either retired 

DIVESTMENT OF MARGINAL PROJECTS

In 2014 we significantly accelerated the disposal programme 
of  the projects in the portfolio that were not aligned with our 
overarching group objective. These include:

•  Chucapaca in Peru
•  Yanfolila in Mali
•  Talas in Kyrgyzstan
•  Asosa in Ethiopia

The Arctic Platinum Project in Finland and the Woodjam Project 
in British Columbia, Canada, are earmarked for disposal.

In October 2014 the Group sold its 51% stake in Chucapaca for 
US$81 million in cash, plus a future production royalty of 
1.5%, to its joint venture partner in the project, Buenaventura, 
Peru’s largest mining company, which previously owned 49%.

Similarly, Gold Fields will retain an indirect interest in the Yanfolila 
project as London-listed Hummingbird Resources funded the 
US$20 million acquisition price through the issue of  shares in 
June 2014. We now have a 25.1% stake in Hummingbird, which 
also holds the Dugbe asset in Liberia.

Securing our future

KEEPING OUR PEOPLE SAFE AND HEALTHY

Safety will always be management’s first priority in running our 
operations and it is critical that we continuously emphasise that 
our first value is “if  we cannot mine safely we will not mine”. 

It is with deep regret therefore that I have to report three fatal 
accidents at the South Deep mine during 2014:

when deemed unattractive or progressed through exploration 

•  In May, Dirk Coetzee, an engine specialist sub-contracting 

milestones as their prospectivity becomes better defined. The 

results of  this significant investment in realising tenement 

endowment will hopefully start to show in 2015.

The new high-grade Invincible open-pit at St Ives represents a 

for Sandvik, was fatally injured when a reversing dump truck 
struck him at the entrance to the workshop.

•  Also in May, Max Lehihi, a diesel mechanic, was struck on the 
head by a drill rig boom while walking past a drill which was in 
the rig service bay.

very significant discovery and is testament to the prospectivity 

•  In July, Olimpio Langa, a lube utility vehicle operator, was 

of  the Speedway Corridor which is one of  the areas prioritised 

for exploration in 2015. Open-pit infrastructure and bunding 

has commenced with a view to first production from mining 

at Invincible, which is located on Lake Lefroy, during the June 

2015 quarter.  At Agnew an elevated focus on defining new ore 

sources at Waroonga and New Holland is also being supported 

by near-mine exploration outside of  current mining areas. 

At Waroonga infill drilling has further delineated the Fitzroy, 

Bengal, Hastings (FBH) deposit, which will provide a take-over 

mining front to supplement reduced mining from the maturing 

Kim lode. First production is expected in Q2 2015. 

At Granny Smith exploration during 2014 provided further 

support for the replication of  numerous deeper lodes in the 

Wallaby underground deposit. These results are early indications 
of  the potential for significant Mineral Resource and Reserve 

replenishment potential at the Wallaby deposit. At Darlot near-

mine exploration during 2014 has delineated sufficient ore 

reserves to secure stable production in 2015. 

fatally injured when the lube vehicle he was operating ran over 
him while he was refuelling a drill rig.

Subsequent to year-end South Deep reported another fatality. In 
March Kennedy Katongo, a boilermaker, was injured at a station 
tip. He succumbed to his injuries in hospital three days later.

My sincere condolences go out to the families, friends and 
colleagues of  the deceased.

These were industrial-type accidents associated with workshops 
and equipment, and precipitated the issuing of  a Section 54 
order by the Department of  Mineral Resources in May and July, 
placing a moratorium on all workshop-related activities across 
the mine and effectively stopping production for a total of  about 
two weeks.

The management team at South Deep also conducted a 
comprehensive mine-wide review of  all safety protocols, 
procedures and standards in line with its mandate to improve 
the mechanised mining culture. As a result of  the safety review, 
it was determined that legacy ground support in some of  the 

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014LEAdErSHiP

27

ramps in the older part of  the mine were below the international 
best practice standards. Despite the fact that 70% of  South 
Deep’s output was sourced from these areas all production and 
destress activities in the affected areas were stopped for about 
four months so that a ground support remediation programme 
could be implemented. The programme contributed significantly 
to de-risking South Deep’s build-up and, more importantly, made 
the mine safer.

The three fatalities we recorded were an undoubted setback 
on our path to Zero Harm. However our Total Recordable Injury 
Frequency Rate (TRIFR) saw a slight improvement across the 
Group, up 3% on the previous year. 

The Group has also intensified operation-specific health and 
wellness programmes, focussing on improving the physical and 
mental health of  our employees. 

VALUE-CREATION AT NATIONAL AND COMMUNITY LEVEL

Despite a second year of  adverse market conditions in 2014, 
Gold Fields continued to distribute value to a wide range of 
stakeholders, including employees, host governments, host 
communities, businesses and suppliers as well as the providers 
of  risk capital. 

In 2014 our total value distribution – as reported according 
to World Gold Council methodology – was US$2.65 billion  
(2013: US$2.98 billion), with 69% going to businesses and 
suppliers (2013: 61%), 7% to governments (2013: 13%), 18% to 
employees (2013: 19%), 5% to capital providers (2013: 6%) and 
1% on Socio-economic Development programmes (1%) – mostly 
in host communities. 

Our contribution to communities is on a much more sustainable 
footing now that we are using the Shared Value framework to 
structure our investments in community projects with a focus 
on social and economic impacts rather than just social spend. 
We are gaining valuable experience with each Shared Value 
project that we are undertaking. They range from the promotion 
of  mathematics and science teaching among South Deep’s host 
communities to multilateral water management projects at Cerro 
Corona and increased sourcing from community suppliers.

Clearly we must not waiver in continuing to transform the sector 
to make it truly representative of  the South African population, 
upskilling and educating our workforce and host communities 
and providing business opportunities to emerging entrepreneurs 
and companies. But true transformation will take time and cannot 
come at the expense of  investors, who have fled the sector over 
the past few years amid poor returns on their capital.

As the South African government considers new conditions for 

an extension to the existing Charter for mining, we appeal to it 

to meet the industry in an open and honest engagement so that 

a framework can be established that ensures the longer-term 

prosperity of  the sector. 

Similarly, the trade unions operating in the gold industry need 

to realise that continued wage increases without associated 

productivity-linked packages are becoming unaffordable to 

most mining companies. This will ensure the survival of  many 

marginal gold operations and provide employees with an upside 

to improved profits when the industry emerges from its current 

downturn, as it has started to do.

message of thanks

I would like to express my gratitude to my fellow directors 

on the Board, led by our Chairperson, Cheryl Carolus. Their 

sound experience and guidance to the executive management 

team ensured that we remained on track with our ambitious 

restructuring agenda, despite the extensive time and resources 

this demanded from directors. 

There were some changes to the executive team at Gold Fields 

during 2014. Nico Muller and, in January 2015, Avishkar Nagaser 

joined the Executive Committee. They and the rest of  the Exco 

team have provided the renewed energy necessary to see the 

Group through the sometimes difficult and painful restructuring. 

Lucy Mokoka has also joined our management team as Company 

Secretary. I want to personally thank Kgabo Moabelo and Willie 

Jacobsz (who has returned to his role as Senior Vice-President, 

Investor Relations, for North America) for their steadfast support 

and the valuable advice they offered me.

I have repeatedly stressed the need for stakeholder partnerships 
across all our geographic jurisdictions to improve the value 
creation potential of  the mining sector. The appeal to our trade 
union partners and government is particularly urgent in South 
Africa, where a review of  the Mining Charter and the gold 
industry’s two-yearly wage talks are taking place in 2015. These 
are critical events that will determine the longer-term prosperity 
of  the mining sector, and its approximate 500,000 workers. 

Most critically, I would like to express my sincere gratitude to all 

the employees of  Gold Fields who have demonstrated enormous 

resilience and dedication in what has been the second year 

of  the transformation of  the Group, exacerbated by difficult 

economic conditions. This is now a lean team, which I believe 

can rival any of  our peers in terms of  experience, technical 

ability and energy. They have risen to the difficult challenge 

and the results are there for all to see. Gold Fields is in the best 

Gold Fields has dedicated substantial human and capital 
resources towards meeting the targets of  the 2010 revised 
Mining Charter in our firm belief  that the principles of  the 
Charter support the true empowerment of  the industry. We 
believe that we have complied with the key targets set out in the 
Charter (p104 – 105), including the equity empowerment target 
of  26% ownership and housing one worker per room at our 
South Deep hostels.

of  hands.

Nick Holland
CEO

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 201428

LEAdErSHiP

2.3 CFO report

Debt reduction ...  
has significantly improved 
the group’s solvency  
and liquidity

Paul Schmidt - CFO

The year 2014 consolidated the transformation 

of  Gold Fields and the nature of  its business. 

These developments are reflected in the financial 

performance of  the Company with the cash 

position, its balance sheet and debt position 

significantly strengthened during the year. 

A detailed analysis of  our 2014 financial 

performance is provided in the ‘Management’s 

discussion and analysis of  the financial 

statements’ of  the 2014 Annual Financial 

Report. The consolidated income statement, 

statement of  financial position and cash flow 

•  The strong cash generation during 2014, 
together with the sale of  non-core assets, 

enabled the Group to reduce its net debt by 

US$282 million to US$1,453 million at the end 

of  2014

•  Debt reduction, together with agreements 

reached with our group of  bankers to extend 

the maturity dates of  certain of  our debt has 

significantly improved the Group’s solvency 

and liquidity

•  Capital expenditure decreased from 

US$739 million in 2013 to US$609 million 

statement – extracted from the Annual Financial 

in 2014

Report 2014 – are provided here together with 

additional commentary.

•  The Group declared a final dividend for 
2014 of  R0.20 per share which, together 

I also want to remind shareholders that our cost 
reporting is based on the World Gold Council 

cost metrics of  All-in Sustaining Cost (AISC) and 

All-in Cost (AIC) introduced in 2013. We believe 

these metrics help investors, governments, local 

communities and other stakeholders to better 

understand the ‘true cost’ of  producing and selling 

an ounce of  gold. 

From this financial year onwards Gold Fields will 

also report in US Dollars only, as it is now the 

dominant currency in the Company’s portfolio.

The Group achieved a number of  notable financial 

highlights during 2014:

with the interim dividend of  R0.20 per share 

declared on 21 August 2014, brings the total 

dividend for 2014 to R0.40 per share (2013: 

R0.22 per share). This is equal to almost 34% 

of  normalised earnings and in line with our 

policy of  paying out between 25% – 35% of 

normalised earnings to shareholders

paul Schmidt 
CFO

2014 was 
a year of 
change 
to the 
structure 
of Gold 
Fields and 
the nature 
of our 
business.

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014

LEAdErSHiP

29

Consolidated income statement
for the year ended 31 December 2014
Figures in millions unless otherwise stated

uniteD StAteS DollAr

Notes

2014

2013

continuinG operAtionS

Revenue
Cost of  sales

net operating profit

Investment income
Finance expense
Loss on financial instruments
Foreign exchange gains
Other costs
Share-based payments
Long-term incentive plan expense
Exploration expense
Feasibility and evaluation costs
Share of  results of  equity accounted investees after 

taxation
Restructuring costs
Impairment of  investments and assets
Profit on disposal of  investments
Profit on disposal of  Chucapaca
(Loss)/profit on disposal of  property, plant and equipment

profit/(loss) before royalties and taxation

Royalties

profit/(loss) before taxation

Mining and income taxation

1
2

3
4

5
27

16

6

33

7
8

9

profit/(loss) from continuing operations
DiScontinueD operAtionS
profit from discontinued operations, net of taxation

10.1

profit/(loss) for the year

profit/(loss) attributable to:
owners of the parent

  – Continuing operations
  –  Discontinued operations
non-controlling interest holders

  –  Continuing operations
  –  Discontinued operations

earnings/(loss) per share attributable to ordinary 

shareholders of the company:
Basic earnings/(loss) per share from continuing 

operations – cents
Basic earnings per share from discontinued 

operations – cents
Diluted basic earnings/(loss) per share from continuing 
operations – cents
Diluted basic earnings per share from discontinued 

operations – cents

11.1

11.2

11.3

11.4

2,868.8
(2,334.4)

2,906.3
(2,277.8)

534.4
4.2
(99.2)
(11.5)
8.4
(62.5)
(26.0)
(8.7)
(47.2)
–

(2.4)
(42.0)
(26.7)
0.5
4.6
(1.3)

224.6
(86.1)

138.5
(118.1)

20.4

–

20.4

12.8
12.8
–
7.6
7.6
–

20.4

2

–

2

–

628.5
8.5
(69.5)
(0.3)
7.3
(97.2)
(40.5)
–
(65.9)
(47.7)

(18.4)
(39.4)
(809.5)
17.8
–
1.6

(524.7)
(90.5)

(615.2)
20.1

(595.1)

287.9

(307.2)

(295.7)
(583.6)
287.9
(11.5)
(11.5)
–

(307.2)

(79)

39

(79)

39

NET EARNINGS

US$12.8 
million

Net earnings 
from continued 
operations reported 
a significant 
turnaround – in 2013 
the net loss was 
US$584 million

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 201430

LEAdErSHiP

2.3  CFO report (continued)

Consolidated	statement	of	financial	position
at 31 December 2014
Figures in millions unless otherwise stated

ASSetS
non-current assets

Property, plant and equipment
Goodwill
Inventories
Equity accounted investees
Investments
Environmental trust funds
Deferred taxation
current assets

Inventories
Trade and other receivables
Cash and cash equivalents
Assets held for sale

total assets

eQuity AnD liAbilitieS

Equity attributable to owners of  the parent
Share capital 
Share premium
Other reserves
Retained earnings
Non-controlling interest

total equity 
non-current liabilities

Deferred taxation
Borrowings
Provisions
Long-term incentive plan
current liabilities

Trade and other payables
Taxation and royalties
Current portion of  borrowings

total equity and liabilities

net debt

uniteD StAteS DollAr

Notes

 2014

2013

14
15
20
16
18
19
24

20
21
22
10.2

23

24
25
26
27

28

25

5,764.9
4,895.7
385.7
132.8
252.4
5.5
30.4
62.4
1,092.8
368.3
226.5
458.0
40.0

6,857.7

3,538.8
57.9
3,412.9
(1,636.5)
1,704.5
124.5

3,663.3
2,481.3
387.0
1,765.7
320.3
8.3
713.1
509.7
58.2
145.2

6,857.7

1,452.9

6,234.7
5,388.9
431.2
93.8
237.5
7.5
23.9
51.9
1,061.4
404.5
272.7
325.0
59.2

7,296.1

3,851.4
57.8
3,412.9
(1,340.8)
1,721.5
193.8

4,045.2
2,627.4
399.4
1,933.6
294.4
–
623.5
462.4
34.6
126.5

7,296.1

1,735.1

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014LEAdErSHiP

31

Consolidated	statement	of	cash	flows
for the year ended 31 December 2014
Figures in millions unless otherwise stated

cash flows from operating activities

Cash generated by operations
Interest received
Dividends received
Change in working capital

Cash generated by operating activities
Interest paid
Royalties paid
Taxation paid

Net cash from operations

Dividends paid
–  Ordinary shareholders
–  Non-controlling interests holders
–  South Deep BEE dividend

Cash generated by continuing operations
Cash generated by discontinued operations
cash flows from investing activities

Additions to property, plant and equipment
Proceeds on disposal of  property, plant and equipment
La Cima non-controlling interest buy-out
Yilgarn South Asset purchase
Payment for Bezant
Proceeds on disposal of  Chucapaca
Purchase of  investments
Proceeds on disposal of  investments
Environmental trust funds and rehabilitation payments

Cash utilised in continuing operations
Cash utilised in discontinued operations
cash flows from financing activities

Equity contributions from non-controlling interest holders
Loans raised
Loans repaid
Proceeds from the issue of  shares

Cash (utilised in)/generated by continuing operations
Cash generated by discontinued operations

Net cash generated/(utilised)
Cash transferred on unbundling of  Sibanye Gold
Effect of  exchange rate fluctuation on cash held
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of  the year

cash and cash equivalents at end of the year

cash generated by operations1

uniteD StAteS DollAr

Notes

2014

29

30

31
32

33

22

22

808.5
1,061.3
3.6
0.1
83.7

1,148.7
(103.8)
(88.8)
(105.3)

850.8
(42.3)

(29.8)
(10.6)
(1.9)

808.5
–
(530.9)
(608.9)
4.9
–
–
–
81.0
(4.4)
6.4
(9.9)

(530.9)
–
(125.9)
2.0
463.9
(591.8)
–

(125.9)
–

151.7
–
(18.7)
325.0

458.0

235.0

2013

467.1
970.2
8.0
–
10.0

988.2
(89.4)
(99.9)
(298.2)

500.7
(64.5)

(61.2)
(1.1)
(2.2)

436.2
30.9
(914.6)
(739.3)
10.4
(12.8)
(135.0)
(10.0)
–
(3.5)
35.0
(4.5)

(859.7)
(54.9)
253.0
6.8
3,177.7
(2,971.3)
0.8

214.0
39.0

(194.5)
(106.4)
(29.7)
655.6

325.0

(234.9)

NET CASH

US$851 
million

Net cash generated 
by our operations 
improved markedly 
due to lower taxes 
paid during the year 
and higher working 
capital releases

CASH  
BALANCE

US$458 
million

The cash balance at 
the end of 2014 had 
improved strongly 
from US$325 million 
to US$458 million

1  Net cash flow from operating activities after taking account of  net capital expenditure and environmental payments

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 201432

LEADERSHIP

2.4 Corporate governance

Achieving our Vision of  global leadership in sustainable gold 

through a number of  other mechanisms, including employee 

mining, and our ability to fulfil our stakeholder promises (p3), 

climate surveys, newsletters and internal staff  communication, 

requires corporate governance of  the highest level. This means 

among others.

a governance framework that actively supports the proactive 

and effective management of  those strategic dynamics that 

will ultimately determine our long-term sustainability, whether 

operational, economic, social, environmental or otherwise.

Our management approach is underpinned by our commitment 

to sound and robust corporate governance standards, which 

is essential to our ultimate operational and strategic success. 

The Group Compliance Officer plays a pivotal role in this area 

by ensuring that the Company complies with all laws, regulations 

The Board is required to meet at least four times a year. It 

convened eight times during 2014.

The Board of  Directors is satisfied that the Company Secretary 

has the necessary competence, qualifications and experience. 

The Company Secretary is a full-time employee of  the Company.

The full Directors’ Report is contained on p24 – 31 of  the Annual 

Financial Report.

and the highest levels of  corporate governance.

Monitoring of perforMance

2.4.1 Board of Directors

The Board is the highest governing authority of  the Company. 

The Board of  Directors’ Charter articulates the objectives and 

responsibilities of  the Board. Likewise, each of  the Board 

subcommittees operates in accordance with its written terms 

of  reference, which are reviewed on an annual basis by the 

Board. The Board takes ultimate responsibility for the Company’s 

The Chairperson is appointed on an annual basis by the 
Board, with the assistance of  the Nominating and Governance 

Committee, following a rigorous review of  the Chairperson’s 

performance and independence. In line with recommendations 

by the King III Code, the Board carries out a rigorous evaluation 

of  the independence of  directors who have served on the 

Board for nine years or more. The Nominating and Governance 

Committee assesses the independence of  non-executive 

adherence to sound corporate governance standards and sees 

directors annually.

to it that all business decisions and judgements are made with 

reasonable care, skill and diligence.

rotation anD retireMent froM the BoarD

In terms of  the Memorandum of  Incorporation (MOI), the number 

of  directors shall not be less than four and not more than 15. 

The Board currently comprises nine directors, two of  whom are 

executive directors and seven of  whom are independent non-

executive directors. Advised by the Nominating and Governance 

Committee, the Board ensures that the election of  independent 

directors falls on reputable persons of  well-known competence 

and experience, who are willing to devote a sufficient part of 

their time to the Company. The committee also ensures that 

the Board has adequate diversity in respect of  race, gender, 

business, geographic and academic background.

The role of  non-executive directors, who are independent of 

management, is to protect shareholders’ interests, including 

those of  minority shareholders. They are also intended to ensure 

that individual directors or groups of  directors are subject to 

appropriate scrutiny in their decision-making.

In accordance with the MOI, one-third of  all directors (including 

executive directors) shall retire from office at each Annual 

General Meeting. The first to retire are those directors appointed 

as additional members of  the Board during the year, followed 

by the longest serving members. Retiring directors can be 

re-elected immediately by the shareholders at the Annual 

General Meeting. The Board, assisted by the Nominating and 

Governance Committee, recommends the eligibility of  retiring 

directors (subject to availability and their contribution to the 

business) for re-appointment. In addition to the requirement that 

one-third of  directors retire each year, directors who have served 

on the Board for more than three years since their last election 

or appointment are required under the MOI to retire at the next 

Annual General Meeting.

BoarD of Directors’ charter

The Board reviewed and approved the Board of  Directors’ 

Charter to align it to the recommendations of  King III. The Board 

The roles of  the Chairperson of  the Board and the CEO are 

Charter was amended during the year to include a provision 

kept separate. Non-executive director Cheryl Carolus was the 

that allows the retirement age of  directors of  72 years to be 

Chairperson of  the Board and Nick Holland the CEO of  Gold 

extended by a further period of  12 months, effective from the 

Fields for the entire period under review. Rick Menell was 

end of  the year in which a director turns 72, at the discretion of 

appointed to the Social and Ethics Committee in April 2014.

the Board. The Charter compels directors to promote the Vision 

The Board is kept informed of  all developments at the Company, 

of  the Company, while upholding sound principles of  corporate 

governance. Directors’ responsibilities under the Charter 

primarily through the executive directors, executive management 

include:

and the Company Secretary. The Board is also kept informed 

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014LEADERSHIP

33

•	 Determining the Company’s Code of  Ethics and conducting 

Board committees

its affairs in a professional manner, upholding the core values 

of  integrity, enterprise and transparency

•	 Evaluating, determining and ensuring the implementation of 

corporate strategy and policy

•	 Determining compensation, development, skills development 

The Board has established a number of  standing committees 

with delegated authority from the Board. The committee 

members are all independent non-executive directors and the 

CEO is a permanent invitee to each committee meeting. Each 

Board committee is chaired by an independent non-executive 

and other relevant policies for employees

•	 Developing and setting best-practice disclosure and reporting 

director.

practices that meet the needs of  all stakeholders

Committees operate in accordance with written terms of 

•	 Authorising and controlling capital expenditure and reviewing 

reference and have a set list of  responsibilities. These can be 

investment capital and funding proposals

found online at www.goldfields.com/au_standards.php for the 

•	 Constantly updating the risk management systems, including 
setting management expenditure authorisation levels and 

exposure limit guidelines

•	 Reviewing executive succession planning and endorsing 

senior executive appointments, organisational changes and 

general remuneration policies. In this the Board will be guided 

by the Remuneration Committee as well as the Nominating 

and Governance Committee

following committees:

•	 Audit Committee
•	 Nominating and Governance Committee
•	 Remuneration Committee
•	 Safety, Health and Sustainable Development Committee
•	 Capital Projects Control and Review Committee
•	 Social and Ethics Committee

In addition, the committees are required to evaluate their 
effectiveness and performance on an annual basis and to report 

the respective findings to the Board for consideration.

Board of directors

Nominating and 
Governance 
committee

audit
committee

remuneration
committee

safety,
Health and
sustainable
development
committee

capital
Projects
control and
review
committee

social and
ethics
committee

figUre 2.5: Summary attendance table of Board and Board committee meetings

Board

special
Board

audit5

shsD

capital
projects

  nominating
and
remcom governance

social
and
ethics

number of meetings per year
CA Carolus1
K Ansah2
AR Hill3
NJ Holland
RP Menell4
DN Murray
DMJ Ncube
PA Schmidt
GM Wilson

4
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

4
4
3
3
4
3
4
4
4
4

6
–
–
–
–
6
–
6
–
6

4
3
4
3
–
4
4
–
–
–

4
–
–
4
–
4
4
–
–
4

4
3
–
4
–
–
–
4
–
4

4
3
4
–
–
–
–
4
–
–

4
3
–
4
–
3
4
4
–
4

1  Apologies tendered for Board and sub committee meetings held on 10 February 2014 and 11 February 2014 
2  Apologies tendered for Special Board Meeting held on 04 June 2014
3  Apologies tendered for Special Board Meeting held on 04 June 2014 and the SHSD meeting on 18 August 2014
4  Apologies tendered for Special Board Meeting held on 11 June 2014
5  Two Risk meetings were held during 2014 and were attended by all Audit Committee members

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
34

LEAdErSHiP

2.4  Corporate governance (continued)

2. kofi Ansah (70)

4. richard p menell (59)

BSc (Mechanical Engineering), UST 

BA (Hons), MA (Natural Sciences 

Ghana; MSc (Metallurgy), Georgia 

Geology), Cambridge; MSc (Mineral 

Institute of Technology

Exploration and Management), Stanford 

Mr Ansah was appointed a director of 

University, California

Gold Fields in April 2004. He is also a 

Mr Menell was appointed a director 

director of  Ecobank Limited (Ghana).

of  Gold Fields on 8 October 2008. He 

DIRECTORS

1. cheryl A carolus (56)

chairperson

BA Law; Bachelor of Education, 

University of the Western Cape

Ms Carolus was appointed a director 

of  Gold Fields on 10 March 2009 and 

was appointed as the Chairperson on 

14 February 2013. She is Executive Chair 

of  Peotona Group Holdings. She is a 

director of  a number of  other public and 

3. Alan r hill (72)

BSc (Hons); MPhil (Rock Mechanics), 

Leeds University

private companies, including Investec 

Mr Hill joined the Board on 21 August 

and De Beers, and she also serves 

2009. On 2 October 2010, he was 

pro bono on non-profit organisations 

appointed the CEO and Executive Chair 

including WWF and The British Museum. 

of  Teranga Gold Corporation and was 

She served as South Africa’s High 

appointed non-executive Chair in 2013. 

Commissioner to the United Kingdom 

After graduating, Mr Hill worked for a 

from 2001 to 2004; Chairperson of  the 

number of  mining firms before joining 

South African National Parks Board for 

Barrick Gold in 1984. He spent 19 

six years and Chairperson of  South 

years with Barrick from which he retired 

African Airways from 2009 to 2012. She 

in 2003 as Executive Vice-President: 

was awarded an honorary doctorate in 

Development.

law from the University of  Cape Town for 
her contribution to freedom and human 

rights. In 2014, she was awarded the 

French National Order of  Merit by the 

Government of  France.

also became a member of  the Board 

of  Sibanye Gold Limited with effect 

from 1 January 2013. Mr Menell has 

over 36 years’ experience in the mining 

industry, including service as President 

of  the Chamber of  Mines of  South Africa, 

President and CEO of  Teal Exploration 

& Mining, as well as Executive Chair 

of  Anglovaal Mining and Avgold. He 

is a director of  Weir Group Plc and 

Rockwell Diamonds Inc, as well as Senior 

Advisor to Credit Suisse. He also serves 

as a director of  a number of  unlisted 

companies and non-profit organisations.

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014LEAdErSHiP

35

4

3

5

9

7

6

1

8

2

5. David n murray (70)

as non-executive Chairperson of  South 

8. nicholas J holland (56)

BA (Hons) Econ; MBA, University of Cape 

African Airways. He is currently Executive 

chief executive officer (ceo) 

Chair of  Badimo Gas and Managing 

BCom, BAcc, University of the 

Director of  Vula Mining Supplies.

Witwatersrand; CA(SA)

Town

Mr Murray was appointed a director of 

Gold Fields on 1 January 2008. He has 

more than 39 years’ experience in the 

mining industry and has been CEO of  Rio 

Tinto Portugal, Rio Tinto Brazil, TVX Gold 

Inc, Avgold and Avmin. He also served as 

a non-executive director of  Ivernia Inc.

6. Donald mJ ncube (67)

7. Gayle m wilson (70)

BCom; BCompt (Hons); CA(SA)

Mrs Wilson was appointed a director 

on 1 August 2008. She was previously 

an audit partner at Ernst & Young for 

16 years, where her main focus was on 

listed gold and platinum mining clients. 

BA (Economics) and Political Science, 
Fort Hare University; Postgraduate 

She was lead partner on the global 

audit of  AngloGold Ashanti and other 

Diploma in Labour Relations, Strathclyde 

mining clients during her career included 

Mr Holland was appointed an executive 

director of  Gold Fields in 1997 and 

became CEO on 1 May 2008. Prior to that 

he was the Company’s CFO. Mr Holland 

has more than 35 years’ experience 

in financial management, of  which 

25 years were in the mining industry. 

Prior to joining Gold Fields, he was 

Financial Director and Senior Manager of 

Corporate Finance at Gencor.

University, Scotland; Graduate MSc 

Northam Platinum, Aquarius Platinum, 

9. paul A Schmidt (47)

(Manpower Studies), University of 

Anglovaal Mining (now ARM) and certain 

chief Financial officer (cFo)

Manchester; Diploma in Financial 

Anglo Platinum operations.

BCom, University of the Witwatersrand; 

Management; Honorary Doctorate in 

Commerce, University of the Transkei

Mr Ncube was appointed a director 

of  Gold Fields on 15 February 2006. 

Previously, he was an alternate director 
of  Anglo American Industrial Corporation 

and Anglo American Corporation, a 

director of  AngloGold Ashanti as well 

BCompt (Hons), Unisa; CA(SA) 

Mr Schmidt was appointed CFO on 

1 January 2009 and joined the Board 

on 6 November 2009. Prior to this, he 

held the positions of  acting CFO from 
1 May 2008 and Financial Controller from 

1 April 2003. He has more than 19 years’ 

experience in the mining industry.

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 201436

LEAdErSHiP

2.4.2 

Internal and external standards and principles

listings requirements

Sustainability standards

business ethics standards

Our code of ethics is 
aligned with national and 
international business ethics 
and anti-corruption standards, 
including: The UN Convention 
against Corruption (2003) 
and the oecD convention on 
Combating Bribery of  Foreign 
Public Officials in International 
Business Transactions (1997)

We support the principles and 
processes of  the extractive 
industry transparency 
initiative (EITI), through our 
membership of  the ICMM. 
Ghana and Peru are the EITI-
compliant countries in which we 
operate

South Africa’s king iii code 
on corporate Governance, 
as well as the Prevention and 
Combating of  Corrupt Activities 
Act (2004)

The United States’ Sarbanes-
Oxley Act (2002), Dodd-Frank 
Act (2010) and the Foreign 
corrupt practices Act (1977)

Our primary listing is on the JSE 
Limited (JSE) – meaning we 
are subject to the JSe listings 
requirements

We have implemented 
South Africa’s king iii code 
on corporate Governance, 
King III principles and 
recommendations across 
Gold Fields. 

We have secondary listings 
on NASDAQ Dubai Limited, 
Euronext in Brussels and 
the SWX Swiss Exchange – 
meaning we are subject to 
each exchange’s disclosure 
requirements

Our shares are traded on the 
New York Stock Exchange 
NYSE – meaning we are subject 
to relevant NYSE disclosure 
and corporate governance 
requirements, such as those 
of  the uS Securities and 
exchange commission, 
as well as the terms of  the 
Sarbanes-oxley Act (2002)

Our Sustainable Development 
Framework is guided by the 
international council on 
mining and metals’ (ICMM) 
10 principles on sustainable 
development, their supporting 
position statements and 
external assurance thereof

We are guided by the 10 
principles of  the un Global 
compact (in which we are 
a participant), including 
their implementation in our 
business activities, and the 
annual submission of  the 
Communication on Progress 
report

All of  our eligible operations are 
in conformance with the world 
Gold council Conflict-Free 
Gold Standard. A copy of  our 
Conflict-Free Gold Report, our 
Statement of  Conformance, 
together with the independent 
limited assurance opinion 
can be viewed online at www.
goldfields.co.za/sus_reporting.
php

Our reporting is guided by 
the internationally recognised 
Global reporting initiative 
(GRI) G4-Core Sustainability 
Reporting Guidelines, including 
the Mining and Metals Sector 
Supplement

management system 
standards

iSo 14001 environmental 
management system standard: 
all operations certified

ohSAS 18001 safety 
management system standard: 
all operations certified

AA 1000 stakeholder 
engagement principles: we are 
guided by these principles

international cyanide 
management code: all eligible 
operations are compliant

internal standards and 
principles

Gold Fields has developed a 
comprehensive set of  internal 
standards and principles that 
underpin how we do business. 
These include:

our vision and values: 
Everything that we do to 
achieve our Vision of  becoming 
the global leader in sustainable 
gold mining is informed by 
our Values. These are applied 
by our directors, as well as 
employees at every level of  the 
Company

board of Directors’ charter: 
This articulates the objectives 
and responsibilities of  the 
Board. Likewise, each of  the 
Board committees operates in 
accordance with written terms 
of  reference which are regularly 
reviewed

Sustainable Development 
Framework: Gold Fields’ 
Sustainable Development 
Framework is based on 
good practice, as well as our 
operational requirements. 
The framework, which is 
governed by an overall 
Sustainable Development 
Policy, is made up of  the 
following pillars:

•  Energy and carbon 

management
•  Communities
•  Environment
•  Ethics and corporate 

governance
•  Human rights
•  Material stewardship and 
supply chain management

•  Occupational health and 

safety

•  Risk management
•  Stakeholder engagement

The Group has developed 
a range of  guidelines 
(https://www.goldfields.com/
au_standards.php) in how it 
conducts business in those 
areas

code of ethics: The Gold 
Fields Code of  Ethics commits 
and binds every employee, 
officer and director within 
Gold Fields to conducting 
business in an ethical and fair 
manner. The Board’s Audit and 
Social and Ethics Committees 
are tasked with ensuring the 
consistent application of, and 
adherence to, the Code. The 
Code is on our website at 
(https://www.goldfields.com/
au_ethics.php)

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014 
 
 
 
LEADERSHIP

2.4.3 Board committees

The Board has established a number of  standing committees 

with delegated authority from the Board. The committee 

members are all independent non-executive directors and the 

CEO is a permanent invitee to each committee meeting. Each 

Board committee is chaired by an independent non-executive 

director.

Committees operate in accordance with written terms of 

reference. In addition, the committees are required to evaluate 

their effectiveness and performance on an annual basis and to 

report the respective findings to the Board for consideration.

NomiNatiNg aNd goverNaNce committee

During 2014, the Nominating and Governance Committee 

re-affirmed its terms of  reference. It is the responsibility of  this 

committee, which has three independent directors, among other 

things, to:

•	 Develop the Company’s approach towards corporate 
governance, including recommendations to the Board

•	 Identify successors to the posts of  Chair and CEO, and make 

appropriate recommendations to the Board

•	 Consider the mandates of  the Board committees, the selection 

and rotation of  committee members and chairs, and the 

performance of  each committee on an ongoing basis

•	 Evaluate the effectiveness of  the Board, its committees and 

management, and report the findings of  this evaluation to the 

Board itself

The Committee assessed its performance and effectiveness 

during the period under review and was found to be functioning 

satisfactorily and discharging its duties.

audit committee

The Audit Committee has formal terms of  reference which are 

reviewed annually and set out in its Board approved Charter. The 

Board is satisfied that the Committee has complied with these 

terms and with its legal and regulatory responsibilities as set 

out in the Companies Act No 71 of  2008, as amended, the King 

Report on Governance Principles for South Africa 2009 (King III) 

and the JSE Listings Requirements.

The full duties and responsibilities of  the Audit Committee and 

the Audit Committee statement appear in the Annual Financial 

Report on p3 – 4. The Committee assessed its performance and 

effectiveness during the period under review and was found to 

be functioning satisfactorily and discharging its duties.

remuNeratioN committee

It is the responsibility of  this committee, which consists of  four 

independent directors, among other things, to:

•	 Establish the Company’s remuneration philosophy
•	 Establish the terms and conditions of  employment for 
executive directors and other senior executives (which 

currently includes a short-term performance-linked bonus 

scheme and a long-term share incentive scheme)

•	 Review remuneration policies on a regular basis

The Company’s remuneration policies, as well as details of 

directors’ fees and equity-settled instruments, are contained in 

the Remuneration Report on p32 – 45 of  the Annual Financial 

Report 2014.

Safety, HealtH aNd SuStaiNaBle developmeNt 

committee

It is the responsibility of  this committee, among other things, to 

assist the Board in its oversight of  the Company’s environmental, 

health and safety programmes, as well as its socio-economic 

performance. In particular, this includes the monitoring of  the 

Company’s efforts to minimise health, safety and environment-

related incidents and accidents, and to ensure its compliance 

with relevant regulations around health, safety and the 

environment. All members of  the committee have been selected 

on the basis of  their considerable experience in the field of 

sustainable development.

The committee assessed its performance and effectiveness 

during the period under review and was found to be functioning 

satisfactorily and discharging its duties. The committee 
consists of  five independent directors and continues to 

monitor performance by management in relation to the Group’s 

policies and guidelines, as well as the implementation of  any 

recommendations made by the committee.

capital projectS coNtrol aNd review committee

It is the responsibility of  this committee, which consists of  four 

independent directors, among other things, to:

•	 Satisfy the Board that the Company has used correct, efficient 
methodologies in evaluating and implementing capital projects 

in excess of  R1.5 billion or US$200 million

•	 Ensure that adequate controls are in place to review such 

projects from inception to completion, and make appropriate 

recommendations to management and the Board

The committee assessed its performance and effectiveness 

during the period under review and was found to be functioning 

satisfactorily and discharging its duties. The committee 

continues to review the results attained on completion of  each 

project against the authorised work undertaken.

Social aNd etHicS committee

It is the responsibility of  this committee to ensure, among other 

things, that:

•	 Gold Fields discharges its statutory duties in respect of 

section 72 of  the Companies Act No 71 of  2008, as amended, 

dealing with the structure and composition of  Board 

subcommittees

•	 Gold Fields adequately embeds the 10 Principles on 

Sustainable Development of  the International Council on 

Mining and Metals (ICMM) and the 10 Principles of  the United 

Nations Global Compact

•	 Gold Fields upholds the goals of  the Organisation 

of  Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD) 

recommendations regarding corruption

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014LEADERSHIP

•	 Gold Fields complies with the Employment Equity Act, as 

amended, the Broad-Based Black Economic Empowerment 

Act, as amended, and the provisions of  the 2014 Mining 

Charter

•	 Gold Fields directors and staff  comply with the Company’s 

Code of  Ethics

•	 Gold Fields practises labour and employment policies that 

comply with the terms of  the International Labour Organization 

(ILO) protocol on decent work and working conditions
•	 Gold Fields ensures the continued training and skills 

development of  its employees

•	 Gold Fields performs its responsibilities in respect of  social 

and ethics matters and that these policies are reviewed on an 

annual basis, or as required

Non-executive director Rick Menell was appointed a member of 

the Committee in April 2014.

The committee also has oversight over the South Deep Education 

Trust, the South Deep Community Trust and the Westonaria 

Community Trust through the South African Transformation 
Committee (previously known as the BEE Sub-committee), a sub-

committee of  the Social and Ethics Committee. The members 

of  the South African Transformation Committee are Rick Menell 

(Chair), Cheryl Carolus and Don Ncube.

The Social and Ethics Committee comprises the chairs of  the 

Audit Committee, Remuneration Committee, the Safety, Health 

and Sustainable Development Committee, Nominating and 

Governance Committee and the Capital Projects Committee.

executive committee

The Executive Committee (Exco) is not a committee of  the Board. 

It is primarily responsible for the implementation of  Company 

strategy, as well as carrying out the Board’s mandates and 

directives. Exco meets on a regular basis to review Company 

performance against set objectives and develops Company 

strategy and policy proposals for consideration by the Board. 

Exco also assists the Board in the execution of  the Company’s 

disclosure obligations. A series of  guidelines on disclosure has 

been disseminated throughout the Company. The Executive 

Committee consists of  the principal officers and executive 

directors of  Gold Fields – 11 members in total.

Each of  Gold Fields’ regional operating subsidiaries has 

established Board and Executive Committee structures to ensure 

sound corporate governance practices and standards. At least 

one of  the Company’s executive directors serves on the boards 

of  the operating subsidiaries.

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014LEAdErSHiP

37

2.5 Summarised Remuneration Report

This is a summarised version of  the Remuneration Committee’s 

2.5.1 Guaranteed pay and benefits

Remuneration Report, the full version of  which can be found on 

p32 – 45 of  the Annual Financial Report (AFR). 

As a global company with the majority of  our operations 

now outside South Africa, we compete for talent in a global 

The key principles of  Gold Fields’ remuneration policy are to:

marketplace, and our approach to remuneration takes account of 

the need to be competitive throughout the various jurisdictions in 

•  support the execution of  the Group’s business strategy
•  provide competitive rewards to attract, motivate and retain 

which the Group operates. 

highly skilled executives

Gold Fields also provides, where appropriate, additional 

•  motivate and reinforce individual, team and business 

elements of  compensation, including retirement savings, health-

performance

care assistance, life and disability insurance, housing and 

•  provide a safe productive and respectful working environment

personal accident cover. 

The remuneration strategy is underpinned by sound 

In 2014, the average increase for employees was 6.875% and 

remuneration management and governance principles, and 

that of  its senior management 5% on average. This took effect in 

comprises the following key elements:

March 2014.

•  Guaranteed pay
•  Benefits
•  Short-term incentives (STI), i.e. annual performance bonuses 
•  Long-term cash incentive instrument i.e. as detailed in the 

Long-Term Cash Incentive Plan (LTIP)

Gold Fields’ remuneration philosophy aims to attract and retain 

motivated, high-calibre employees, whose interests are aligned 

with those of  our shareholders. This is achieved through a 

balance of  guaranteed and performance-based remuneration 

(variable pay). 

The 2015 paymix for our executives is displayed in the graphic 

below.

FIGURE 2.2: Paymix for on-target total remuneration in 2015
%

100

80

60

40

20

0

37

24

39

39

23

38

41

23

36

CEO

CFO

Executive

The 2014 annual gross remuneration packages, or GRP, payable 

to the CEO, Nick Holland, and the CFO, Paul Schmidt, as 

determined the Remuneration Committee, were as follows:

•  Nick Holland: R8,757,442 (US$809,375) plus US$348,000
•  Paul Schmidt: R5,524,238 (US$510,588) plus US$94,000

In addition to the GRP, each executive director is entitled, among 

other things, to benefits that comprise participation in the Gold 

Fields Long-Term Cash Incentive Plan; consideration of  an 

annual incentive bonus based on the fulfilment of  certain targets 

set by the Board of  Directors; and an expense allowance. 

In 2014 the ratio of  average executive director compensation vs 

average employee compensation was 25.02. 

2.5.2 Short-term incentive (annual performance 
bonus)

Executive directors are eligible to earn performance bonuses 

of  60% of  GRP for the CFO and 65% of  GRP for the CEO 

for on-target performance, which comprise both individual 

and strategic performance objectives as well as wider Group 

objectives. The annual bonus could increase above 60% and 

65% respectively if  the stretch target is achieved. 

Targets for annual bonuses are set by the Remuneration 

Committee. In the case of  the CEO and CFO, 65% of  the 

performance bonus is based on Group objectives and the 

LTIP

Annual bonus

Guaranteed package

remainder is based on individual strategic objectives. For the 

regional EVPs, bonuses are judged against Group, regional and 

operational objectives. 

GROUP PERFORMANCE TARGETS

For the year ended 31 December 2014, the Group performance 

targets, and how senior executives performed against these 

targets, were as follows: 

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 201438

LEAdErSHiP

FiGure 2.3:	Group	performance	targets	and	executive	performance

Weight

2013
Actual

2014
Actual

threshold
+0.0%

2014

target
+100%

maximum
+200%

Achieved

Safety improvement – TRIFR
Gold (equivalent) production1 – 
’000 oz
All-in Cost US$/oz
Development and waste mined 
unit2 

20%

20%
40%

20%

100%

4.66

19%3

+0%

+10%

+20%

167%

2,104
1,312

2,294
1,074

2,162
1,195

2,242
1,138

2,322
1,081

1.8%

1.0%

+0%

+5%

+10%

165%
200%

20%

150%

1 Managed equivalent ounces converted from copper production at the planned gold/copper price ratio to eliminate price differences

2 Development comprises the following: South Deep – Destress 20%, Reef  tonnes 20% and International operations – Open-pit waste 30%, Underground metres 30% – 

improvement relative to target.

3 The TRIFR percentage change is based on the improvement in 2014 against 2013 (includes Yilgarn South Assets during Q4 2013)

South Deep’s safety performance measurement was reduced by 

•  increase the alignment of  executives and shareholders with 

75% in view of  the three fatalities at the mine during 2014. The 

the future growth and profitability of  Gold Fields.

bonus parameter objectives and their weightings for 2015 are 
unchanged from 2014. Targets for these objectives are in line 

with the operational plans and guidance given to the market.

INDIVIDUAL PERFORMANCE TARGETS

The CEO and CFO were also assessed on individual, strategic 

objectives (the CEO’s performance scorecard is included in full 

in the Remuneration Report). These objectives were built around 

three strategic pillars: Operational Excellence, Growing Gold 

Fields and Securing our Future. 

The CEO received a personal performance score of  3.5 out 

of  5 for 2014 and the CFO received a personal performance 

score of  4.5 out of  5. The aggregate bonus paid to members 

of  the executive team in February 2015 was 70% of  guaranteed 

remuneration. For the CEO it was 93% and the CFO 98% of 

guaranteed remuneration. For the CEO the bonus accounts for 

65% of  GRP, for the CFO it is 60%.

2.5.3 long-term incentives

The Company operates a long-term cash incentive plan (LTIP) 

designed to encourage senior and key employees to identify 

closely with the long-term objectives of  Gold Fields and allow 

them to participate in the future financial success of  the 

Company.

In particular the LTIP is designed to:

•  reward key senior managers for their performance and 

contribution to long-term sustainable financial results that drive 

shareholder value; and 

Salient features of  the LTIP:

•  The LTIP is a three-year performance plan. 
•  Each performance cycle starts on January 1 of  the first year 

and ends on December 31 of  the third year.

•  Annual awards will be made to eligible participants
•  Allocations will be based on the formula: Annual salary x 

applicable % by grade x personal performance

•  Vesting will be based on two corporate performance 

conditions equally being met:
–  Free Cash Flow margin (FCFM) 50% weighted
–  Total Shareholder Return (TSR) 50% weighted

Threshold must be achieved for pay-out of  any portion of  the 

award to be triggered

The LTIP replaces the Gold Fields 2012 Share Plan to align it with 

the restructuring of  Gold Fields.

2.5.4 Guaranteed pay adjustments

The annual remuneration review takes place in March. All eligible 

employees received a salary increase on 1 March 2014 and the 

average increase for executives during 2014 was 5%. The overall 

increase in labour costs was positioned within the approved 

mandate of  the committee.

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
LEAdErSHiP

39

2.5.6 executive directors’ and prescribed officers’ remuneration

The table below provides details of  the remuneration of  executive directors and prescribed officers in 2014. The equivalent table, 

providing the remuneration and fees in US dollar terms can be found in the full Remuneration Report in the AFR. 

FiGure 2.4:		Directors	and	prescribed	officers’	remuneration	and	fees

Non-executive directors' fees, executive directors'  and prescribed officers'  remuneration 
The directors and officers were paid the following remuneration for the year ended 31 December 2014

board fees 

All Figures 
Stated in r'000

Directors 
Fees

committee 
fees

Salary¹

pension 
Scheme 
contribution

Annual 
bonus²

Sundry7

Severance

Sub-total 

pre-tax Share 
proceeds 
for shares 
awarded in 
previous 
years8

total realised 
earnings for 
the 12 month 
period ended 
31 December 
2014³

For the 12 
month period 
ended 31 
December 
20139

executive 
Directors 

Nicholas Holland
Paul A. Schmidt

prescribed 
officers

Ernesto Balarezo
Alfred Baku
Richard Weston
Willie Jacobsz
Naseem Chohan
Brett Mattison
Lee-Ann Samuel
Taryn Harmse
Nico Muller4
Michael Fleischer5
Kgabo Moabelo6

non-executive 
Directors

Cheryl A. Carolus
Alan R. Hill
David N. Murray
Richard P. Menell 
Gayle M. Wilson 
Donald M. J. 
Ncube 
Kofi Ansah 

–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

2,513.6
825.4
825.4
825.4
825.4

825.4
825.4

–
533.9
417.4
553.8
648.4

572.5
233.1

10,668.4
5,785.7

1,731.0
682.2

11,384.3
6,363.6

65.0
61.4

–
–

23,848.7
12,892.9

4,320.7
4,448.8

28,169.4
17,341.7

24,932.8
16,358.4

7,521.3
7,967.3
7,028.5
5,107.8
3,160.0
3,656.3
3,450.0
2,763.4
1,181.3
397.8
2,392.1

–
–
–
–
–

–
–

–
1,495.9
802.8
–
590.0
406.2
383.3
659.7
131.3
62.5
326.2

–
–
–
–
–

–
–

7,753.3
6,465.8
6,264.7
3,758.5
3,005.4
3,713.4
3,685.0
3,011.3
553.7
–
–

–
–
–
–
–

–
–

4,328.0
2,705.0
–
–
–
–
–
1.3
2,500.0
–
–

–
–
–
–
–

–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
5,063.5
4,526.7

–
–
–
–
–

–
–

19,602.6
18,634.0
14,096.0
8,866.3
6,755.4
7,775.9
7,518.3
6,435.7
4,366.3
5,525.6
7,245.0

2,513.6
1,359.3
1,242.8
1,379.2
1,473.8

1,397.9
1,058.5

1,716.6
1,806.5
2,200.9
2,325.6
1,105.7
1,436.2
1,214.0
855.0
–
–
622.3

–
–
–
–
–

–
–

21,319.2
20,440.5
16,296.9
11,191.9
7,861.1
9,212.1
8,732.3
7,290.7
4,366.3
5,525.6
7,867.3

2,513.6
1,359.3
1,242.8
1,379.2
1,473.8

1,397.9
1,058.5

18,009.0
7,539.0
14,635.0
10,558.8
5,609.2
7,524.9
5,321.5
3,358.2
–
14,171.6
7,719.8

2,403.0
1,213.0
1,325.0
1,531.0
1,416.0

1,150.0
1,017.0

total

7,466.0

2,959.1

61,079.9

7,271.1

55,959.0

9,660.7

9,592.0

153,987.8

22,052.3

176,040.1

145,793.2

1 The total US$ amounts paid for 2014, and included in Salary above, were as follows: Mr NJ Holland US$348,000, Mr PA Schmidt US$94,000, Mr JW Jacobsz US$290,045 

and Mr MD Fleischer US$6,442

2 The annual bonus accruals for the 12 month period ended 31 December 2014, paid in February 2015

3 These amounts reflect the full directors' emoluments in Rand for comparative purposes. The portion of  executive directors' emoluments payable in US$ is paid in terms of 

agreements with the offshore subsidiaries for work done by directors' offshore for offshore companies

4 Nico Muller – Appointed on 1 October 2014

5 Michael Fleischer resigned effective 31 January 2014. As per employment contract Mr Fleischer was eligible for a total severance package of  R5,0m. R2,7m was paid in 

February 2014

6 Kgabo Moabelo – Voluntary retrenchment due to restructuring effective 31 July 2014. As per employment contract a total severance package of  R4,5m was paid

7 Sundry includes a special bonus for Mr N Muller of  R2,5m, Mr A Baku of  R2,7m and Mr E Balarezo of  R4,3m

8

Includes dividend payments

9 Comparatives have been restated by R1,6m to exclude travel reimbursements

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014Fire assaying of gold samples at Granny Smith in Australia

3.1

3.2

Shareholder and investor expectations
Social licence to operate
Political drivers

Strategic trends
3.1.1 Gold supply and demand
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
Risk and materiality
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4 Materiality assessment

Internal assessment
External assessment
Integrated Reporting process

42
42
44
45
46

47
47
47
48
48

3analysis 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
42

StrAtEgic AnALySiS

3.1 Strategic trends

Investment 
demand has 
played the 
key role in 
influencing 
the gold 
price for the 
last decade 
and more 

Like other companies, Gold Fields is subject to a 

year increases in new output are predicted to 

range of  external strategic dynamics that inform 

continue until around 2017 (as existing projects 

decision-making, and influence both current and 

start up) – with more incremental changes 

future business performance.

Analysis of  four of  these key strategic issues is set 

out below. 

3.1.1 Gold supply and demand

ISSUE 

Investment demand has played the key role in 
influencing the gold price for more than the last 

thereafter. These new incremental ounces will be 

insufficient to offset parallel falls in supply from 

maturing mines that were in production up to the 

end of  2013

•  A retreat from marginal mining projects by 
operators who had previously pursued a 

strategy of  ‘production growth at any cost’ 

– driven by the previous high gold price. 

Many of  these projects are now economically 

decade. Such demand has largely been driven by:

unsustainable, and it is inevitable that 

•  The need for a safe haven asset in advance of  – 

and during – the 2008 financial crisis

•  The subsequent need to hedge against feared 
hyperinflation as governments applied large-

scale quantitative easing – pushing the gold 

price to a record high in 2011

In 2012, investor demand eased as it became 

apparent that many of  the feared ‘economic worst 

case scenarios’ were unlikely to materialise. The 

gold price subsequently retreated to sub-2011 

levels – just as the equity and real estate markets 

started to offer stronger returns. As a result, many 

investors sold their physical gold holdings in 

2013 – resulting in a sharp drop in the gold price. 

Gold demand continued to decline in 2014 by 4% 

year-on-year according to the World Gold Council, 

while total supply was little changed. On balance, 

the negative supply and demand trends have seen 

the average gold price received by Gold Fields 

rationalisation will take place

•  A significant drop in gold exploration budgets 
since the gold price fell between 2011 and 

2012. This accentuated the longer-term trend 

of  declining exploration activity in evidence 

since the mid-1990s and  is likely to inhibit the 

longer-term ability of  gold producers to increase 

supply 

•  A decline in gold scrap recycling in response 

to the lower gold price. According to the World 

Gold Council gold recycling hit a seven-year 

low in 2014 and shows few signs of  recovery 

in 2015

•  A decline in average grades at most gold 

operations around the world

These supply trends are likely to take place 

amid short- and medium-term investor concern 

about macroeconomic and geopolitical fragility 

in key regions of  the world. In the longer term, 

key demand fundamentals may again assert 

decline to US$1,249/oz in 2014, from US$1,386/oz 

themselves due to: 

in 2013 and US1,656/oz in 2012.

Nonetheless, the world continues to face a number 

of  long-term issues which could position gold as a 

continued attractive investment option. According 

to commodity analysts CPM Group the total gold 

supply is set to fall after 2017. This is due to: 

•  Successive year-on-year reductions in 

supply from existing mines, which exceeded 

the significant amount of  new production that 

has come online between 2011 and 2013 (driven 

in part by the high gold price). Similar year-on-

•  Ongoing growth in emerging market demand 
for physical gold – in China, India and other 

countries, although China showed a slight 

decline in 2014 from its high levels of  the 

previous year

•  A continued build-up of  gold reserves by the 
world’s central banks (or at least maintaining 

their current holdings) amid economic and 

political uncertainty. In 2014 central bank 

purchases totalled 477 tonnes, the second 
highest for 50 years 

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014StrAtEgic AnALySiS

43

Figure 3.1: Gold demand in 2014 and 2013 – 
FiGure 3.1:	Gold	demand	and	supply	in	2014	and	2013	–	World	Gold	Council	(WGC)	(tonnes)
World Gold Council (WGC) (tonnes)

Figure 3.1: Gold supply in 2014 and 2013 – 
World Gold Council (WGC) (tonnes)

477.2

409.3

885.4

904.6

408.2

389.0

1,262.0

1,121.7

2,384.6

2,152.9

42.1
(39.3)

3,114.4

3,050.7

2014 demand

2013 demand

2014 supply

2013 supply

Jewellery

Technology

Investment

Jewellery

Technology

Investment

Central bank net purchases

Central bank net purchases

Mine production

Net producer hedging

Recycled gold

Mine production

Net producer hedging

Recycled gold

RESPONSE

Gold Fields believes in gold. This means the Company will 

continue to focus on gold mining and will not hedge, on the basis 

that we believe:

price and/or further falls in the price of  gold (should they occur). 

It also means Gold Fields will be particularly well-positioned to 

capture future upside and deliver superior leverage to investors 

when the gold price recovers. In such circumstances, Gold 

Fields is committed to maintaining discipline when the market 

•  The supply and demand fundamentals support a medium- to 

becomes more buoyant, and to avoiding the temptation of 

long-term recovery in the gold price

producing incremental ounces. The generation of  free cash 

•  The Company’s portfolio approach and strategic and mining 

flow will remain Gold Fields’ priority – irrespective of  market 

expertise should provide returns for gold investors now and in 

conditions.

the future

Gold Fields’ ability to maximise value can be attributed to 

grading’ – due to the obvious negative impact this would have 

This builds on Gold Fields’ existing commitment to avoid ‘high-

its strategic shift to cash flow generation by: 

•  De-prioritising production volume
•  Setting specific cash flow targets and margins and linking 

short- and long-term management incentives to key 

deliverable criteria

•  Closing marginal mining operations at existing mines and 

selling non-strategic growth assets
•  Stopping all greenfields exploration 

This strategy, conceived before the price of  gold experienced a 
serious drop – means Gold Fields now enjoys a high degree of 

on the sustainability of  its ore bodies. As such, Group guidance 

requires all operations to mine at or below their reserve grade. 

Gold Fields is also continuing to invest in the future of  its mines. 

This includes the ongoing development of  its ore bodies – and 

proactive near-mine exploration. These are strategic essentials 

that will in no way be compromised by the current price 

environment. 

Beyond this, the company’s Active Portfolio Management 
strategy (p80) is ‘locking-in’ commercial sustainability and cash-

generation into the long-term business. This strategy includes: 

resilience in the face of  current market conditions. 

•  A focus on low-risk, cash-generative near-mine exploration 

For example, all production is being planned around the delivery 

of  a 15% free cash flow margin at a gold price of  US$1,300/oz. 

This means the Company will – compared to many of  its peers – 

be in a relatively strong position to weather a sustained low gold 

and acquisition opportunities 

•  An end to all greenfields exploration activity 
•  The disposal of  non-aligned and/or marginal growth projects 

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 201444

StrAtEgic AnALySiS

3.1  Strategic trends (continued)

3.1.2 Shareholder and investor expectations

ISSUE 

When the price of  gold was high, investors showed signs of 

frustration with the inability of  mining operators to offer sufficient 

leverage to the price of  gold – instead opting for gold exchange-

traded funds (ETFs). Now that the price of  gold has fallen, many 

investors have abandoned the sector altogether. This has not 

only been due to the ‘push’ of  lower gold prices – but also the 

‘pull’ of  more buoyant equity markets and other resurgent asset 

prices in key jurisdictions. This poses a significant risk to the 

sector as a whole – in terms of  its value, liquidity and ability to 

finance future growth.

Only those gold mining companies that can demonstrate their 

ability to deliver strong cash-generation and investor returns – 

even with an historically low gold price – will be able to avoid 

the potentially serious consequences of  this dynamic. The gold 

price will no longer support complacent strategies based on 

the maximisation of  production volumes – strategies that had 

previously been embedded into the ‘DNA’ of  many companies 
following the last gold price boom. Instead, only the decisive 

rationalisation of  production and asset portfolios, severe cost-

controls and a ruthless focus on cash-generative production 

will provide succour. Whilst many companies have implemented 

incremental measures to improve productivity and reduce costs, 

more dramatic forms of  transformation are needed to earn back 

investor trust and guarantee commercial sustainability. 

RESPONSE

Gold Fields offers one of  the most positive examples of  what 

can be achieved when Company strategy is fully aligned with 

investor interests. The transformation of  Gold Fields was first 

described in its 2012 Integrated Annual Report – before the 

sharp drop in the price of  gold in 2013. Although the 2013 

unbundling of  Sibanye Gold was one of  the most ‘visible’ 

actions taken in this respect – it was just one of  many measures 

(a significant number of  which are ongoing) to redefine the 

Company. This not only included the avoidance of  marginal 

production, the reform of  Group management structures and a 

withdrawal from greenfields exploration – but also more positive, 

growth-orientated measures such as the acquisition of  the cash-

generative Yilgarn South Assets in 2013. This was part of  an 

overall effort to:

•  Benefit from simplified, disciplined and nimble management 
structures – pursuing a strategy (and associated, centrally-

defined KPIs) that is fully aligned with investor interests 
•  Focus the Company on ‘what it is good at’ – i.e. core gold 
mining operations, as demonstrated by the strong post-

acquisition performance achieved at the Yilgarn South Assets
•  Improve the overall quality of  the Group’s production portfolio 
– and pursue low-risk, disciplined growth that is fully aligned 
with Company strategy

1 Miningmx, Gold Fields Claws its Way Back, 19 December 2014

These efforts have paid off. Gold Fields was one of  the best 

performing gold mining companies on the Johannesburg Stock 

Exchange (JSE) in 2014 – outperformed only by Sibanye Gold, 

which was itself  unbundled from the Group in February 2013. 

The price of  Gold Fields’ shares increased by 60% over this 

period – albeit from a relatively low starting point caused by the 
low gold price.1 Those investors who held on to their shares in 
both Gold Fields and Sibanye Gold clearly benefited from the 

unbundling and the implementation of  Gold Fields’ decisive, 

cash-generative strategies. Whilst the current low gold price 

means that such benefits can only be framed in relative terms, 

these actions helped protect shareholder value – and means 

Gold Fields is well-placed to deliver more absolute benefits once 

the gold market rebounds. 

FIGURE 3.2: Return on investment in Gold Fields’ shares
Indexed from 28 Nov 2012 (=100) to 31 Dec 2014

140

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

28 Nov 2012

31 Dec 2014

Gold Fields and Sibanye shares combined 

Gold price 

XAU Index

The graph shows the performance of  Gold Fields’ shares since 28 November 2012, 
the day before the unbundling of  Sibanye Gold was announced. For the purposes of  
showing a total return, the share prices of  Gold Fields and Sibanye have been 
combined after the official unbundling took effect in 11 February 2013 (this excludes 
dividends). The share price performance is compared to the gold price and the 
Philadelphia Gold (XAU) Index over the same period.

Nonetheless, Gold Fields still needs to deliver on its key portfolio 

asset – South Deep. If  South Deep is excluded from Gold Fields’ 

portfolio, then the Company is one of  the most cash-generative 

in the sector. The mine remains cash negative, however, and 

continues to pose a number of  notable challenges – in terms 

of  underground mechanised engineering and mining skills 

specifically. It was in recognition of  these challenges that 

Gold Fields undertook a major mining review – with the aim of 

‘rebasing’ production there. The current priority is for South Deep 

to become financially self-supporting as soon as feasible without 

undermining its long-term build-up. 

Nonetheless, the long-life of  the mine – and its massive cash-

generating potential – means it is also important to invest time, 

energy and money now to optimise its value over the long term. 

Gold Fields is committed to balancing these needs – for the 

benefit of  both current and future investors. A more flexible and 

realistic approach towards the development of  South Deep is 

essential both in terms of  short-term investor sentiment and 
long-term value optimisation (p59 – 61).

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014StrAtEgic AnALySiS

45

3.1.3 Social licence to operate

ISSUE 

The nature of  the extractive sector means the industry must 

pay particular attention to its social licence to operate. Unlike 

other companies, mining companies are physically ‘tied’ to their 

mineral deposits – and cannot simply relocate their investments 

and activities to new locations when facing deteriorating local 

and/or national operating environments. Furthermore, many 

mines’ lifecycles can span decades – making it essential for 

mining companies to be able to navigate inter-related social, 

economic and political dynamics over time. 

This can leave mining projects vulnerable. For example, research 

from Harvard University suggests that major projects facing 

community conflicts can incur costs of  up to US$20 million a 

week in lost value. Furthermore, advanced exploration projects 

can lose up to US$50,000 per day when community conflicts 
force their suspension.1

As such, mining companies need to maximise their positive 

local impacts, minimise their negative local impacts and make 

sure that this is communicated to – and recognised by – host 

community stakeholders. Whilst many companies generate 

significant value for their host societies and governments – 

including through the generation of  public revenues – this does 

not always benefit those host communities who otherwise bear 

the brunt of  any negative impacts. As such, additional and 

targeted efforts need to be made to ensure host communities 

directly benefit from the presence of  mining operators – and 

have a direct interest in their continued and profitable operation. 

RESPONSE

Gold Fields recognises that while it must satisfy immediate 

shareholder requirements for cash generation and navigate 

the implications of  the current low gold price – it also needs 

to secure the longer-term value of  its assets. As a result, it 

also recognises that the long-term generation of  value for 

shareholders will ultimately be supported by: 

•  Responsibility: ongoing investment in the maintenance of 

responsible operational standards – and the avoidance and 

mitigation of  the Company’s negative social and environmental 

impacts. This includes ongoing investment in effective water 

management – something that is an increasingly material 

issue for most mining companies and can, if  poorly managed, 

have a serious impact on local communities (p73 – 76)
•  Trust: frank, two-way communication about potentially 

sensitive issues, realistic management of  expectations and 

the visible honouring of  Company commitments. This includes 

ongoing engagement on issues such as indigenous rights 

(p108 – 109), employment opportunities (p111 – 112) and 

social transformation. In this context, it is not enough to 

maximise Gold Fields’ positive impacts and minimise its 

negative impacts. What the Company achieves in this regard 

needs to be honestly and effectively communicated to host 

communities, so that such efforts are fully understood, 

contextualised and recognised by local people 

•  Shared Value: the pursuit of  cost-effective, mine-level 

business strategies that enhance not only the value of  our 

own business, but also generate positive social impacts. 

This helps to ensure that interactions with local stakeholders 

are firmly based on mutual interest from the start. Gold 

Fields currently has five Shared Value pilot projects (p115) – 

including a multilateral water management project at Cerro 

Corona; the promotion of  mathematics and science teaching 

at South Deep; increased sourcing from local community 

suppliers at both mines; and an innovative quarrying 

programme at Damang to generate local employment and 

reduce mine costs. These are further supported by Gold 

Fields’ broader, ongoing efforts to recruit employees and 

contractors from local communities – and to source goods 

and services from local companies (p106 – 107)

These efforts are particularly important in the context of  the 

low gold price, which has significant impacts in terms of  the 

retrenchment of  local employees and on the ability of  the 

Company to invest in community development projects. 

In terms of  growth, new mining projects are particularly 

susceptible to the loss (or non-achievement) of  a social licence 

to operate – due to the introduction of  new impacts, the testing 

of  new relationships and the untested nature of  new investments. 

In this context, Gold Fields is also applying a new growth 

strategy that is likely to reduce its risk exposure in this respect 

considerably. This includes: 

•  Refocussing on near-mine exploration – with local communities 

likely to actively support mine expansion and Life-of-Mine 

extension due to the economic opportunities these represent
•  The disposal of  non-aligned greenfields projects in higher-risk 
operating environments – and a focus of  expansion efforts 

on well-established, lower-risk and cash-generative mining 

projects. This includes the acquisition of  the Yilgarn South 

Assets in 2013 – as well as a current focus on mergers and 

acquisition opportunities in lower-risk regions (p80 – 81)

1 Rachel Davis and Daniel Franks, Cost of  Company-Community Conflict in the Extractive Sector, 2014 

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 201446

StrAtEgic AnALySiS

3.1  Strategic trends (continued)

3.1.4 Political drivers

ISSUE 

Mining companies have long had to navigate political criticism 

over their perceived lack of  contributions to the societies in 

which they operate. In part, this is due to the nature of  mineral 

deposits which are both finite – and which are perceived to be 

‘national’ assets. As such, certain governments have been active 

in their attempts to maximise the value that they can extract from 

mining companies – usually in the form of  tax. 

On the face of  it, this is right and proper – but such efforts can 

be counter-productive if  carried out in a way that: 

•  ignores the broader, less tangible benefits that mining 

companies deliver to host societies – in terms of  (for example) 

local employment, skills transfers and local procurement. 

These are rarely factored into the equation – meaning fiscal 

decisions are taken that can ultimately undermine host 

countries’ own interests; and

•  places too much emphasis on the short-term value that 

can be extracted from mining companies – often as a result 

of  immediate budgetary and/or social pressure. This can 

compromise companies’ longer-term value generation, 

reducing the overall value accruing to host countries – 

including investment in, and the development of  new and 

existing ore bodies. 

Part of  the reason the gold sector has faced significant resource 

nationalism in recent years is due to the historically high gold 

price. This gave rise to perceptions that gold mining companies 

were making windfall profits – whilst host countries gained little 

additional benefit. Such analysis ignored the high input costs 

that tempered the ability of  gold mining companies to generate 

large profits. Now that the gold price has fallen significantly, 
many mining operators are particularly sensitive to additional 
government imposts and/or fiscal and regulatory uncertainty. 

Indeed, investment in growth and development is already 

shrinking as a result of  current market conditions.

Finally, there can be less dramatic yet still impactful challenges 

relating to permitting. This is often due to the sometimes limited 

resources available to local regulators – and, in a small number 

of  cases, attempts to use permitting as a form of  leverage to 

force engagement on unrelated issues. Environmental regulation 

is both necessary and valuable – but delays in processing (and 

associated uncertainty over mine development) can potentially 

undermine the development and growth of  existing operations – 

and thus attendant value for host communities and societies.

RESPONSE

Gold Fields is a strong proponent of  economic transparency. 

This includes its proactive support of  the Extractive Industries 

Transparency Initiative (EITI), as well as its own efforts to 

report its wider economic contributions to host communities 
and societies. Gold Fields believes that once the full picture 
is made available to stakeholders – both at community- and 

1 World Gold Council ‘Goldfacts’ website – www.goldfacts.org

national-level – it will become more apparent that value 
creation is not a zero-sum game. Instead, if  maximisation of 
value for host communities and host countries is the ultimate 
aim – governments, communities, unions and other interested 
stakeholders are more likely to achieve this through constructive 
and positive cooperation with the mining sector, rather than 
through unilateral imposts. 

In 2014 our total direct value distribution was US$2.65 billion 
(2013: US$2.98 billion), apportioned as follows: 

•  US$1.84 billion to business and suppliers 

(2013: US$1.81 billion)

•  US$194 million to host governments (2013: US$380 million)
•  US$468 million to employees and contractors 

(2013: US$595 million)

•  US$137 million to providers of  capital (2013: US$172 million)
•  US$16 million on Socio-Economic Development programmes 

in our host countries (2013: US$16 million) 

Gold Fields is in the process of  developing a better 
understanding of  its indirect economic impacts – and these are 
believed to be substantial. For example, the World Gold Council 
estimates that for every employment position directly created 
by the gold mining sector – another employment position is 
indirectly created. This number is even higher in many African 
countries. Similarly, it is estimated that each employee in the 
industry in southern Africa has (on average) a total of  eight 
dependants who ultimately rely on them for support.1 

Furthermore, Gold Fields also supports broader economic 
development through: 

•  The recruitment, training and development of  people in its 
host countries – many of  which suffer from high levels of 
unemployment and limited skills pools – as technically skilled 
artisans, operators, engineers, managers and in other roles

•  The utilisation of  – and engagement with – national and 
host community suppliers. This includes the long-term 
encouragement and development of  local economic 
capabilities – and support for the development of  viable local 
economic hubs

In this context, Gold Fields is working with its peers – through 
the Minerals Council of  Australia and the Gold Royalty Response 
Group – to challenge plans to increase the royalty rate on gold 
production in Western Australia (p103). These plans appear 
to be driven by current budget shortfalls caused by a marked 
decline in public revenues generated by the iron ore sector. 
Similarly, Gold Fields is in ongoing, direct engagement with 
the Government of  Ghana around the potential introduction 
of  a common taxation framework to apply to all gold mining 
companies – creating a level-playing field for both Gold Fields 
and other operators (p103).

Gold Fields also hopes to work in partnership with regulators to 
ensure that permitting is carried out in a timely and effective way 
to limit the negative impact that project delays are likely to have 
on the Company.

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014StrAtEgic AnALySiS

47

3.2 Risk and Materiality

Gold Fields uses a set of  four well-defined processes to assess 

5.  Assessment and moderation: The risks are assessed and 

its risks, opportunities and material issues:

moderated at a Group-level by relevant risk owners and Exco 

1.  Key risks – and mitigating actions – are identified using an 

members 

Enterprise-wide Risk Management (ERM) process.

6.  Exco risk meeting: Exco reviews the top risks and sets/

monitors Group-wide mitigation strategies. This takes place 

2.  The Company takes into account the views and concerns 

of  a wide group of  stakeholders through direct and indirect 

every six months 

stakeholder engagement processes. 

7.  Audit Committee review: The Audit Committee reviews the 

3.  As part of  the Integrated Reporting process, the Company 

top risks and mitigation strategies twice a year 

conducts comprehensive interviews with key management, 

8. 

Internal audit review: The Internal Audit function assesses 

collects operational, financial and sustainability data, and 

progress against – and adherence to – mitigation strategies 

analyses the short-, medium- and long-term strategic trends 

on a regular basis

affecting the business. 

4.  Material sustainability issues are assessed and prioritised 

according to the GRI G.4 Guidelines, and comprehensive 

internal and external stakeholder interviews conducted to 

determine the relative ranking of  material issues.  

The Group Heat Maps on p50 – 53 set out:

•  The Group’s top 10 risks as well as top 5 regional risks, as 
identified through the ERM process (i.e. the Group’s top 

operational and strategic risks at the end of  2014)

•  Key movements in the top 10 Group risks between 2013 and 

The outputs from these four processes have informed the 

2014

identification of  the risks, opportunities and material issues 

•  Key mitigating strategies to avoid and/or mitigate the top 10 

contained in this Integrated Annual Report. Key elements of  the 

Group risks for 2014, and the top 5 risks per region

four processes are set out below. 

3.2.1 Internal assessment: Enterprise-wide Risk 
Management

3.2.2 External assessment: Stakeholder 
engagement

Proactive and frank stakeholder engagement plays a vital role in 

Gold Fields’ mature ERM process is aligned with the ISO 31000 

helping Gold Fields identify its material issues. All stakeholder 

international risk management standard, as well as the risk 

engagement activities are informed by the AA 1000 principles of:

management requirements of  South Africa’s King III Code.

The ERM process – which prioritises risks on the basis of 

probability and severity – is based on the following process:

•  Inclusivity 
•  Materiality 
•  Responsiveness 

1.  Workplace risk assessments: Managers carry out ongoing 

Gold Fields’ engagement activities fall into two categories:

workplace risk assessments in accordance with international 

standards (for example, ISO 31000 and the SAMREC 

guideline) 

•  Direct engagement, including organised dialogues, 

roundtable discussions, one-to-one meetings, internal surveys 

and regular engagement with local communities at each 

2.  Mine/region reviews: Each regional and mine Executive 

operation and project 

Committee conducts a review of  the top risks and mitigating 

•  indirect engagement, including the use of  external 

strategies on a quarterly basis 

benchmarks and standards (such as the UN Global Compact) 

that are designed to reflect and address societal expectations 

3.  Presentation to the Group Executive Committee (Exco): 

Each Mine Manager presents the top 10 risks and mitigation 

operAtionAl enGAGement

actions to Exco during quarterly business reviews – 

and mitigating actions are assessed for relevance and 

effectiveness 

4.  Compilation of  Group Risk Register: The Group Risk 

Manager extracts the top risks from the regional and 

operational registers in line with the tolerance levels set by 

the Board, and compiles the Group Risk Register 

At an operational-level, all mines identify, prioritise and directly 

engage stakeholder groups that have the potential to affect 

their operational, sustainability or financial performance. 
This includes, for example, ongoing engagement of:

•  Employees and their representatives by our human resources 

teams and general managers 

•  Local communities by our community relations teams and 

general managers 

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 201448

StrAtEgic AnALySiS

3.2  Risk and materiality (continued)

•  Regulators by our discipline heads and general managers 
•  Key contractors and suppliers by our procurement teams, 
health and safety managers and operational personnel

StrAteGic enGAGement

At a strategic-level, Gold Fields’ corporate and regional 

management teams implement an ongoing programme of  direct 

and indirect engagement. This includes ongoing engagement of:

•  In-country peer companies by the regional Executive Vice-

Presidents (EVPs) 

•  Central, regional and local governments by the Company’s 

3.2.4 Materiality assessment

Gold Fields has carried out a formal process to assess and 

prioritise its material sustainability issues. It has done so using 

criteria aligned with those set out in the GRI G4 Guidelines: 

•  The actual or potential impact of  Gold Fields on stakeholders
•  The actual or potential impact of  stakeholders on Gold Fields 

This G4 assessment has been carried out in parallel to – and 

integrates aspects of  – the ERM and stakeholder engagement 

processes described above. 

corporate affairs teams and legal teams, as well as members 

MATERIALITY PROCESS

of  the Group Exco and regional EVPs 

•  Shareholders and potential investors by the Group investor 

relations team, CEO, CFO and regional EVPs 

The outcomes of  stakeholder engagement are integrated into 

Gold Fields’ internal reporting processes – including its quarterly 

regional board reports, sustainable development reports and 

other documents. In addition, they inform Gold Fields’ ERM 
process, and external reporting processes.

3.2.3 Integrated Reporting process 

The outputs of  the ERM and stakeholder engagement processes 

are analysed alongside the information collected for the 

Integrated Annual Report. This includes:

•  Gold Fields’ operational, financial and sustainability data 

generated through our data management systems 

•  The output of  dedicated integrated reporting interviews with 
managers and executives at operation-, region- and Group-

level 

•  Short-, medium- and long-term strategic analysis of  the 

external environment 

This is with the aim of:

•  Gaining greater insight into the Group’s material issues 
•  Identifying and assessing the management actions taken in 

response to each material issue – as well as the effectiveness 

of  such actions 

•  Defining the content of  this Integrated Annual Report 

The Integrated Annual Report is prepared on the basis of 

this process and is subject to a rigorous internal assurance 

process. The Board – through the Audit Committee – is ultimately 

responsible for the contents of  this Integrated Annual Report. 

Gold Fields’ G4 materiality process is based on a series of 

iterative assessments using a common, quantitative scoring 

framework. It draws on a range of  internal and external sources, 

as outlined below:

1.  Legislation: national and international

2.  Standards

a.  Internal: Gold Fields’ Vision and Values; Sustainable 

Development Framework; Stakeholder Charters; and Code 

of  Ethics

b.  External: 10 Principles of  the UN Global Compact; UN 

Guiding Principles on Business and Human Rights; ICMM 

10 Principles on Sustainable Development; and ISO 14001 

(environment) and OHSAS 180001 (safety) management 

standards

3.  Documentation

a.  Internal: Gold Fields Board reports; Safety, Health and 

Sustainable Development reporting; and ERM output 

documents

b.  External: Media reports; NGO commentary; and sector 

analysis

4.  Engagement

a.  Internal: G4-specific engagement of  Exco and the Board 

– including final confirmation of  Gold Fields’ material 

sustainability issues’ G4-specific engagement of  Group-  

and regional-level discipline experts; and general internal 

engagement

b.  External: G4-specific engagement of  Group- and regional-

level stakeholders; general external engagement; and the 

Open Working Group proposal for post-2015 Sustainable 

Development Goals. 

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014StrAtEgic AnALySiS

49

Each step of  the G4 materiality process is outlined below with the final outcome shown in the table on this page. 

FIGURE 3.3:	Steps	in	the	G4	materiality	process

initial results

Initial research  
and engagement

1
2 Development of 
3
4 Development of 

the	final	materiality	
results

Integration of 
feedback 

•   Review of current sustainability issues facing the gold mining 

sector and Gold Fields ‘footprint’ countries 

•   Preliminary engagement with internal discipline experts

•  Review of ERM system outputs

•   Prioritisation of all GRI G4 Aspects – in line with the G4 materiality 

assessment criteria

•   Presentation of initial results to key internal stakeholders 

•   Presentation of initial results to key external stakeholders

•   Collation and adjustment of results

•   The setting of ‘boundaries of impact’ for each G4 Aspect

•   Categorisation and consolidation of G4 Aspects into higher-level, 

Gold Fields-specific ‘issues’

•   Sign-off of the final assessment results by Exco

These steps involve detailed engagement to determine the 

ranking of  Gold Fields’ material sustainability issues. Senior 

Step 4: prioritiSeD mAteriAl iSSueS

executives at the Company, including its regional operations, and 

representatives of  external stakeholders – including industry, 

cluster

government and environmental organisations – were briefed on 

Health and safety 

the GRI process and asked to evaluate all G4 aspects in terms 

Industrial relations

of  importance to Gold Fields and its stakeholders. This took the 

form of  a ranking with 1 being the most critical to Gold Fields 

and its stakeholders, and 10 considered not material at all.

Water management

Total value distribution

Employee development

Once these rankings had been made they were averaged and a 

Managing environmental issues across the lifecycle

score reached for each aspect. A score between 1 and 5 means 

Compliance

that these issues are material to Gold Fields. Scores between 5 

and 10 suggest that internal and external stakeholders consider 

these issues of  less material importance to Gold Fields and its 

stakeholders. However, this does not mean that they will not be 

addressed by our management team when the issues arise.

The final step in determining the key material aspects was to 

cluster those aspects that cover similar areas, for example, 

‘closure planning’ and ‘environmental compliance’ were 

clustered under ‘managing environmental issues’.

The outcome – depicted in the table alongside – ranks ‘health 

and safety’, ‘industrial relations’, ‘water management’, ‘total value 

distribution’ and ‘employee development’ among the key GRI 

aspects that internal and external stakeholders consider most 

material to Gold Fields and its wider stakeholder base. These 

are also the non-operational issues that confront our operational 

management teams on a daily basis.

Community value distribution

Government relations 

Energy and carbon management

Workforce

Human rights

Social licence to operate

Human rights due diligence on investments

Resettlement

Materials

Biodiversity

General grievance mechanisms

Supply chain management

Equal remuneration

Child/forced labour and freedom of  association

Product impacts

Market regulation

Score

1.8

1.9

2.9

2.9

3.0

3.3

3.4

3.4

3.6

4.0

4.0

4.5

4.6

5.2

5.2

5.2

5.2

5.6

5.6

5.7

7.8

8.5

8.9

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 201450

StrAtEgic AnALySiS

3.2  Risk and materiality (continued)

FIGURE 3.4: Gold Fields – Top 10 risks

Maximum

I

Y
T
R
E
V
E
S

4

5

8

10

2

76

1

3

9

Minimum	

Maximum

PROBABILITY

FIGURE 3.5: 2013 risks – how we performed in 2014
FIGURE 3.5: 2013 risks – how we performed in 2014

)
0
0
1
−
0
(

x
e
d
n

I

y
t
i
l
i

b
a
b
o
r
P
x

y
t
i
r
e
v
e
S

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

0

90

80

80

81

72

72

72

70

54

Lower 
gold price

Loss of  investor 
confidence

Failure to deliver 
South Deep

Free cash flow 
margin

Delivery of  
Mining Charter

1

2

3

4

5

2013

2014

PERFORMANCE EXPLANATION

1

2

3

4

5

2013’s No 1 risk is the second highest risk 
in 2014. The improvement is due to the fact 
that Gold Fields has shown in 2014 that it can 
operate in a low gold price environment

The ‘loss of  investor confidence’ risk, the  
No 2 risk in 2013, was removed as a risk in 
2014 and recorded as an implication of  the 
South Deep and gold price risks

Investor focus on Gold Fields’ management 
of  South Deep increased as a risk in 2014 
amid the declining production of  South Deep 
between 2014 and 2013

The possible failure to deliver a 15% free 
cash flow margin at US$1,300/oz remains a 
high risk due to the continued decline in the  
gold price

Since Gold Fields has met most of  the 2010 
Mining Charter targets the risk associated 
with non-compliance has significantly 
diminished. The results of  the South African 
government’s audit of  mining companies’ 
Charter performances had not been 
published by March 2015

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014 
 
 
 
 
 
StrAtEgic AnALySiS

51

FIGURE 3.6: Top 10 risks – Mitigating strategies

RISK

DESCRIPTION

MITIGATING STRATEGIES

1

2013: 3

2

2013: 1

3

2013: 4

4  

2013: 20

5 

2013: 16

6

2013: 6

8

2013: 5

9

2013: 11

10

2013: 13

South Deep - 
Failure to deliver 
the business plan 

•  Revised business plan set for 2015 by a new management team with 

SEVErity

strong mechanised mining experience

•  Trial application of two alternative mining methods with the potential for a 

step-change in destress mining

•  Implementation of the South Deep turnaround strategy 

Lower gold  
price and 
volatility

• Ongoing portfolio optimisation to ensure cash-generation  
•  Increase in geographical and currency diversification
•  Application of a strict stage-gate process to ensure the cash generation 

potential of future growth projects

Non-achievement 
of	15%	free	cash	
flow margin at 
US$1,300/oz.

Replacement 
of Mineral 
Resources and 
Reserves outside 
of South Africa

• Effective portfolio management to improve the free cash flow per ounce
• Implementation of comprehensive recovery plan at Damang and St Ives 
•  Business process re-engineering and continuous focus on cost control and 

cash generation 

•  Comprehensive near-mine exploration plans in all other regions
• Examination of potential M&A opportunities
•  Approval of further capital to support drilling at the Salares Norte Project  

in Chile

Loss of ‘social 
license’ to operate

•  Ongoing targeting of M&A opportunities in lower risk mining jurisdictions
•  Ongoing application of effective community relations structures in place in 

all regions as well as societal value proposition strategies

Regulatory 
uncertainty and 
litigation

•  Continued engagement, together with peer companies, with all 

stakeholders on finding a comprehensive and sustainable solution 
to address issues relating to compensation and medical care for 
occupational lung disease in the gold mining industry in South Africa.

•  Pro-active litigation/investigation management and defence.

ProbAbiLity

•  Application of Energy and Carbon management strategies, plans and 

targets at all operations 

•  Investigation of renewable energy options for all projects
•  Major new agreement with Genser Energy for the supply of power to the 

SEVErity

Damang and Tarkwa mines 

•  Favourable renewal agreements with power providers in Australia and Peru
•  New load curtailment agreement with Eskom at South Deep without 

ProbAbiLity

impacting production

•  Five-year energy security plans required for each region in 2015

•  Ensure continued compliance with SA’s Mining Charter and its SLP
•  Continued engagement with the Department of Mineral Resources and 

SEVErity

other key stakeholders 

•  Compliance with South Deep’s commitments and implementation of  
Shared Value project, including mathematics and science-focussed 
education initiatives

7

2013: 12

Energy security 
and costs

Non-compliance 
with South 
Africa’s Mining 
Charter and 
Social & Labour 
Plans

Disruptive labour 
relations

•  Plans to move to mine-level negotiation with organised labour at 

South Deep

•  Implementation of an enhanced union engagement strategy at South Deep

Employee health 
and safety

•  Ongoing implementation of safety strategies in all regions – including 

behaviour-based safety programmes 

•  Comprehensive first-pass support programme at South Deep
•  Continuously engaging to reinforce a robust health and safety culture  

on-mine

2013 figure shows the ranking of  each risk in the previous year

ProbAbiLity

SEVErity

ProbAbiLity

SEVErity

ProbAbiLity

SEVErity

ProbAbiLity

SEVErity

ProbAbiLity

SEVErity

ProbAbiLity

SEVErity

ProbAbiLity

SEVErity

ProbAbiLity

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 201452

StrAtEgic AnALySiS

3.2  Risk and materiality (continued)

FIGURE 3.7: Top 5 risks – Australia region

Maximum

I

Y
T
R
E
V
E
S

4

1

3

2

5

Minimum	

Maximum

PROBABILITY

RISK

DESCRIPTION

MITIGATING STRATEGIES

1

2

3

4

5

Reserve life at all 
operations

•  Significant near-mine exploration to delineate further reserves 
and spend, commensurate with 1 million ounce production 
profile

•  Ongoing business improvement to achieve cost savings and 

productivity gains necessary

Native title at 
Kambalda

•  Proceedings heard in March 2014, decision handed down in 

July 2014. Appeal lodged in December 2014

•  Legal team engaged to advance appeal to full Federal Court on 

the strongest possible basis

Failure to achieve 
delivery against 
operational plans

•  Annual strategic planning process to generate realistic mine 

plans

•  Weekly, monthly and quarterly monitoring of performance

Australian gold 
price

Turnover of 
key personnel 
and impact on 
operational 
performance

• Target to be in lower quartile of Australian gold producers
•  Monitor relationship between Australian Dollar and US gold 

price

•  Review and improvement of employee development 

programmes

•  Employee Value Proposition implementation
•  Maintain current remuneration market position

FIGURE 3.8: Top 5 risks – West Africa region

Maximum

I

Y
T
R
E
V
E
S

3

2

1

4

5

Minimum	

Maximum

PROBABILITY

RISK

DESCRIPTION

MITIGATING STRATEGIES

1

2

3

4

5

Gold price 
volatility and 
increasing 
operating and 
capital costs

•  Ongoing implementation of business process re-engineering 

initiatives

• Cost leadership and cost containment
• Fit-for-purpose structure
• Renegotiate supplier contracts

Erratic power 
supply and load 
shedding

• Independent Power Purchase Agreement with Genser Energy
• Ongoing consultations with national electricity utilities
• Increase generation capabilities from back-up generators

Tightened 
fiscal policies 
– pressure on 
government to 
reduce revenue 
shortfall

Loss of 
environmental 
and social 
licence to 
operate

• Investment Agreement negotiation and implementation
•  Frequent and direct engagement with government via Chamber 

of Mines

•  Public awareness and communication campaigns
• Successful tax audits by external auditors

•  Enhanced Community Relations structures provided at 

operations

• Frequent stakeholder engagement/relationship
• Community awareness campaigns
• Preparation for Akoben (environmental) audits
• Comprehensive environmental turnaround plans implemented

Increased 
stakeholder 
expectations

•  Working with employees to improve productivity and provide a 

basis for real wage increases as a trade-off

•  Working with key suppliers to mitigate payment delays when 

they occur

• Shared Value projects rollout

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014StrAtEgic AnALySiS

53

FIGURE 3.9: Top 5 risks – South Africa region

Maximum

I

Y
T
R
E
V
E
S

3

2

1

5

4

Minimum	

Maximum

PROBABILITY

RISK

DESCRIPTION

MITIGATING STRATEGIES

1

2

3

4

5

Failure to 
achieve the mine 
plan

•  Establish organisational discipline and performance 

management systems

•  Mine plan for 2015 revised to more achievable target 
•  Critical enabling projects identified with project leaders in place

Primary and 
secondary 
support

Training & skills 
deficit at South 
Deep

•  One-pass support system to be introduced on completion of  

the underground trials

•  4.5 x 4.5m destress cut pilot project in progress to facilitate 

mechanised support

•  Full plant tailings (FPT) infrastructure and commissioning

•  Review of mechanised mining artisan requirements 
•  On-the-job operator training to advance competency levels, 

including upgraded simulator training 

•  Accelerated training for managers and supervisors 
•  On-going management and supervisory leadership 

development programmes

•  Targeted technical skills training programmes aligned to 

mechanised mining needs

Union and labour 
relations

• Develop and implement a new wage strategy
•  Improved management engagement process with labour
•  New communication structures and channels introduced

Lack of 
Heavy Mobile 
Equipment (HME) 
skills, availability 
and utilisation

• Appoint HME manager to implement a new strategy
•  Commission the new 93L workshop
•  Implement fleet performance management system
•  Implement maintenance management strategies, policies and 

procedures

•  Implement priority projects – short term gains to optimise 

operations 

FIGURE 3.10: Top 5 risks – Americas region

Maximum

I

Y
T
R
E
V
E
S

2

5

4

1

3

Minimum	

Maximum

PROBABILITY

RISK

DESCRIPTION

MITIGATING STRATEGIES

1

2

3

4

5

Erosion of free 
cash flow, price 
volatility and 
cost inflation

•  Ensure continued delivery of the production plan
•  Strict cost containment and reduction measures implemented

Poor conditions 
of some local 
houses

• Participation in government plan to repair damaged houses
• Priority repair for houses in very poor condition
• Ongoing monitoring of condition and maintenance programme

Increased social 
pressures, 
conflicts and  
community 
expectations 
due to change in 
authority 

•  Anticipation of community conflict through intensive 

engagement

• Properly planned contingencies in place for conflict
•  Stringent follow up and feedback on all commitments made to 

communities

• Focussed and strong engagement with local authorities

Increase in 
regulatory 
scrutiny, 
sanctioning 
process and 
inspections

Maintaining 
throughput

•  Aggressive process in place to challenge sanctions and 

penalties

•  Strict compliance with regulations through internal auditing and 

constant monitoring

•  SAG (Semi-autogenous grinding) mill analysis and eliminating 

motor restrictions

• Implement process plant optimisation project

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014Plant at Darlot in Australia

4.1 Ensuring our mines deliver 

  4.1.1 Group operational performance
  4.1.2 Regional operational performance
Energy and carbon management
  4.1.3

4.2 Pursuing Zero Harm 

  4.2.1 Health and safety performance
  4.2.2
Safety management
  4.2.3 Health and wellness management
4.3 Promoting environmental stewardship 

  4.3.1 Managing impacts across the lifecycle
  4.3.2 Water management
  4.3.3 Regional water initiatives
  4.3.4 Materials and waste management

56
56
59
62

67
67
67
69

72
72
73
74
76

4operations56

PiLLAr: oPtiMiSing our oPErAtionS

4.1 Ensuring our mines deliver

In 2014, Gold Fields consolidated its position as a 

this proactive strategy, Gold Fields is in a favourable position to 

more focussed, leaner business by continuing with the 

weather current low gold prices – particularly when compared to 

restructuring commenced during 2013. The most obvious 

many of  its peers.  

manifestation of  this transformation was the 2013 unbundling of 

the Company’s conventional, deep-level underground mines in 

South Africa to create Sibanye Gold. 

Gold Fields’ portfolio is now characterised by modern, fully 

mechanised open-pit and underground mining – with diversified 

production spread across three continents.

In this context, Gold Fields continued to focus on improving the 

cash-generation performance of  its existing operations. During 

2014, this included:

•  The avoidance of  marginal mining – including the cessation 

of  all heap leach production at Tarkwa – whilst protecting the 

commercial sustainability of  its mines by eschewing high-

This supports our broader strategy focused on cash-generation 

grading and investing in ore development on an ongoing basis

rather than ‘ounces for ounces sake’ – enhancing the Company’s 

ability to generate free cash flow and delivering investors 

superior value over the price of  gold during 2014 through its 

dividend policy and share price performance. As a result of 

•  Enhanced cost-efficiency at all of  its operations 
•  Brownfields exploration for Life-of-Mine extensions
•  Production and strategic planning based on the delivery of  a 
15% free cash flow margin at a gold price of  US$1,300/oz 

4.1.1 Group operational performance 

FiGure 4.1:	Group	operational	performance	

key operating statistics

Gold produced – attributable (’000oz)
Revenue (US$m)
All-in Sustaining Cost (US$/oz)
All-in Cost (US$/oz)
Gold price (US$/oz)
Operating profit (US$m)
Operating costs (US$m)
Headline earnings (losses) (US$m)
Normalised earnings (US$m)
Cash flow (outflow) (US$m)
Free cash flow margin (%)

2014

2,219
2,869
1,053
1,087
1,249
1,191
1,685
27
85
235
13

2013

2,022
2,906
1,202
1,312
1,386
1,239
1,679
(81)
58
(235)
n/a

2012

2,031
3,531
1,310
1,537
1,656
1,879
1,674
350
409
(280)
n/a

Tailings facility at Cerro Corona in Peru

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014 
 
 
 
PiLLAr: oPtiMiSing our oPErAtionS

57

PRODUCTION

COSTS 

•  What Gold Fields said it would achieve in 2014: 2.20 million 

•  What Gold Fields said it would achieve in 2014: 

attributable gold equivalent ounces 

•  What Gold Fields did achieve in 2014: 2.22 million 

attributable gold equivalent ounces

In 2014, attributable gold production increased 10% 

to 2.22 million ounces (2013: 2.02 million ounces). This reflected:

–  AiSc of uS$1,125 per attributable gold ounce 
–  Aic of uS$1,150 per attributable gold ounce 

•  What Gold Fields did achieve in 2014: 

–  AiSc of uS$1,053 per attributable gold ounce 
–  Aic of uS$1,087 per attributable gold ounce 

•  Higher production in Australia, following the integration of  the 

Yilgarn South Assets 

•  Improved production performance at Damang 
•  Higher production at Cerro Corona, as a result of  increased 
plant throughput and improved copper grades leading to 

higher gold equivalent ounces 

In 2014, the All-in Cost (AIC) of  US$1,020/oz at Gold Fields’ 

seven international mines was well below the year’s historically 

low average gold price of  US$1,249/oz (2013: US$1,386/oz) – 

producing a free cash flow margin of  14%. This compares 

favourably to the Group goal of  a 15% free cash flow margin at a 

gold price of  US$1,300/oz. This performance reflects:

The improved production performance was achieved despite: 

•  A four-month production slowdown at South Deep, as a result 

of  secondary ground support remediation work (p60)

•  Lower production at Tarkwa following the closure of  its heap 

leach facilities

The addition of  the Yilgarn South Assets to Gold Fields’ portfolio 

means the Australia region is now Gold Fields’ largest source of 

production. During 2014 production was distributed as follows 

(2013 numbers are for Q4 2013 annualised): 

•  Americas: 15% (2013: 13%) 
•  Australia: 46% (2013: 43%)
•  South Africa: 9% (2013: 13%) 
•  West Africa: 30% (2013: 31%)

Gold Fields’ production guidance for 2015 is around 2.20 million 

ounces. 

•  The robust nature of  Gold Fields’ leaner, more focussed 
portfolio – including the 2013 unbundling of  its mature, 

conventional mines in South Africa

•  The 2013 acquisition of  the Yilgarn South Assets, their 

successful integration and subsequent operational cost and 
production improvements, helped lower the Group’s average 

production costs

•  Greater cost-efficiencies at all of  the Group’s mines

At South Deep, however, AIC was US$1,732/oz. This reflected 

the fact that the mine is still in development – as well as a 

number of  short-term production disruptions (including the four-

month secondary support remediation programme).

Overall, Group AIC was US$1,087/oz (2013: US$1,312/oz), 

while Group All-in Sustaining Cost (AISC) was US$1,053/

oz (2013: US$1,202/oz). This places the Company amongst 

the lowest-cost producers in the industry – and reflects the 

successful execution of  the following key policies:

FIGURE 4.2: Attributable gold production
’000oz

FIGURE 4.3: All-in Costs
US$/oz

FIGURE 4.4: Net Cash Flow
US$ million

2,031

2,022

2,219

2,500

2,000

1,500

1,000

500

0

1,537

1,312

1,087

2,000

1,500

1,000

500

0

2012

2013

2014

2012

2013

2014

300

150

0

(150)

(300)

235

(280)

2012

(235)

2013

2014

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 201458

PiLLAr: oPtiMiSing our oPErAtionS

4.1  Ensuring our mines deliver (continued)

MANAGEMENT OF CAPITAL EXPENDITURE 

Gold Fields rationalised and prioritised capital expenditure 

without undermining the sustainability of  its operations and ore 

bodies – and despite an increase in the near-mine exploration 

expenditure of  its Australian mines during the year. As a result, 

actual capital expenditure was US$609 million – 12% below 

planned expenditure for the year (US$695 million) and 18% 

below actual capital expenditure in 2013 (US$739 million). 

South Deep experienced a sharp drop in capital spending from 

US$202 million in 2013 to US$92 million in 2014 as most of  the 

infrastructure investment at the project was completed by 2013. 

FOCUS ON CASH FLOW MANAGEMENT 

The continued prioritisation of  cash-generation over production 

volumes supported a reduction in marginal mining across the 

Group. Specific actions in 2014 included: 

•  Closure of  Tarkwa’s marginal North Heap Leach facility 
•  Increased focus  on the mining of  higher-grade deposits – 
without compromising the long-term sustainability of  each 

mine

WORKFORCE RESTRUCTURING 

Gold Fields continued to optimise its low-cost operating model 

during 2014 – including through reductions in labour costs. 

Specific actions included: 

•  The implementation of  voluntary retrenchments at South Deep 

– resulting in 529 redundancies

•  Retrenchments in Ghana following the closure of  Tarkwa’s 

heap leach facilities and the transition to a two-shift system at 

Damang – with 628 people affected at both mines

•  Continued rightsizing of  our Australian operations, following 
the Yilgarn South acquisition, affecting 98 employees at the 

four mines

Overall, the size of  the workforce decreased 8% to 15,440 

employees and contractors (2013: 16,852). Despite the regretful 

impact on those who have been retrenched, the restructuring 

has helped to deliver a leaner, more efficient workforce – as well 

as fit-for-purpose regional management teams.

RATIONALISATION OF GOLD FIELDS’ GROWTH PORTFOLIO

Gold Fields applied a strategy of  Active Portfolio Management 

through which it continued to divest itself  of  growth assets that 

are not aligned to its long-term financial and strategic objectives. 

In 2014, this included: 

•  The sale of  its 85% stake in the Yanfolila Project in Mali to 

Hummingbird Resources (p88 – 89) 

•  The sale of  its 51% stake in the Chucapaca Project in Peru to 

Buenaventura (p88 – 89)

•  The sale of  the Talas Project in Kyrgyzstan and the Asosa 

Project in Ethiopia (p88 – 89)

•  The decision to dispose of  the Arctic Platinum Project in 
Finland and the Woodjam project in Canada (p88 – 89)

Furthermore, almost all greenfields exploration has been halted – with 

focus instead being placed on near-mine growth. As a result, growth-

related expenditure dropped by 70% to US$36 million (2013: 

US$122 million). The 2013 disbandment of the Group-level Growth 

and International Projects (GIP) team – and the devolution of 

responsibilities for growth and exploration to the regional level – has 

also had a material impact on Group costs. The Group also raised 

US$107 million through the disposal of assets (p80).

For 2015 Gold Fields has provided guidance for AISC of 

US$1,055/oz and an AIC of  US$1,075/oz – reflecting a continued 

decline in capital expenditure at South Deep, as most of  the 

infrastructure investment has been completed, as well as further 

cost-efficiencies across the Group. Total capital expenditure for 

2015 is forecast at US$660 million (2014: US$609 million).

Causeways onto Lake Lefroy, at the St Ives gold mine

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014PiLLAr: oPtiMiSing our oPErAtionS

59

4.1.2 Regional operational performance

This section provides a summary of  the 2014 performance at 

each of  Gold Fields’ regions. Further details can be found in the 

online operational overviews. 

Nonetheless, higher production in Australia was partially offset 

by disruptions at St Ives, including higher-than-average rainfall 

in Q1 2014, which inhibited open-pit operations at the Neptune 

operation, the closure of  the underground Argo operation in 

Q1 2014 and a lower underground head grade.

AMERICAS

Production at Cerro Corona increased 3% – to 326,600 gold 

equivalent ounces (2013: 316,700 gold equivalent ounces). 

This performance was primarily due to: 

•  An increase in the overall amount of  ore processed, helped by 

a lower strip ratio 

•  Improved copper grades treated at the mill 

Nevertheless, higher production was partially offset by the 

presence of  secondary copper, leading to a decrease in copper 

recovery.  

Cerro Corona remained the Group’s lowest-cost operation, with 

an AIC per ounce of  gold sold of  US$316/oz (2013: US$206/oz). 

AIC, gross of  copper credit per equivalent ounce of  gold sold, 
was US$702/eq-oz (2013: US$713/eq-oz). 

AUSTRALIA 

All four mines in Western Australia – Agnew/Lawlers, 

Darlot, Granny Smith and St Ives – reported stable or 

improved production, while reducing their operational costs. 

This demonstrates the ability of  these mines to significantly 

enhance the overall quality of  Gold Fields’ production portfolio. 

In 2014, regional production increased 47% – to 

1,031,000 ounces (2013: 700,200 ounces). The increase was 

largely attributable to:

•  The inclusion of  the Yilgarn South Assets for the full year of 

operation as opposed to only one quarter in 2013

•  Ongoing operational optimisation at Agnew/Lawlers and Darlot
•  An outstanding production performance from Granny Smith 
through reduced dilution, higher in-situ grades and greater 

mining recoveries. The enhancement of  Granny Smith’s 

process plant recovery from around 88% to 93% through 

improved process flow controls and replacement of  larger 

cyclones with smaller cyclones – in line with the lower volumes 

– also contributed to improved output from the mine

•  Integration of  the Agnew and adjacent Lawlers mines to 

realise processing synergies – including the channelling of 

ore from Lawlers to Agnew’s processing plant, and the placing 

of  Lawlers’ own processing plant into care and maintenance. 

Merging the two mines also allowed on-site overheads to be 

reduced 

•  The rightsizing at Darlot with reduced tonnage at higher 

grades than previous years

In 2014, the Australia region’s AIC improved by 7% to  

US$1,015/oz (2013: US$1,094/oz). This was mainly due to:

•  A strong cost performance by Granny Smith with both mining 

costs and processing costs lower than in previous years

•  Lower capital expenditure at St Ives 
•  Staff  redundancies across all four mines

SOUTH AFRICA 

The South Deep mine in South Africa, which has one of  the 

largest known gold ore bodies in the world, represents a 

key opportunity for the Group to create long-term value for 

shareholders. Indeed, with the rest of  the Group’s portfolio 

performing to expectations, the successful delivery of  South 

Deep – which accounts for 59% of  the Group’s Mineral 
Resources and 73% of  Mineral Reserves – is Gold Fields’ 

top priority. 

2014 has been a challenging year for South Deep with the 

project’s build-up interrupted by an unplanned four-month long 

ground support remediation intervention, necessitated by safety 

considerations – as well as three fatal accidents.

To enable the delivery of  South Deep, Gold Fields has adopted 

a focussed ‘getting the basics right’ programme aimed at 

addressing the key obstacles that have prevented South Deep 

from realising its full potential. Mechanised mining at depth 

has limited industry precedent globally and by necessity the 

operating model continues to evolve as mining processes and 

practices are refined. The key components of  this programme, 

which is discussed in more detail below, are:

•  A prioritised  focus on delivering short-term objectives instead 

of  long-term build-up targets

•  The adoption of  specific key deliverables for 2015, the most 

important of  which is to urgently address the critical shortage 

of  mechanised mining and supervisory skills

•  Achieve cash breakeven during the latter half  of  2016 

2014 operating performance

During 2014 production decreased 34% to 200,500 ounces 

(2013: 302,100 ounces) and AIC dropped 2% to  

US$1,732/oz, against guidance for the year of  360,000 ounces 

at an AIC of  US$1,290/oz. The significant drop in production was 

mainly attributable to:

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 201460

PiLLAr: oPtiMiSing our oPErAtionS

4.1  Ensuring our mines deliver (continued)

•  The introduction, late in May, of  the extensive safety-related 
ground support remediation intervention, effectively limiting 
access to 70% of  the current mining areas, from which a 
significant proportion of  current production is sourced. 
This intervention led to the deferral of  approximately 
48,225 ounces of  production and will have a knock-on effect 
for production in 2015.

•  The tragic death of  three employees in May and July 2014 
(p26) led the Department of  Mineral Resources (DMR) to 
impose Section 54 stoppages to investigate the causes of 
the fatalities. This led to the deferral of  about 16,000 ounces 
of  production. Gold Fields also instituted comprehensive 
reassessments of  working practices to ensure that these type 
of  accidents are avoided in future. 

As a result of  the ground support remediation intervention and 
the Section 54 orders:

•  In aggregate 64,225 ounces of  production was deferred 

during 2014

•  Destress mining fell by 46% during 2014 from 53,700m2 to 

29,000m2

•  The opening up of  long-hole open stopes was delayed, as 

was the ancillary backfill programme

Both production and the level of  destress mining recovered 
again during Q4 2014 by 16% and 200% respectively.

Despite the lower production during 2014, South Deep made 
significant progress with the restructuring of  its cost base, with 
operating costs reduced by about 14% to R2.66 billion. The cost 
savings were driven primarily by:

2014 intervention

Late in 2013 Gold Fields, supported by a team of  mechanised 

mining experts from Australia and a Canadian engineering firm 

specialising in mechanised mining, concluded a comprehensive 

mine-wide review of  all aspects of  the mine, including all safety 

protocols, procedures and standards.

The key finding of  the review was that, while the ore body 

was well understood and the physical infrastructure on the 

mine was of  high standards, the transition of  the mine from 

the development phase to the operational phase was being 

impeded by:

•  A lack of  specialised mechanised mining and supervisory 

skills in South Africa

•  The inadequate availability and utilisation of  the mining fleet
•  Ore handling and logistical constraints underground

The review concluded that significant short term interventions 

were required to achieve long term production targets. 

Following the review South Deep implemented a comprehensive 

transformation process aimed at addressing the shortcomings 

identified during the review. 

In order to address the immediate skills shortage at South Deep, 

the following three-pronged strategy was adopted:

•  The appointment of  a new management team, supported by 
26 mechanised mining specialists from Australia in training 

and mentorship roles in various mining-related disciplines. 
•  A medium-term strategy of  recruiting skills from the limited 

•  A voluntary separation programme – agreed to with the 

mechanised mining skills pool in South Africa, was adopted.  

trade unions – through which 529 employees (or 14% of  the 
workforce) opted for voluntary retrenchment

•  Adoption of  an intensive mechanised mining training 
programme to address the mine’s long-term skills 

•  Rationalisation of  the underground fleet by removing surplus 
equipment and vehicles, leading to lower maintenance costs, 
consumables and contractor costs

Other developments during 2014 and Q1 2015 included:

•  A revision of  South Deep’s shift roster to improve productivity 

and safety performance, following an agreement with the trade 
unions. This led to the reinstitution of  the 7-2/7-5 (seven days 
on, two days off  followed by seven days on, five days off) 
work roster

•  Completion of  the centrally located mega-workshop on 

93-level during Q1 2015, which will help to improve equipment 
availability and reduce maintenance-related transit times 
in future

•  Upgrading of  underground haulage roads
•  The completion of  a new ore pass from 95-level down to 

100-level

•  A comprehensive review of  the regional support pillar 

configuration to ensure appropriate mine design and layouts 

•  Modelling of  pilot mining projects to assess the potential 
future application of  the 4.5m x 4.5m destress and incline 
slot mining methods.

requirements  

The Australian intervention had a number of  positive outcomes, 

in particular the rationalisation of  the mining fleet; the rightsizing 

of  the employee complement; and the identification of  the need 

for the safety-related ground support remediation programme. 

Its success, however, was limited by a lack of  acceptance of  the 

Australian team by South Deep’s various stakeholder groups.

It was therefore decided to accelerate the recruitment of 

leadership skills from South Africa’s mechanised mining skills 

pool. By the end of  2014 a new management team, with 

extensive mechanised mining experience in the South African 

platinum sector, was recruited, headed by Nico Muller as 

Executive Vice-President of  the South Africa region. In addition, 

we have retained a small part of  the Australian team to assist 

with ongoing training and skills transfer.

A compelling business case

The South Deep mine remains a strategic imperative for Gold 

Fields. Since obtaining full ownership of  South Deep in April 

2007, Gold Fields has significantly advanced its understanding 

of  and confidence in the ore body.

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014PiLLAr: oPtiMiSing our oPErAtionS

61

In addition, South Deep is almost fully capitalised. Since 2007, 

•  Cash burn reduction: During 2014 South Deep had a 

Gold Fields has built most of  the infrastructure needed to 

negative cash flow of  US$116 million. By achieving the 

support the build-up to full production. Of  the initial project 

above production and cost targets, the cash burn for 2015 is 

capital expenditure of  approximately R9 billion approved in 

expected to reduce, assuming rand gold prices in early 2015 

2009, 85% has been spent. Approximately R1.2 billion in 2009 

continue to prevail for the remainder of  the year. The objective 

money terms (R1.7 billion in 2015 terms (US$170 million)) 

is to work towards cash breakeven in the latter part of  2016.   

remains to be spent over the next 10 years.

The impediments to the build-up of  South Deep therefore 

do not relate to the integrity of  the ore body or the installed 

infrastructure, but rather to the mining and production 

processes. The focus during 2015 and 2016 will be on fixing the 

inputs to these processes, such as the availability of  adequate 

mechanised mining skills and the improvement of  front-line 

supervision.  

This will in turn feed into improved production systems and 

processes such as fleet maintenance and availability, destress 

mining, and opening up of  the ore body. Once these basic 

building blocks have been put in place and are performing to 

standard, we will have better resolution on what is possible in 
terms of  the medium to long-term build-up. Until then though 

South Deep will not provide any production forecasts beyond a 

one-year guidance. 

•  Short-term skills recruitment: With the senior leadership 
team now in place, South Deep will  seek to hire middle 

management and supervisory skills with the appropriate 

mechanised mining skills and experience

•  Medium to long-term skills pipeline:  Establish industry-leading 
training capacity to provide a pipeline of  appropriate skills, 

which will also be impacted by the growing competition for 

mechanised mining skills in South Africa

•  Mining discipline: Instil a disciplined mechanised mining 

culture with greater understanding of  and adherence to the 

appropriate systems and processes 

WEST AFRICA

In 2014, production at Gold Fields operations in Ghana 

decreased 6% to 736,000 ounces (2013: 785,300 ounces). 
This performance reflected further restructuring of  the Tarkwa 

and Damang mines during 2014, to maximise cash generation 

by focussing on lower volume, higher-margin mining and 

The key performance indicators for the mine management team 

processing. 

for 2015 are the following:

•  Production: A 15% increase in production to approximately 

230,000 ounces and reducing the AIC by 15% from US$1,732/oz 

to about US$1,470/oz. This guidance for 2015 does not assume 

any productivity improvements beyond what was realised in 2014.

Strict cost control measures and retrenchments at both 

operations helped reduce AIC in the West Africa region. In 2014, 

AIC improved 19% to US$1,094/oz (2013: US$1,343/oz).

Crushed ore stock pile at Damang Gold Mine in Ghana

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 201462

PiLLAr: oPtiMiSing our oPErAtionS

4.1  Ensuring our mines deliver (continued)

Optimising production at Tarkwa

4.1.3 Energy and carbon management 

During 2014, production at Tarkwa – the largest gold producer in 

the Group – decreased 12% to 558,300 ounces (2013: 632,200 

ounces). This reflected: 

•  The cessation of  all heap leach operations at the mine – with 
all ore now being processed through Tarkwa’s existing, high-

recovery Carbon-in-Leach (CIL) plant 

•  Higher-than-average rainfall during Q1 2014, which reduced 

total tonnes mined from Tarkwa’s open-pits

•  A shortage of  blasted ore at Tarkwa due to poor drill rig 
availability between Q1 and Q3 2014 – with performance 

recovering in Q4 2014

This was partly offset by an overall improvement in process 

plant performance – including throughput of  13.4 million 

tonnes against a plan of  12.3 million tonnes, and an increase in 

recovery to 97.2%. 

In 2014, AIC at Tarkwa dropped by 17% to  

US$1,068/oz (2013: US$1,291/oz). This was mainly due to 
optimisation of  the CIL plant, enhanced contractor management 

and effective cost controls. 

Sustained recovery at Damang

Damang experienced a significant improvement in operational 

performance during 2014, following extensive restructuring at 

the mine to ensure its commercial sustainability. As a result, 

Total Group energy cost increased to US$361 million in 2014 
(2013: US$305 million), comprising 21% of  Group operating 
costs in 2014 (2013: 18%). This proportion is likely to rise in a 
global context of  increasing energy demand and constraints on 
supply. As such, energy management remains a top priority – in 
terms of  controlling both costs and carbon emissions as well as 
ensuring security of  supply.

INTEGRATED ENERGY AND CARBON MANAGEMENT 
STRATEGY 

Gold Fields integrates energy and carbon management into 
all aspects of  its business through its Integrated Energy and 
Carbon Management Strategy. This strategy seeks to ensure 
energy security; decrease carbon emissions; explore immediate- 
and long-term energy efficiency opportunities; and investigate 
viable sources of  alternative energy.  

Gold Fields remains committed to renewable energy solutions at 
both its operations as well as new mine developments. For the 
latter, we have set a target of  an average of  20% renewable 
energy generation for all new mine developments. 

Energy and carbon performance was integrated into the 
balanced scorecards of  senior and line management in 2014, 
while energy security – including the evaluation of  renewable 
energy – is contained in the Group Scorecard for 2015 (p23).  

production at Damang increased 16% to 177,800 ounces 

During 2014, each region was required to:

(2013: US$153,100 ounces), while AIC decreased 25% in 2014 

to US$1,175/oz (2013: US$1,558/oz). This was mainly due to: 

•  Establish energy and carbon baselines 
•  Set targets for reducing energy consumption and carbon 

•  A focus on high-quality mining 
•  A higher head grade, which was up from 1.3 g/t to 1.5g/t, as a 

emissions until 2016 and develop strategies to achieve those 
targets

result of  improved mining and reduced dilution

•  Improved recovery as a result of  the installation of  an 

additional CIL tank

•  Transition from a three-shift mining system to a two-shift mining 
system – with a commensurate reduction in the workforce by 

around 130 employees 
•  Lower capital expenditure 

In 2014, mining activity at Damang was focussed on areas with a 

lower-strip ratio – while production levels were maximised by 

reducing dilution and focussing on the optimum cut-off  grades 

over the lifespan of  the mine. Despite these interventions, in 

2014 Damang’s mine grade was still below the estimated reserve 

grade. In addition, production was affected by unplanned mill 

stoppages in Q2 and Q3 2014, resulting in the temporary 

shutdown of  all processing at the mine for seven days. 

Despite these challenges, Damang consolidated its return to 

profitability in 2014 – following a loss-making position in 2013. 

It is now expected to generate cash flow at current gold prices 

for at least the next few years. 

•  Integrate performance indicators based on energy and carbon 
performance into the balanced scorecards of  management

In line with these requirements, the regions finalised new energy 
and carbon emission baselines in 2014 – as well as associated 
energy and carbon reduction targets (with defined strategies to 
achieve them). The regions’ 2014 energy performances, as well 
as their targeted reductions (which were subject to an external 
review), are set out below: 

•  Americas: During 2014, Cerro Corona achieved a reduction 

in diesel consumption intensity of  12% (TJ/MT mined) against 
a target of  12% and a reduction in electricity consumption 
intensity of  6% (TJ/MT processed) against a target of  8%, 
leading to savings of  US$4.3 million in energy costs.  
Actual diesel consumption (in TJ) was reduced by 24% to 
357 TJ and electricity consumption (in MWh) by 3% to 143,441 
MWh. A total reduction in carbon dioxide emissions of  13.6% 
was achieved against a target of  15.5%. All targets are 
against a baseline year of  2013. 

•  Australia: As a result of  the acquisition of  the Yilgarn South 

Assets in October 2013, net diesel consumption increased by 
129% in 2014 to 2,696 TJ and electricity consumption by 27% 
to 296,989 MWh.  

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014PiLLAr: oPtiMiSing our oPErAtionS

63

But the elimination of  marginal mining at the Australian 
operations and campaign milling at Granny Smith 
have already led to significant improvements in energy 
efficiency. A 9% (GJ) reduction in energy (electricity and 
diesel) consumption and a 7% reduction in carbon emissions 
by 2016 have been targeted for the region (using a 2012 
baseline year for St Ives and a 2013 baseline year for Agnew/
Lawlers, Granny Smith and Darlot). Energy savings of 
A$10 million were achieved for 2014. Of  this A$6 million was 
a result of  mine optimisation while A$3.9 million resulted from 
specific energy efficiency projects. 

•  west Africa: At our two Ghanaian mines net diesel 

consumption declined by 21% in 2014 to 2,926 TJ and 
electricity consumption dropped by 6% to 420,878 MWh. 
Targets for an 8.5% (GJ/oz) reduction in energy (electricity 
and diesel) consumption and a 5% reduction in carbon 
emissions have been set for the Tarkwa and Damang mines 
for 2016 (using a 2014 baseline year). Energy savings in 
2014 amounted to US$4.7 million as a result of  energy 
efficiency initiatives.

As South Deep is still in development, the project has not yet set 
reduction targets under the strategy. Nonetheless, as production 
ramps up:

Cerro Corona was particularly successful in reducing its overall 

energy consumption and associated costs, with the mine’s 

strong performance being driven by a number of  initiatives, 

including the replacement of  some of  its heavy mining fleet with 

smaller trucks and excavators and the reduction in the amount 

of  ore, waste rock and quarry material being moved at the 

mine. Nevertheless, Cerro Corona’s future energy consumption 

is expected to rise due to increased ore hardness and greater 

hauling distances.

The Australia region also delivered a strong performance in 

2014 in term of  reducing energy consumption, which was 

largely the result of  a reduction in energy demand at St Ives’ 

processing plant due to more efficient dilution processes – as 

well as improved energy efficiency at Granny Smith due to 

campaign milling.

Meanwhile, the implementation of  a fuel management system 

helped to reduce diesel consumption in the West Africa region. 

This involved the modification of  pit water pumps and pit 

lighting plants, the collection and utilisation of  fuel data, and the 
implementation of  new diesel flow meters.

REGIONAL ENERGY SECURITY 

•  The energy consumption and the carbon emissions are likely 
to increase by a compound annual growth rate (CAGR) of  4% 
from a 2013 actual to a 2016 forecast. 

Given the relatively energy-intensive nature of  mining and 

processing, it is essential that each of  Gold Fields’ mines 

benefits from a stable and affordable supply of  power. This 

•  Over the same period the intensity per ounce is likely to 

is explicitly recognised in Gold Fields’ Integrated Energy and 

decrease by 12% and intensity per ton mined/milled by 6%, 
while emissions per ounce are likely to decrease by 13% and 
per ton mined/milled by 7%.

Carbon Management Strategy. Energy security is a particular 

challenge in more remote locations – and where operations 

compete with other commercial and domestic users for finite 

Actual electricity consumption last year declined by 13% to 
476,767 MWh as a result of  lower production at the mine.

reGionAl enerGy eFFiciency initiAtiveS 

The combination of  the lower gold price, rising energy costs in 
most regions and the implementation of  carbon taxes in some 
countries means it is imperative for Gold Fields to reduce its long-
term energy consumption. In 2014, each of  Gold Fields’ regions 
implemented a range of  energy efficiency initiatives – in line with 
the Integrated Energy and Carbon Management Strategy.

supplies. 

Each region has been tasked with submitting a five-year 

energy security plan during 2015. The potential for renewable 

energy generation at each operation will again be reviewed as 

part of  these plans, as renewable energy is becoming more 

cost-effective and an increasingly competitive alternative to 

conventional power sources. The use of  renewable energy is 

also considered a key aspect of  reducing the Group’s carbon 

emissions. 

FIGURE 4.5: Group direct and indirect energy consumption
TJ (terajoules)

FIGURE 4.6: Group energy intensity
GJ (Gigajoules)

12,000

10,000

8,000

6,000

4,000

2,000

0

5,834

5,593

6,180

4,984

4,976

4,817

5.50

4.40

3.30

2.20

1.10

0

5.11

5.26

4.56

0.05

0.05

0.07

2012

2013

2014

2012

2013

2014

Indirect

Direct

GJ/Tonnes mined

GJ/oz mined

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 201464

PiLLAr: oPtiMiSing our oPErAtionS

4.1  Ensuring our mines deliver (continued)

The Americas 

South Africa

In 2014, Gold Fields extended its electricity supply agreement 

South Deep remains reliant on public energy utility Eskom for 

with private utility Kallpa to supply power to the mine until 

100% of  its power supply. However, Eskom continues to face 

2027 – significantly increasing Cerro Corona’s long-term 

power supply constraints, due to:

energy security. 

Australia 

The remoteness of  Gold Fields’ Australian operations means 

they have limited power supply options. In June 2014, a power 

purchasing agreement (PPA) was finalised with BHP Nickel West 

for Agnew/Lawlers – which will guarantee the energy supply until 

31 May 2019. 

St Ives has a 10-year PPA with BHP Nickel West – which will 

guarantee the energy supply of  the mine until 2023. Under the 

PPA, Gold Fields purchases power from BHP Nickel West at a 

higher price than that set previously, reflecting higher natural gas 

prices. The structure of  the PPA allows for the pursuit of  cost 

efficiencies through a reduction in the fixed demand charge. 

It also provides flexibility in terms of  connecting additional points 

of  supply. This includes, for example, the Cave Rocks operation 
at St Ives, which currently uses diesel generators. 

•  Historical under-investment in generating capacity
•  A maintenance backlog on the ageing generation fleet of 

power stations

•  Delays in the construction of  the Medupi and Kusile coal-fired 

power stations 

In this context, Eskom carries out load-shedding across the 

national grid whenever their available generation capacity cannot 

meet national demand. South Deep has entered into a load-

curtailment programme with Eskom (rather than being subject 

to load-shedding). This requires South Deep to reduce demand 

by up to 25% – depending on the severity of  the shortage – for 

a specified period of  time when the national grid is unable to 

maintain its load. As South Deep is not operating at full capacity 

it delays rock hoisting by storing ore underground and delays 

milling until after those load curtailment periods. As such the 
mine managed to maintain essential mining activities without 

interruption and the impact on production and development 

The PPAs at St Ives and Agnew/Lawlers are based on gas-

was limited. 

generated electricity, which will help reduce the carbon intensity 

of  these mines. This is also the case for Darlot. Meanwhile, 

Granny Smith is expected to receive its future energy supply 

from a new gas pipeline, which has been constructed by the 

nearby Tropicana mine to supply gas to its operations. Access 

to this pipeline is subject to the construction of  a gas power 

station, successful negotiations on gas supply and regulatory 

approval. This is scheduled to be completed by mid-2016 and 

will significantly reduce costs and carbon emissions relative to 

the current diesel generators on site. 

Eskom is expected to increase its energy prices by around 13% 

in 2015. South Deep will seek to mitigate the impact of  any such 

price rise through further energy efficiency improvements and 

investigating the long-term feasibility of  renewable and other 

alternative energy sources. This will form part of  its five-year 

energy security plan that will be developed during 2015.

West Africa

Tarkwa and Damang continue to source their power from the 

Volta River Authority (VRA) and the Electricity Company of 

Ghana (ECG). Power supply in Ghana remains constrained due 

to several factors. These include:

FIGURE 4.7: Group CO2 emissions - Scope 1, 2, 3
Tonnes

FIGURE 4.8: Emission intensity (Scope 1 and 2 only)
Tonnes CO2-e/oz

2,000,000

1,830,509

1,731,337

1,694,044

1,500,000

1,000,000

500,000

0

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0

0.58

0.61

0.55

2012

2013

2014

2012

2013

2014

Scope 1 GHG emission

Scope 2 GHG emission

Scope 3 GHG emission

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014PiLLAr: oPtiMiSing our oPErAtionS

65

•  Rising demand for electricity from industry in southern Ghana 
•  Seasonal fluctuations in rainfall, which can disrupt hydro-

•  The taxes increasingly attached by governments to non-

renewable energy consumption

electric power generation 

•  Delays in the completion of  Ghana’s planned Atuabo natural 

gas processing plant

•  Reduced gas imports via the West African Gas Pipeline due to 

growing domestic demand in Nigeria 

•  Maintenance challenges at thermal power plants

In this context: 

Historically, the company’s South African operations 

accounted for the bulk of  its carbon emissions. This was due 

to its previous ownership of  the power-intensive, deep-level 

underground Beatrix and KDC mines – as well as Eskom’s 

reliance on carbon-intensive coal generation. 

Following the unbundling of  Beatrix and KDC – as well as the 

acquisition of  the Yilgarn South Assets – the Group has a lower, 

•  Daily load-shedding of  between 25% – 30% of  the mines’ 

more ‘balanced’ carbon profile. Gold Fields is undertaking 

electricity consumption was introduced during Q4 2014 and 

a number of  carbon and climate change management and 

could persist well into 2015

reporting initiatives – in addition to its broader efforts to reduce 

•  Both the VRA and ECG are expected to impose further 

its overall energy consumption and carbon emissions (p62 – 63). 

increases to the electricity tariff

•  The ECG has implemented controlled load-shedding, 

Carbon disclosure and renewable energy

requiring Damang to use on-site diesel generators during 

Gold Fields responds on an annual basis to the international 

specific periods

Such challenges are likely to grow in the medium term, given 

that electricity demand in Ghana is expected to surpass national 

generation capacity by 2020.

To address the current load-shedding requirements Tarkwa and 

Damang initiated a number of  actions: 

•  Securing additional surplus power (5 – 7MW) from Unilever
•  Making more extensive use of  generators, amid lower diesel 

prices

•  Implementing a load-shedding schedule to optimise power 

consumption

In the medium to long term Gold Fields has entered into a  

10-year PPA with independent US-based power producer 

Genser Energy. Under the PPA, Genser will commission a 

near-site clean coal power-generation facility at Tarkwa in 2016. 

The delivery of  power will begin in Q2 2015 from an alternative 

Genser plant while the new facility is being completed. It will 

eventually replace all or a significant proportion of  Tarkwa and 

Carbon Disclosure Project’s (CDP) climate change and water 

questionnaires. This information – along with that of  other 

organisations – is aggregated to produce the Carbon Disclosure 
Leadership Index (CDLI) and Carbon Performance Leadership 

Index (CPLI).

In 2014, Gold Fields achieved a disclosure score of  96% in the 

CDLI and obtained a ‘B’ rating in the CPLI. The rating represents 

a decline from previous years – including an ‘A’ rating in 2013. 

This decline in performance is due to: 

•  The 2014 rebasing of  energy and carbon management targets 
due to Group restructuring in 2013 – as well as temporary 

delays to associated energy efficiency projects

•  The loss of  the Beatrix methane project and the biomass-to-

energy project at KDC following the Sibanye Gold unbundling 
•  The discontinuation of  a planned 30MW biomass power plant 

project at Tarkwa for economic reasons

Gold Fields continues to examine potential renewable energy 

opportunities, in light of: 

Damang’s current supply from the VRA and ECG. During the 

•  Challenges posed by remote, off-grid growth projects, such 

first two years of  operation, Genser will supply 51MW of  power, 

as Salares Norte in Chile 

representing Gold Fields’ total electricity demand in Ghana. 

Over the 10-year contract, the PPA could potentially save around 

•  Improving renewable energy economics, which are being 
driven by technological advances – as well as growing 

47% on the cost of  power currently supplied by the VRA and 

economies of  scale within the sector 

ECG. The PPA will, however, increase the Company’s carbon 

•  The ability of  a diversified energy mix to enhance operational 

emissions, by replacing electricity currently generated through 

energy security 

hydropower with coal-generated electricity.

•  The potential for offsetting future carbon taxes and/or 

CARBON EMISSIONS AND CLIMATE CHANGE 

Carbon emissions and climate change represent a material issue 

for Gold Fields. This is due to:

generating carbon credits 

•  The ability of  renewable energy projects to offer positive 
legacies to local communities and create Shared Value 

Carbon taxes

•  The long-term risks posed by climate change both to its own 

operations and to wider society

Governments around the world are considering the benefits of 
increased carbon regulation and taxation, as demonstrated in 

•  Growing efforts to regulate carbon emissions in a range of 

Australia and South Africa. 

jurisdictions

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 201466

PiLLAr: oPtiMiSing our oPErAtionS

4.1  Ensuring our mines deliver (continued)

Australia

South Africa

In July 2014, Australia’s new coalition government repealed 

The South African government continues to pursue plans to 

the Carbon Pricing Mechanism (CPM) – which had been 

impose a carbon tax on mining and other carbon-intensive 

implemented under the previous administration in 2012. Under 

industries, but has not provided a detailed plan to date. Under 

the CPM, the Agnew/Lawlers, Granny Smith and St Ives mines 

the government’s draft Carbon Tax paper, the tax will be 

had faced reductions of  their diesel rebates – which would have 

implemented in early 2016 at a starting price of  R120 (US$11) 

significantly increased their energy costs. Darlot exceeded the 
25 000 tonne CO2 emission threshold for 2014. As such Gold 
Fields will offset that liability through the purchase of  carbon 

per tonne, but offers as yet unspecified relief  measures. 

Based on our analysis of  the draft bill, if  South Deep is liable 

to pay carbon tax, this is expected to be done over 40% of 

units at a total cost of  A$608 555. Although the carbon tax 

the mine’s Scope 1 emissions (direct emissions that are the 

legislation is no longer applicable, we need to settle our account 

result of  its operations). On this basis the potential tax liability 

for the period July 2013 to June 2014. Although Gold Fields 

in 2016 is estimated at R335,000 (US$30,000). The industry 

supports efforts to reduce global carbon emissions, it believes 

continues to engage with government on alternative ways to 

that more economically sustainable approaches to carbon 

positively address carbon emissions.

management in Australia are appropriate. 

Laboratory testing of metal concentrations at Granny Smith in Australia

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014     
PiLLAr: oPtiMiSing our oPErAtionS

67

4.2 Pursuing Zero Harm

Gold Fields continues to uphold its promise, “if  we cannot mine 

GROUP SAFETY PERFORMANCE 

safely, we will not mine”. This reflects the need to minimise 

any potential negative impact on people, maintain operational 

continuity and protect the Company’s reputation. Gold Fields’ 

Group annual performance bonus contains a 20% safety 

component. Furthermore, maintaining safe and healthy working 

conditions is a key compliance issue for the Company. 

As stated in its Occupational Health and Safety Policy, Gold 

Fields strives for ‘Zero Harm’ at all of  its operations – and to 

minimise occupational health and safety hazards. All of  the 

Group’s operations are now certified to the OHSAS 18001 

international health and safety management standard. This 

FiGure 4.9:	Group	safety	performance

TRIFR1

Fatalities 
Lost Time Injuries2
Restricted Work Injuries3
Medically Treated Injuries4
Total Recordable Injuries
Man-hours

2014

4.04

3
75
84
38
200
49,456,833

2013

4.14

2
52
73
54
181
43,767,818

follows the 2014 certification of  Granny Smith and Darlot – both 

of  which were acquired from Barrick Gold in Q4 2013. The 

1 Total Recordable Injury Frequency Rate (TRIFR) Group safety metric was 

introduced in 2013. TRIFR = (Fatalities + Lost Time Injuries + Restricted Work 
Injuries + Medically Treated Injuries) x 1,000,000/number of man-hours worked.

Lawlers mine, also acquired from Barrick, was certified through 

2 A Lost Time Injury (LTI) is a work-related injury resulting in the employee or 

its merger with Agnew. In addition, all Gold Fields operations are 

now fully compliant with the requirements of  the International 

Cyanide Management Code (ICMC). 

All of  Gold Fields’ regional operations are required to implement 

health, safety and wellness strategies, together with associated 

action plans. These address:

•  Occupational safety
•  Occupational health 
•  Employee wellness
•  Community health and wellbeing 

In addition, these strategies and action plans define relevant 

management structures, resource allocations and reporting 

requirements. 

4.2.1 Health and safety performance

contractor being unable to attend work for a period of one or more days after the 
day of the injury. The employee or contractor is unable to perform any of his/her 
duties.

3 A Restricted Work Injury (RWI) is a work-related injury sustained by an employee 
or contractor which results in the employee or contractor being unable to perform 
one or more of their routine functions for a full working day, from the day after the 
injury occurred. The employee or contractor can still perform some of his/her 
duties.

4 A Medically Treated Injury (MTI) is a work-related injury sustained by an employee 
or contractor which does not incapacitate that employee and who, after having 
received medical treatment, is deemed fit to immediately resume his/her normal 
duties on the next calendar day, immediately following the treatment or  
re-treatment.

During the reporting period, the Group’s overall TRIFR improved 

3% to 4.04 per million man-hours (2013: 4.14). This reflected:

•  Improved safety performance at South Deep (although this 
was partly linked to slowdown in production during the four-

month remediation programme)

•  Improved safety performance in Australia following the 

implementation of  a behavioural-based health and safety 

MEASURING PERFORMANCE

strategy

In 2014, Gold Fields continued to focus on implementing 

its Group Safety Reporting Guideline, which is based on 

the International Council on Mining and Metals (ICMM) 
guidelines.1 Since 2013, Gold Fields has aligned its health and 
safety metrics with those of  the ICMM, headed by the total 

•  Improved safety performance in West Africa, following the 

implementation of  a range of  interventions (p68 – 69)

4.2.2 Safety management 

Details of  specific regional safety initiatives implemented in 2014 

recordable injury frequency rate as a key metric (TRIFR). Gold 

are set out below. 

Fields’ peer companies tend to use the TRIFR metric, which 

assists with benchmarking Group performance against the 

THE AMERICAS 

wider sector.

In 2014, Cerro Corona placed particular focus on improving 

contractor safety. This followed the death of  a contracted worker 

at the mine in 2013. As a result, Cerro Corona extended its 

employee Behaviour Change Programme to include contractors. 

Relevant initiatives applied in 2014 included a review of 

1

See ICMM, January 2014, Health and safety performance indicators – www.icmm.com/publications/safety-data

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014 
 
68

PiLLAr: oPtiMiSing our oPErAtionS

4.2  Pursuing Zero Harm (continued)

contractors’ safety programmes and improvement of  the safety 

induction process for contractors. The mine’s TRIFR rose slightly 

•  The integration of  a Health and Safety Management System 
into the new induction processes introduced at South Deep, 

in 2014 to 0.38 per million man-hours (2013: 0.34). 

following the major review process – as well as the standard 

AUSTRALIA 

induction process. The system is being audited on a quarterly 

basis, with the first audit completed in Q1 2015

During 2014, the Australia region implemented a safety strategy 

•  The mine reverted to a 7-2/7-5 roster system – in part, to 

focussing on best practice tools, programmes and processes. 

address concerns about fatigue-related safety risks caused 

It also focussed on achieving OHSAS 18001 international health 

by the recently introduced 24/7, 12-hour shift system. This 

and safety certification at its Yilgarn South Assets. This resulted 

transition was supported by a five-day training programme for 

in the successful certification of  both Granny Smith and Darlot to 

each new roster cycle to ensure employees and contractors 

OHSAS 18001. Lawlers was certified in Q4 2014 under Agnew’s 

were sufficiently trained to work safely within the new roster 

certification.

system

The region implemented an innovative behaviour-based safety 

programme called ‘Vital Behaviours’ for all employees and 

contractors. Vital Behaviours engages the workforce through 

participatory workshops aimed at promoting safe workplace 

behaviour. Participants share experiences (on a confidential 

basis), whilst analysing and reflecting on past cases where they 

may have acted in an unsafe or non-compliant way. In parallel 

with this process, the Australia region rolled out the ‘Visible Felt 
Leadership’ programme in 2014. This involves training senior 

managers to engage with their teams on safety issues. 

The implementation of  these two programmes appears to have 

played a role in the dramatic improvement of  the region’s safety 

performance in 2014 – with the TRIFR decreasing to 17.04 per 
million man-hours (2013: 23.471). This represented the region’s 
best performance to date – and took place at the very time that 

the region was integrating the Yilgarn South Assets.

SOUTH AFRICA

In 2014, two employees and one contractor at South Deep 

were tragically killed in workplace accidents (p15; 26). These 

•  Workers were provided with general refresher safety courses 

as they returned to work following the Section 54 safety 

shutdowns – as well as role-specific modules. This also 

included training on the new roster system 

•  The installation of  proximity detection systems, which help 
personnel avoid danger zones when working near heavy 

mining equipment

•  The installation of  new rail-bound equipment, including the 

Rovic auto-coupler which eliminates the need for personnel to 

manually couple and uncouple rolling stock 

In addition, the mine continued to carry out substance testing. 

A total of  5,127 employees and contractors were tested for the 

use of  cannabis, with 99 of  those tested found to be positive 

(2% of  the total). A total of  51,500 alcohol tests were carried 

out among employees and contractors, of  which 57 yielded 

positive results. The positive cases were referred to Gold Fields’ 

Employee Assistance Programme (EAP) – where first offenders 

received counselling and other assistance to address substance 

use. Repeat offenders were dismissed due to the potential safety 

risks they posed to the workplace. 

deaths – all of  which occurred underground – related to two 

In 2014, South Deep’s TRIFR improved by 10% to 4.65 per 

workshop accidents and a machinery incident. On 27 May 2014, 

million man-hours (2013: 5.19). 

the DMR imposed a Section 54 notice on the mine, following a 

review of  the circumstances surrounding the first two fatalities. 

WEST AFRICA

The notice placed a moratorium on all workshop-related 

Despite already achieving some of  the best safety performances 

activities, effectively bringing production to a halt.

across the Group, West Africa instituted a number of  enhanced 

The notice was lifted on 30 May 2014 after Gold Fields filed a 

report to the DMR confirming compliance with the Mines Health 

safety measures following a lost time incident in September 2014 

at Tarkwa’s CIL plant. These included: 

and Safety Act (Section 11(5)). Simultaneously, South Deep 

Tarkwa

implemented a wide range of  safety-based remedial actions, 

including the completion of  secondary support in older parts of 

the mine – as prompted by the February 2014 review (see p60). 

This secondary support work was completed in October 2014. 

A fatality in July 2014 also led to a Section 54 stoppage 

being imposed for about a week in the affected areas, before 

being lifted. 

Gold Fields remains committed to eradicating residual safety 

risks at South Deep by instituting further safety management 

initiatives. In 2014, these included: 

•  The drive to reduce vehicle-related incidents continued with 

74,970 breathalyser tests conducted 

•  The 100 Injury Free Day Challenge safety campaign was re-

energised 

•  Senior managers’ night and dawn visits to selected working 
sites commenced to create safety awareness during the 

Festive season 

1

The relatively high TRIFR for Australia is partly due to higher number of  restricted work injuries (RWI) reported relative to other regions. This reflects more conservative injury 
classifications being employed by local medical practitioners, who are concerned about the possibility of  injury severity escalations

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014PiLLAr: oPtiMiSing our oPErAtionS

69

Damang

•  The Safety Referee Policy, which involves the issuance of 
colour-coded cards to offenders of  safety rules, was also 

revised and is now being implemented to boost the overall 

safety performance of  the mine

•  Simulation drills were conducted to test the readiness of  the 

emergency response team

•  13,684 employees were randomly tested for alcohol

The implementation of  these safety initiatives helped improve the 

region’s TRIFR, which decreased 20% to 0.75 per million man-

hours (2013: 0.94). 

4.2.3 Health and wellness management 

All operational employees are subject to entry and exit medical 

assessments – and in certain operations, employees also  

undergo annual medical assessments that aim to prevent, 

identify and treat occupational diseases. These assessments, 

which are – at a minimum – aligned with the legal requirements 

of  each operating jurisdiction, focus on operation and role-

specific health risks. Employees are also offered quantitative, 

confidential health risk assessments. These not only address 

occupational diseases, but also general health and lifestyle 

issues such as hypertension, diabetes, cholesterol, diet and 

mental health. 

In 2014, 49 new cases of  cardiorespiratory tuberculosis (CRTB) 
(2013: 42) were recorded. This increase can be attributed to 
the fact that during the year South Deep enhanced its efforts 
to identify CRTB cases. There was therefore an increase in the 
total number of  patients screened, and the final number of  CRTB 
cases identified.

Wellness is a material issue given the location of  Gold Fields’ 
mines, the nature of  employees’ working patterns and the 
lifestyle challenges associated with the sector. All of  Gold 
Fields’ regions run dedicated wellness programmes, tailored to 
both the national and local context of  each mining operation. 
These programmes aim to identify and manage chronic medical 
conditions within the workforce – whilst also maximising its 
productive capacity and reducing absenteeism. 

occupAtionAl heAlth 

Gold Fields is committed to reducing the exposure of  its 
employees to occupational health risks – including those 
associated with air quality, Silicosis, tuberculosis and hearing 
loss. As such, each region has implemented management plans 
for diesel particulates, silica dust, radiation and noise. These 
provide for ongoing and regular monitoring of  exposure levels at 
all operations. Particular emphasis is placed on managing the 
underground working environments in Gold Fields’ Australian 
and South African operations – due to the heightened health 
risks that underground mining poses to workers.

In 2014, the number of  occupational health cases submitted for 

Noise 

compensation was as follows: 

•  13 cases of  Noise-Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) (2013: 8)
•  15 cases of  Silicosis (2013: 12)

We await a final outcome of  the assessments that are conducted 

as a matter of  course by the Medical Bureau for Occupational 

Disease (MBOD) and the Rand Mutual Association (RMA), which 

will determine the final number of  cases accepted.

We remain committed to further reducing noise levels at South 
Deep. New targets have been set by the national Mine Health 
and Safety Council (MHSC), which were adopted in November 
2014 and require that total noise emitted by all mining equipment 
should not exceed 107 (A-weighted) decibels (dB(A)) by 2025. 
Throughout 2014, the mine met the current MHSC target of  not 
more than 110 dB(A). Silencing of  underground fans and the 
application of  noise management measures to the underground 
mining fleet played a key role in helping the mine meet 
this target.

Nurse at medical station at South Deep in South Africa

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 201470

PiLLAr: oPtiMiSing our oPErAtionS

4.2  Pursuing Zero Harm (continued)

To further reduce employee exposure to noise levels exceeding 

Diesel particulate matter

the statutory requirements of  85 dB(A) over an eight-hour shift, 

the mine piloted new moulded hearing protection devices in 

2014. These are custom fitted for each employee’s ear and were 

distributed to all 500 identified high-risk employees. It should be 

noted that the measurement of  exposure levels above 85 dB(A) 

do not take into account the protection afforded by hearing 

Gold Fields undertakes regular monitoring and analysis of  the 

concentration of  diesel particulate matter at all of  its operations. 

This issue is particularly material at Gold Fields’ underground 

mines in Australia and South Africa – due to the potential 

concentration of  particulates in specific working areas. 

protection devices, which are issued to all employees working 

While there are no regulatory limits, the Australia region 

in high exposure areas.

Silica dust exposure  

implemented a strategy in 2014 designed to reduce exposure 

to Diesel Particulate Matter (DPM) with a focus on fitting filters 

to equipment, refining maintenance schedules, ensuring 

South Deep continued to implement improved dust control 

the correct levels of  ventilation and to provide appropriate 

measures, in accordance with MHSC requirements. Examples of 

procedural controls. Sampling programmes have indicated 

actions taken in 2014 include:

the success of  this initiative with a dramatic decline in 

•  Real-time dust monitoring
•  The fitting of  water mist sprays at dust sources
•  Dust management controls on footwalls and internal tips
•  Installation of  manually controlled water blasts in all working 

areas

Throughout 2014, South Deep stayed within the 5% threshold for 

the proportion of  individual silica dust measurements exceeding 
the occupational exposure limit (OEL) of  0.1mg/m3 – as set by 
the MHSC. The average percentage sample above the OEL at 

the mine in 2014 was 4.9% (2013: 3.8%). 

Gold Fields is continuing its efforts to eliminate the incidence of 

Silicosis and tuberculosis through improved underground dust 

management and a number of  other measures. 

In November 2014 Anglo American South Africa, AngloGold 

Ashanti, Gold Fields, Harmony and Sibanye formed an industry 

working group to address issues relating to compensation and 

medical care for occupational lung disease in the gold mining 

industry in South Africa. The companies intend to engage 

all stakeholders to work together to design and implement a 

comprehensive solution that is both fair to past, present and 

future gold mining employees, and also sustainable for the 

sector. The companies are already engaging with a number of 

stakeholders as part of  an intensive engagement process during 

2015 intended to lead to a comprehensive solution. 

The companies believe that fairness and sustainability are 

necessary to any comprehensive solution. The companies are 

among respondent companies in a number of  lawsuits related 

to occupational lung disease. The five companies do not believe 

that they are liable in respect of  the claims brought, and they are 

defending these. They do, however, believe that they should work 

together to seek a solution to this South African mining industry 

legacy issue.

The companies active in gold mining have been working for 

many years to try to eliminate the incidence of  occupational lung 
disease. These efforts continue.

DMP levels underground, to a point where only 2% of  samples 
have exceeded the internal target of  70ug/m3. This is in line 
with targets recommended by the Australian Institute for 

Occupational Hygienists.

In South Africa, the DMR has developed a draft regulatory 

framework to establish a DPM OEL. This proposal, published 
in February 2014, recommends a four-year ‘step-in-approach’ 
starting at 350ug/m3 – and systematically decreasing to  
160ug/m3 by January 2018. In response, Gold Fields carried 
out a study to establish current exposure levels at South Deep, 

which found that in a number of  areas the 2015 exposure levels 

were exceeded by 4.5% and the 2018 levels by 26%. As such, 

Gold Fields recognises that more work is needed for South Deep 

to comply with the proposed OEL for DPMs. 

Q3 2014 saw the finalisation of  a new fuel supply contract with 

Sasol through which South Deep now receives only ultra-low 

sulphur content diesel (10 ppm). Sampling suggests this 

has helped reduce airborne DPMs by up to 45% depending 

on location. 

Gold Fields will continue to research the benefits of  exhaust 

treatments at South Deep – including diesel particulate filters. 

Furthermore, it is likely that the mine’s DPM performance will 

automatically improve with time due to the ongoing acquisition 

of  more advanced engine technology. Indeed, the introduction 

of  ultra-low sulphur diesel extends the range of  engines that 

can be employed at the mine.

Radiation 

Underground mining – including that carried out at South 

Deep – has the potential to expose workers to latent radiation. 

South Africa’s National Nuclear Regulator Act stipulates that the 

maximum permissible personal exposure from ionising radiation 

is 100 millisievert (mSV) in aggregate per five consecutive years 

– and may not exceed 50mSV in a single year over a five-year 

period. Occupational monitoring at South Deep showed that the 

annual exposure limit of  50mSV was not exceeded at any point 
in 2014 and that average exposures were between 3 – 6mSV 

between 2010 and 2014. 

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014PiLLAr: oPtiMiSing our oPErAtionS

71

HIV/AIDS AND TUBERCULOSIS

FiGure 4.10:		Occupational	disease	in	the	South	Africa	region	

HIV/AIDS management is integrated into Gold Fields’ 

(Rate per 1,000 employees)

mainstream health services to improve worker participation and 

minimise stigmatisation. Voluntary Counselling and Testing (VCT) 

takes place during regular employee health assessments. This 

has the added benefit of  directly addressing the interaction 

of  HIV/AIDS with related health issues such as tuberculosis 

(TB) and sexually transmitted infections (STIs).

Gold Fields’ workforce in South Africa faces a particular risk of 

exposure to HIV/AIDS, in a national context where an estimated 

19.1% of  adults (aged 15 to 49) live with the disease (latest 
available data).1 Gold Fields is committed to lowering the  
HIV/AIDS prevalence rate at its South African operations, which 

is around 12% as 152 employees of  1,320 tested positive in 

Noise-induced Hearing 
Loss (NIHL)1
Cardio-respiratory 

tuberculosis (CRTB)
Silicosis1
Chronic obstructive 
airways disease (COAD)1
SA workforce

2014

2013

2012

0.15

0.06

0.07

0.93
0.27

0.08
5 246

0.65
0.19

0.00
6 466

0.48
0.21

0.04
8 286

1  Based on the number of  cases submitted for compensation

2014. The region’s integrated HIV/AIDS, STI and TB Strategy 

MALARIA 

(HAST Strategy) directly addresses interactions between these 

The workforce in Ghana faces a high risk of  exposure to Malaria. 

diseases. It is based on four key pillars:

•  Promotion: This includes regular publicity campaigns and 

condom distribution at all workplaces

•  Prevention: VCT is provided to all employees, contractors, their 
partners and family members on a confidential basis. In 2014, 

the region’s VCT participation rate was 25% (2013: 16%)

In 2012, for example, Ghana recorded 3.76 million Malaria cases 
country-wide (latest available data).3 Furthermore, Gold Fields’ 
Ghanaian mines are in an area of  elevated Malaria exposure.4 
In 2014, there were 681 workplace Malaria cases that tested 

positive at the Ghanaian operations (2013: 708), none of  which 

proved fatal. 

•  Treatment: Free Highly Active Anti-retroviral Treatment (HAART) 

Gold Fields has a comprehensive Malaria strategy in place in 

is provided to HIV-infected employees through onsite, 

Ghana, that incorporates education, prevention, prophylaxis and 

doctor-staffed clinics. In 2014, 58 employees joined the South 

treatment. This includes spraying accommodation (both on-mine 

Africa region’s HAART programme (2013: 53). This takes the 

and within the community), fitting anti-mosquito screens in mine 

total number of  active participants to 262 (2013: 253) – with 

accommodation, support for community health facilities and 

435 cumulatively enrolled since the HAART programme began 

rapid diagnosis and treatment. 

in 2004. Employees’ dependants can also receive HAART via 

the Company’s medical aid schemes

EBOLA 

Although no Ebola cases were recorded in Ghana in 2014, Gold 

Fields took proactive steps to prepare for potential infection. 

This included the development of  a formal Ebola Management 

Strategy and Plan, which addresses: 

•  The monitoring of  infections across West Africa
•  Capability-building for members of  the Employee Wellbeing 
team, staff  at the Tarkwa Mine Hospital and local volunteers
•  Additional resourcing to support potential control protocols – 

including screening, isolation and treatment

•  Support: This includes doctor-based primary healthcare, 
psychological counselling and social services for all 

employees and contractors 

In addition – and in recognition of  the potentially close 

relationship between HIV/AIDS in the workplace and local 

communities – South Deep supports a number of  community-

based HIV/AIDS projects. 

Gold Fields’ workforce also faces exposure to HIV/AIDS in 

Ghana, where an estimated 1.3% of  adults (aged 15 to 49) 
live with the disease (latest available data).2 All employees and 
contractors have access to a confidential VCT programme 

which employees receive free of  charge. This programme 

had a 45% participation rate in 2014 among employees and 

contractors, while the employee participation rate on its own was 

78%. Anyone testing positive is provided with free treatment in 

line with the government’s national HIV treatment programme 

which supplies drugs free of  charge. Gold Fields also 

implements community-based HIV/AIDS programmes in Ghana 

– including awareness-raising (via radio and trained community 
health educators) and condom distribution.

1 UNAIDS, 2014, South Africa: HIV and AIDS estimates (2013)

2 UNAIDS, 2014, Ghana: HIV and AIDS estimates (2013)

3 World Health Organization, 2014, Global Health Observatory Data Repository

4

See Malaria Atlas Project, 2014, Ghana – www.map.ox.ac.uk/explore/countries/GHA/

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014 
 
72

PiLLAr: oPtiMiSing our oPErAtionS

4.3 Promoting environmental stewardship

The potential environmental risks associated with industrial 

mining are obvious – both for the environment and for local 

stakeholders. Furthermore, environmental incidents can 

materially impact Gold Fields’ reputation – as well as its ability to 

comply with its contractual and regulatory obligations. As such, 

Gold Fields remains committed to the continual improvement 

of  its environmental performance. Key areas of  focus 

include water stewardship (p74); Acid Mine Drainage (AMD) 

management (p74); Tailing Storage Facilities (TSF) management 

(p76); a proactive approach to mine closure; the reduction of 

carbon emissions and energy consumption; energy security; and 

climate change (p62 – 66).

4.3.1 Managing impacts across the lifecycle 

Gold Fields’ approach to environmental management is defined 
by relevant local legislation and regulations, its sustainable 

development framework, as well as the ISO 14001 international 

environmental management standard, the ten principles of  the 

ICMM and the UN Global Compact. Following the successful 

certification of  Granny Smith and the inclusion of  Lawlers 

in the Agnew certification process in 2014, all the Group’s 

•  Americas: US$57 million (15% of  total)
•  Australia: US$213 million (54% of  total)
•  South Africa: US$32 million (8% of  total)
•  West Africa: US$89 million (23% of  total)

The funding methods used to make provision for the required 

portion of  the mine closure cost liabilities, in accordance with 

in-country legislation, are:

•  Ghana: reclamation bonds underwritten by banks, and 

restricted cash

•  South Africa: contributions into environmental trust funds and 

guarantees

•  Australia: due to legislative changes in Western Australia 

becoming effective in July 2014, companies are now required 

to pay an annual levy to the State of  1% of  the total mine 
closure liability. This levy goes into a State-administered fund 

known as the Mine Rehabilitation Fund which will be used to 

rehabilitate legacy sites or sites that have been prematurely 

closed or abandoned.  
•  Peru: bank guarantees

operations are now certified to ISO 14001. During 2014, the 

Amendments to South Africa’s National Environmental 

Group spent US$27 million on environmental management 

Management Act in 2014 further broadened the scope of  Gold 

(2013: US$32 million). Total gross closure liabilities in 2014 were 

Fields’ potential liability exposure. These amendments stipulate 

estimated at US$391 million (2013: US$355 million), broken 

that directors could potentially be held personally liable for their 

down as follows: 

company’s negative environmental impact.

FiGure 4.11:	Group	environmental	performance		

Group

Environmental incidents (Level 2)
Environmental incidents (Level 3)

Water withdrawal (Mℓ)1 

Water discharge (Mℓ)
Gross closure costs (US$m)
CO2 emissions (scope 1 and 2) ('000 tonnes)
CO2 emissions (scope 3) ('000 tonnes)
Carbon intensity (tonnes CO2-e/oz)3
Electricity (MWh)1
Diesel (TJ)1
NOx, SOx and other emissions (tonnes)
Cyanide consumption (tonnes)
Mining waste ('000 tonnes)
Waste materials ('000 tonnes)

2014

58
4

2013

49
3

2012

43
6

30,207

30,302

23,688

11,6202
391
1,258
436
0.55
1,338,074
6,065.94
5,176
10,660
138,522
144

2,526
355
1,235
496
0.61
1,382,105
5,509.48
5,504
13,660
190,007
176

6,229
249
1,233
597
0.58
1,384,459
5,697.59
5,692
16,226
176,272
217

1 The numbers disclosed only include our operations, as head offices are not considered to be material

2 Granny Smith discharges water into Lake Carey and Tarkwa treats and discharges the water from its heap leach facilities into the environment

3 Scope 1 & 2 only 

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014PiLLAr: oPtiMiSing our oPErAtionS

73

In 2014, Gold Fields implemented several new Group guidelines 

to ensure the effective and coherent management of  key 

environmental issues across the Group – whilst allowing for a 

degree of  local flexibility. These issues include:

4.3.2 Water management

FiGure 4.12:	Group	water	withdrawal	
FIGURE 4.X: Group water withdrawal
Million litres

•  Water management
•  Mine closure management
•  Energy and carbon management
•  Community relations and stakeholder engagement

A summary of  the corporate guidelines can be found on the 

Gold Fields website.

Corporate guidelines: www.goldfields.com/sus_guide.php

ENVIRONMENTAL INCIDENTS

Gold Fields reports environmental incidents using an internal 

scale ranging from Level 1 (the most minor) to Level 5 (the 
most serious).1 No Level 4 or Level 5 incidents were recorded 
across the Group in 2014. However, South Deep experienced 

four Level 3 environmental incidents (2013: 3), all of  which were 

reported to the relevant regulatory authorities. Details of  these 

are set out below:

30,302

30,207

23,688

35,000

30,000

25,000

20,000

15,000

10,000

5,000

0

2012

2013

2014

Water management is a critical long-term issue for the mining 

industry as a whole. In part, this is because: 

•  Water is an important vector for the potential spread of 

pollution (whether as a result of  an immediate incident or the 
gradual build-up and movement of  contaminants over time) 

– making it a key compliance issue

•  February 2014: A surface portion of  an underground hydraulic 
pipe transporting oil burst, spilling about 2,000 litres of  oil. The 

•  Mining can require large volumes of  water – and often takes 

place in locations that are already water-stressed

damaged piece of  pipe was replaced and the spill completely 

•  Poor water management can have significant social and 

cleaned up

•  March 2014: The pollution control dam and the return water 
dam overflowed into adjacent rivers after excessive average 

rainfalls and amid lower production levels, which raised the 

mine’s water balance. The mine’s water management plan 

contains medium-term solutions that seek to minimise the 

potential for dam overflows 

•  June 2014: Discharges of  process water occurred via 
an unauthorised installed pipeline at the backfill plant. 

The pipeline was closed and there have been no further 

unauthorised discharges from this area

•  July 2014: Water seepage was identified at the Doornpoort 
return water dam. The mine is currently conducting a blast 

curtain trial – in addition to the existing seepage collection 

trenches – to contain future seepages at the dam

political consequences, where local communities are affected 

by, for example, water scarcity, high levels of  agricultural 

activity and a lack of  effective water infrastructure

In this context, Gold Fields remains committed to responsible 

water stewardship – both for the benefit of  host communities and 

for its own operations. In practice, this means:

•  Measuring and reporting on water management performance
•  Integrating water management into mine planning
•  Leaving an enduring, positive legacy

Reflecting these commitments, each operation implements an 

Environmental Management System (EMS), through which it 

assesses, manages, monitors and reports on water use and the 

quality of  its discharges (where these occur). 

The increase in serious water-related environmental incidents 

at South Deep in the first half  of  2014 prompted a thorough 

review of  key water management issues at the mine, leading to 

a comprehensive water management action plan that was rolled 

In 2014, water withdrawal across the Group fell marginally to 
30.207Mℓ (2013: 30.302Mℓ), despite the integration of  the 
Yilgarn South Assets. This decrease was largely due to: 

out in Q3 and Q4 2014. (See details on p75 – 76.) Following the 

1.  Significant decrease at St Ives in pit dewatering during 2014

roll-out of  the plan, no further water-related Level 3 incidents 

were recorded between July 2014 and 31 December 2014. 

2.  Tarkwa sent the rainfall on the heap leaches directly to 

the reverse osmosis (RO) plants for discharge, rather than 

Gold Fields’ grievance mechanism allows stakeholders to 

allowing the water to enter the mine circuit

address environmental issues and complaints.

3. 

Installation of  RO plants at South Deep to reduce Rand 

Water Board consumption

1 Levels 1 and 2 involve minor incidents or non-conformances, with negligible or limited impact. A level 3 incident is a limited non-conformance or non-compliance with a limited 
environmental impact (often a repeat of  the same incident). Level 4 and 5 incidents include major non-conformances or non-compliances, which could result in long-term 
environmental harm, with company or operation-threatening implications and potential damage to company reputation

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 201474

PiLLAr: oPtiMiSing our oPErAtionS

4.3  Promoting environmental stewardship (continued)

MANAGING EACH MINE’S WATER BALANCE

Effective water management requires a full understanding of  the 
inflow into and outflow from each operational area. This involves 
quantifying:

•  Water inflows, including rainfall
•  Operational water requirements 
•  Onsite water storage capacity
•  Water use and discharges 

Whether mines are water-positive, water-balanced or water-
negative depends on a number of  dynamic variables. These 
include climatic variables such as seasonal rainfall and 
evaporation rates, the volume of  water entering underground 
workings or open-pits (e.g. via aquifers and surface run-off 
respectively) and the type of  processing employed (e.g. heap 
leach or Carbon-in-Leach processing). 

Gold Fields applies the following measures to manage the water 
balance at its mines, and to promote water stewardship: 

•  Regional application of  the new Corporate Water 

Management Guideline (a summary is available online at  
www.goldfields.com/sus_guide.php) – including the 
development and implementation of  well-defined Water 
Management Action Plans 

•  Implementation of  physical measures to manage stormwater 
run-off  – and keep clean water and mine water separate 
•  Maintenance of  water containment capacity (including the 

containment of  inflow surges)

•  Water treatment – including reverse osmosis
•  Water reuse and recycling
•  Dynamic and predictive water modelling to support short-, 
medium- and long-term water-related risk and opportunity 
management

ACID MINE DRAINAGE 

Gold Fields implements a range of  measures to prevent or 
contain Acid Mine Drainage (AMD) at its operations – and takes 
effective remedial action where incidents are identified. There 
were no material cases of  AMD reported in 2014.

Nonetheless, South Deep has – in the context of  broader 
historical AMD legacy issues in the Gauteng area – taken a 
proactive approach to long-term AMD management through its 
comprehensive water management plan. This involves ongoing 
water monitoring, containment of  any AMD generation on the old 
tailings facilities and water-treatment solutions that purify surplus 
fissure and process water to a potable standard. In 2015, 
additional technical studies are planned to develop a solution for 
managing AMD generation in the underground workings at mine 
closure. Underground AMD generation is well managed during 
the operational phase by ongoing pumping to surface of  the 
underground water. 

Cerro Corona’s tailings and waste rock facilities were designed 
to avoid and mitigate the risks of  AMD. In addition, the mines 
closure plan contains various strategies, which are updated at 
least every two years as new technical information becomes 
available. 

Although Gold Fields has commissioned various technical 
studies to identify the steps required to prevent or mitigate the 
potentially material AMD impacts at its Cerro Corona and South 
Deep operations, none of  these studies has allowed Gold Fields 
to generate a reliable estimate of  the total potential impact on 
the Company.

Immaterial levels of  AMD have been identified at the Tarkwa, 
Damang and St Ives mines.

4.3.3 Regional water initiatives 

AMERICAS

Water security poses a significant long-term challenge at Cerro 
Corona due to its remote, high-altitude location. Furthermore, the 
mine operates in a national context of  poorly developed water 
infrastructure, water quality degradation and serious water-
related activism at both a local and regional level. Although 
Cerro Corona has not as yet been materially affected by such 
activism – this has had a serious impact on other operators in 
the Cajamarca region. As such, Cerro Corona has proactively 
implemented a range of  responsible water management 
initiatives, including: 

•  Rainwater storage and reuse: Rainwater is stored at Cerro 
Corona’s TSF within a closed-circuit water system, treated 
and reused by the operation. This enhances the mine’s own 
water supply, whilst also minimising both the amount of  water 
discharged and the amount of  local groundwater abstracted
•  Community water supplies: Cerro Corona has committed to 
providing local communities with additional, potable water 
during the dry season and has completed a number of 
projects focussed on water provision to nearby communities 
as well as improving existing municipal water systems (p115) 

•  Water monitoring: Cerro Corona works closely with 

community-elected representatives to monitor water quality 
and quantity at the Las Tomas Spring. Iron and manganese 
levels at the spring – which sits inside the ‘final’ future footprint 
of  Cerro Corona’s TSF – have improved since the mine began 
operating 

Such approaches have – in combination with effective 
community engagement practices and the generation of  shared 
local value – played a key role in protecting Cerro Corona 
from the kinds of  social tensions affecting other nearby mining 
operations. 

AUSTRALIA  

In 2014, the Australia region implemented a new water 
management strategy to support the integration of  the Yilgarn 
South Assets. This also involved extensive analysis of  the water 
balances at Agnew and St Ives. The strategy is based on: 

•  The integration of  water management into business objectives 
•  Sound water management planning and practices
•  The measurement and reporting of  the water impacts of  each 

operation and associated mitigation measures

Nevertheless, water security poses a potentially significant 
challenge for the region’s mines – all of  which are based in arid 
areas of  Western Australia. In Q3 2014, Gold Fields commenced 

legal proceedings against Nickel West, operated by BHP Billiton. 

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014PiLLAr: oPtiMiSing our oPErAtionS

75

These proceedings relate to the supply of  potable water to the 

R300,000/month from July 2015

St Ives operations, which was agreed when Gold Fields acquired 

the St Ives assets in 2001. Late in Q4 2014, St Ives reached an 

in-principle agreement with Nickel West to settle all outstanding 

disputes relating to the ongoing supply of  water (including the 

proceedings), and will continue working towards finalising these 

arrangements in early 2015. 

SOUTH AFRICA 

Water management remains a sensitive public issue in South 

Africa. Significant parts of  the country suffer from water stress, 

whilst the Gauteng area (in which South Deep is situated) 

suffers from the historical environmental legacy of  more than a 

century of  intensive, deep-level gold mining. This legacy means 

that there are high-levels of  AMD in and around Johannesburg 

– most of  it caused by now-defunct companies and operations. 

Whilst not contributing to local AMD, there are concerns that 

South Deep’s long life will mean that the mine is the ‘last man 

standing’ as Gauteng’s AMD issues become more acute – and 

social as well as regulatory pressure to act on the issue grows. 

Furthermore, South Deep experienced four Level 3 

environmental incidents (p73), of  which three related to water 

issues. This prompted a comprehensive review of  water 

management issues at the mine and the implementation of  a 

number of  water stewardship initiatives as part of  the mine’s 

water management plan. Key initiatives included: 

•  RO plants: This project uses two RO plants, installed in 2014, 
to purify surplus fissure and mineralised service water to a 

potable standard. This is then reused by the mine. In 2014 

the amount of  water treated by the RO plants improved from 
8Mℓ/month in January to 40Mℓ/month in December. In 2015 
it is envisaged that the RO plant capacity at South Deep will 
increase to about 150Mℓ/month. This approach: 
–  Cuts the mine’s water purchase costs by an estimated 

–  Increases overall supply for other local water users
–  Reduces the overall amount of  water in the mine’s water 
system – reducing the risk of  overflows from the mine’s 
dams during periods of  heavy rain

•  Stormwater management plan: In 2014, South Deep 
commenced with the implementation of  a stormwater 
management plan that included the construction of  concrete 
channels to separate clean stormwater in the surrounding 
catchment from water running off  the backfill plant area and 
surrounding areas. This project is scheduled for completion 
by Q2 2015 and will help to minimise the risk of  unplanned, 
off-footprint water discharges from the old return water 
dams during the rainy season due to the diversion of  clean 
stormwater away from the dams. The project, together with 
the installation of  the RO plants, is already demonstrating 
success – during the heavy rains experienced in Q4 2014, 
no overflows were recorded from our return water dams into 
the environment. 

The next phase of  the project is the construction of  a new, 
lined return water dam at the old TSFs, which is scheduled 
for completion in early 2016. The new dam has been sized to 
accommodate the inflows of  any excess stormwater from the 
backfill plant area as well as the run-off  from the old TSFs. 
Until the construction is complete, any overflows from the backfill 
plant during storms will be collected in a concrete sump, which 
has already been constructed, and will be pumped back into 
the mine water circuits. Any overflow from the sump will be 
channelled via the newly installed concrete trenches to the old 
return water dam, via a new attenuation dam.

•  AMD and water quality management: As part of  its ongoing 
efforts to manage AMD and prevent pollution, South Deep 
implemented a number of  additional measures in 2014 
regarding its waste rock dumps and old TSFs. These included:
–  Revision of  plume movement models around the old TSFs. 

Gold Fields is committed to responsible water stewardship – for the benefit of its own operations as well as for host communities

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 201476

PiLLAr: oPtiMiSing our oPErAtionS

4.3  Promoting environmental stewardship (continued)

During 2015, plume movement mitigation measures will be 
initiated 

the International Cyanide Management Code (ICMC). ICMC 
certification also extends to Gold Fields’ transport providers. 

–  Removal of  the old South Shaft Waste Rock Dump (to be 

completed during 2015)

–  Initiated further rehabilitation of  the mine’s onsite TSFs 

(through re-vegetation)

–  Ongoing surface and groundwater monitoring
–  Blast curtain trials at Doornpoort TSF

During 2014, South Deep spent around R19 million 
(US$2 million) on water-related initiatives, and has allocated 
R60 million (US$6 million) capital expenditure which is estimated 
to be spent during 2015 and 2016 on the new lined return 
water dam. This is in addition to other planned capital and 
operational water management-related expenditure.

WEST AFRICA

Gold Fields’ Ghanaian operations – and Tarkwa in particular – 
face a number of  challenges with respect to water management, 
including:

•  Intense periods of  precipitation, particularly during southern 
Ghana’s two rainy seasons (March to July and September to 
November)

•  The significant footprint of  the Tarkwa mine, meaning that 

there is a large watershed to manage

•  The extensive surface area of  Tarkwa’s North and South 

Heap Leach facilities. While both facilities are now closed, 
a significant amount of  interaction continues to take place 
between rainwater and the stacked ore. This will only be 
addressed once the facilities are fully rehabilitated through the 
application of  a soil layer and revegetation

•  Production of  concentrated brine, an unintended 

consequence of  the operation of  RO water treatment plants at 
the heap leach facilities (established at the behest of  Ghana’s 
Environmental Protection Agency). The treated water is 
discharged into the local water system, while the concentrated 
brine is collected by each plant and temporarily stored 
onsite in the TSFs

Gold Fields is looking at the potential feasibility of  two options 
– with a decision expected during 2015 – for processing the 
concentrated brine produced by the RO plants:

•  Installation of  an industrial-scale treatment plant 
•  The processing of  the brine to produce nitrate solutions that 

can be used to irrigate and fertilise rubber and oil palm trees. 
An area south of  Tarkwa is being used for an irrigation trial, 
with 750 trees planted in 2014

4.3.4 Materials and waste management

The most significant output materials of  Gold Fields’ operations 
are tailings, waste rock, chemical waste and hydrocarbon 
waste, all of  which are responsibly managed. Gold mining 
requires large volumes of  blasting agents, hydrochloric acid, 
lime, cyanide, cement and caustic soda (sodium hydroxide), 
all of  which it uses on an ongoing basis. Of  these, cyanide 
represents the most potentially hazardous substance. All Gold 
Fields operations are fully compliant with the requirements of 

All Gold Fields’ operations have Life-of-Mine tailings 
management plans. All TSFs and associated pipeline and 
pumping infrastructure are subject to ISO 14001 certification, 
external tailings audits, as well as regular inspection and 
formal annual reporting. TSFs are also subject to inspection 
for technical integrity by independent experts at least once 
every three years – or more frequently where required by local 
circumstances or regulations. A Group-wide tailings facility 
audit – which included all 15 operational and 10 dormant TSFs 
– was undertaken during the latter half  of  2014. Ordinarily, these 
audits are conducted on a three-yearly basis. However, mining 
companies globally increased their commitment to ensuring 
the safety of  their tailings facilities following a major breach of 
Imperial Metals’ copper and gold tailings pond at Mount Polley in 
British Colombia in August 2014. Gold Fields therefore initiated 
its Group-wide TSF audit earlier than usual.  

The audit, which was conducted by Golder Associates, reviewed 
all key aspects of  tailings facility management, with a focus 
on TSF stability, compliance and environmental management. 
All TSFs were found to be well-managed and are either already 
aligned with global leading practice, or have concrete plans in 
place for alignment. In general the Gold Fields TSFs are within 
the top quartile of  industry leading practice in terms of  design, 
operation, and management. 

Specific measures to minimise the risks posed by TSFs to the 
environment include: 

•  Pollution containment facilities to capture run-off  water from 
the TSF surfaces, together with solution trenches to capture 
shallow groundwater seepage

•  Recycling systems to allow the reuse of  tailings water in 

metallurgical processes

•  Monitoring of  groundwater plume quality and migration 

(where applicable) and, where pollution is detected, installing 
measures to contain plumes

•  Planting vegetation, installing netting and applying chemical 
suppressants on slope faces to control dust and erosion

More broadly, Gold Fields is taking proactive steps to anticipate 
constraints relating to the development of  future TSFs and 
the replacement of  existing ones. Production activities are 
dependent on a mine having sufficient TSF capacity. Securing 
new TSF capacity can involve lengthy permitting processes with 
local environmental agencies – and can also require negotiations 
with local communities. 

In 2014, the Group took the following steps to ensure that its 
operations continued to enjoy a sustainable TSF pipeline to 
support future production: 

•  The Americas: Technical solutions were devised to 

accommodate more tailings in the existing TSF (such as 
increasing the TSF crest and drilling into deep parts of  the 
TSF to release excess water )

•  Australia: Agnew/Lawlers is seeking ways to extend the life 

of  TSF3 – including through the potential raising of  one of  its 
cells

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014PiLLAr: oPtiMiSing our oPErAtionS

77

•  West Africa: Gold Fields concluded lengthy negotiations 
with the EPA over the development of  future TSFs at both 
Tarkwa and Damang. This resulted in Gold Fields securing 
formal, written permission during 2014 to raise two of  the 
existing TSFs at Tarkwa (TSF1 and TSF2) – as well as written 
permission to raise the East TSF at Damang. Although Tarkwa 
is still awaiting permission for a new tailings facility (TSF5), the 
extensions of  TSF1 and TSF2 will provide adequate tailings 
capacity over the next two years – and possibly beyond. 
Similarly, Damang’s East TSF will provide adequate capacity 
until 2017 – by which time the mine plans to have the new New 
Far East TSF operational.

In addition, Gold Fields continued to focus on the responsible 
management of  potential environmental issues linked to its TSFs: 

•  Gold Fields carried out a study at the Doornpoort TSF to 
assess the potential effectiveness of  a new methodology 
to safely consolidate potentially contaminated groundwater 
from multiple sources within the TSF – and pump it out of  the 
ground and back into the lined return water dams 

•  The Granny Smith Mine in Australia constructed seepage 
trenches, installed additional monitoring boreholes and 
investigated alternative storage options – in response 
to regulator concern over potential future groundwater 
contamination at its TSF3

Meanwhile, both underground and open-pit operations produce 
substantial volumes of  waste rock. This is kept in managed 
waste rock dumps, which are subject to comprehensive 
rehabilitation through the laying of  top soil and vegetation once 
they are no longer in use. South Deep recycles a proportion 
of  waste rock for utilisation in construction projects and will 
have completed the removal of  the old South Shaft waste rock 
dump in early 2015. The entire remaining footprint area will be 
contoured, landscaped and revegetated.

Figure 4.13:	Group	mining	waste
FIGURE 4.12: Group mining waste
Million tonnes

180

160

140

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

137.6

153.3

100.2

38.5

36.7

38.4

2012

2013

2014

Waste rock

Tailings

Revegetation of the tailings dam at the South Deep mine in South Africa

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014Base camp at the Salares Norte project in Chile

5.1

5.2

5.3

5.4

Redefining growth
5.1.1 A strategic shift towards quality
5.1.2 Active Portfolio Management
An integrated approach to growth
5.2.1 Bottom-up and top-down management
Earning and maintaining a social licence to operate
5.2.2
5.2.3
Supporting project divestment
Near-mine exploration performance
5.3.1 Australia
5.3.2 West Africa
Update on our remaining growth projects
5.4.1
5.4.2
4.5.3 Disposals

Salares Norte, Chile
Far Southeast, Philippines

5.5 Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Statement

5.5.1 Corporate governance
5.5.2 Group summary
5.5.3 Regional summary

80
80
80

82
82
82
83

84
84
87

88
88
88
89

90
90
91
94

5Gold Fields 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
80

PiLLAr: groWing goLd FiELdS

5.1 Redefining growth 

Growing Gold Fields is not just a matter of  increasing the 

Group’s Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves or boosting 

•  Raised approximately US$107 million through the disposal 
of  its holding in the Chucapaca Project in Peru, excluding 

the production profile. It is about growing cash flow per ounce 

future royalty contributions, the Yanfolila Project in Mali 

and per share in the medium and long term.

(in Hummingbird Resources shares) and the Talas Project in 

5.1.1 A strategic shift towards quality 

In this context, Gold Field’s immediate growth strategy is to 

generate growth in both reserves per share and in sustained 

cash flow margin per ounce through a process of  Active Portfolio 

Management. In 2014, this resulted in: 

•  The cessation of  all early greenfields exploration activity
•  Refocussing from greenfields exploration to low-risk, near-mine 
exploration and cash-generative acquisition opportunities that 

are aligned with Gold Fields’ core competencies

•  The disposal of  growth projects that are marginal, located in 
‘higher-risk’ locations and/or are primarily focussed on metals 

other than gold 

This has resulted in a short-term reduction in Gold Fields’ 2014 

Mineral Resources (p90 – 95), which in the past would have 

Kyrgyzstan (in Robust Resources shares)

In line with the major organisational restructuring process 

initiated in 2013, Gold Fields has consolidated its growth 

portfolio, including the selection of  appropriate acquisition 

targets and the disposal of  assets, under the Group corporate 

development department to ensure alignment with strategic 

objectives. All other growth-related activities, including day-

to-day management of  projects, fall under the responsibility 

of  Gold Fields’ regions to leverage their local expertise, 

management capabilities and infrastructure.

5.1.2 Active Portfolio Management

Gold Fields’ Active Portfolio Management approach is based 

on the assessment of  all existing assets, near-mine exploration 

opportunities and acquisition targets against three key criteria: 

been a cause for concern. In light of  our new focus, however, 

1.  The right address: Growth opportunities located in stable, 

it is not only acceptable but is expected that every new ounce 

‘mining-friendly’ operating environments in our existing 

Gold Fields brings into production will directly support the 

regions that pose only limited potential barriers to successful 

delivery of  superior returns to current and future shareholders, 

project execution and profitable future production

and upgrade out existing portfolio. It is the starting point for a 

truly cash-generative growth pipeline that is fully aligned with 

Gold Fields’ current and long-term business priorities. 

2.  Gold focus: Growth opportunities that are well-aligned 

with Gold Fields’ core competency – the identification, 

development and extraction of  gold-bearing ore bodies. 

Beyond this, the Group will, over the next two to three years:

As such, over 50% of  future output needs to be gold

•  Continue to apply Active Portfolio Management – including 
the application of  stringent hurdle rates for all new growth 

opportunities and the disposal of  ‘non-franchise’ assets
•  Try to repeat the successful integration of  the Yilgarn South 

Assets by pursuing further opportunistic, bolt-on mergers and 

acquisitions – where these offer immediate cash generation 

and strategic alignment 

•  Fund growth through equity financing, alternative financing 
or the disposal of  existing projects – instead of  an exclusive 

focus on debt funding if  possible

•  De-risk new growth opportunities through technical or financial 

partnerships with other companies

Reflecting these priorities, in 2014 Gold Fields: 

•  Did not invest any funds in greenfields exploration
•  Increased its near-mine exploration (Damang and Australia) 

spend by 71% to US$58 million (2013: US$32 million) 
•  Reduced its total growth-related expenditure by 78% to 

US$36 million (2013: US$122 million)1, of  which the bulk was 
spent on the Salares Norte Project in Chile

3.  Commercial sustainability: Growth opportunities that can 

ultimately offer a 15% free cash flow margin at a gold price 

of  US$1,300/oz and upgrade our portfolio

The ultimate aim of  this approach is to improve the quality of 

Gold Fields’ portfolio on an ongoing, long-term basis. In this 

context, Gold Fields disposed of  a number of  growth assets 

that failed to meet these three criteria (p88 – 89). Nonetheless, 

two growth assets were found to be of  sufficient quality to justify 

their retention: 

•  The Salares Norte Project in Chile (p88)
•  The Far Southeast Project in the Philippines (p88) 

Key strategic focus areas being pursued under the Active 

Portfolio Management approach are set out below. 

FOCUS 1: MAINTAIN PORTFOLIO qUALITY THROUGH 

DIVESTMENT

The Active Portfolio Management approach has required Gold 

Fields to take a hard look at the ability of  its existing assets 

to generate sufficient cash – and to support the Company’s 

broader strategic objectives. Where such assets appear unable 

to meet these criteria, they have been disposed of  or are 

1 Spending on the following projects: Far Southeast, APP, Yanfolila, Chucapaca, Woodjam, Salares Norte

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014PiLLAr: groWing goLd FiELdS

81

earmarked for disposal. This approach will ensure that we retain 

and upgrade the quality of  the portfolio.

•  Knowledge of  its ore bodies – which supports its ability 
to identify additional ore bodies within common, nearby 

Gold Fields’ significant investment in greenfields exploration over 

the last 15 years has not yet delivered any new mines. Instead, 

all new mines brought into the Company’s production portfolio 

have been through acquisition – with Gold Fields adding 

subsequent value through the optimisation of  their operations. 

geological systems

•  Operational capabilities – including its proven ability to 

effectively develop and mine orogenic ore bodies

•  Regional and operational infrastructures – including its existing 

processing plants and regional management teams 

As well as adding to Gold Fields’ Mineral Resource and Mineral 

FOCUS 2: ACqUIRE HIGH-qUALITY PRODUCING 

Reserve base, near-mine exploration:

OPERATIONS

In light of  this, and given current market conditions, the 

acquisition of  operating gold mines is a preferred option for 

Gold Fields to grow cash-generative production. Amid current 

low gold prices a number of  peer companies are trying to 

divest themselves of  their non-core assets to reduce heavy debt 

burdens, but it does not necessarily mean that these disposals 

are at pricing levels that would meet our cash-generative targets. 

It certainly will be difficult to replicate the success of  the 

US$262 million acquisition of  the Yilgarn South Assets in 
October 2013. The acquisition – which was criticised by many 

observers at the time – has since received high levels of  praise. 

This is because the new mines – in combination with Gold Fields’ 

subsequent management efforts: 

•  Have helped the Australia region expand its cash-generative 
production to the point where it now contributes 45% of  Gold 

Fields’ total produced ounces

•  Extends the life of  the Group’s existing mines – whilst 

maintaining and/or increasing their value

•  Ensures each region can continue to leverage its existing 

infrastructure 

•  Provides a robust platform for regional growth

The benefits of  effective near-mine exploration can be seen 

in the historical sustainability of  the Agnew and St Ives mines. 

In 2002, at the time of  their acquisition, the mines had a 

combined Mineral Reserve of  2.9 million ounces. Since then, 

the mines have produced over 8.0 million ounces – and their 

combined Mineral Reserves remain mostly unchanged. Gold 

Fields believes that most of  its mines in Australia (which share 

similar orogenic ore bodies) will be able to repeat this success. 

Orogenic ore bodies offer a number of  advantages in this 

respect, making this a priority region for near-mine exploration. 

•  Are likely (all other things being equal) to have paid for 

FiGure 5.1:	How	we	filter	potential	acquisitions

themselves by the end of  2015 – a timescale that is almost 

unheard of  in the industry especially as it has been achieved 

in a low gold price environment

The success of  the acquisition can be ascribed to: 

•  Barrick Gold’s willingness to dispose of  the Darlot, Granny 
Smith and Lawlers mines as non-core assets – and the 

willingness of  Gold Fields to wait until the right acquisition 

became available at the right price

•  The immediate synergies that could be exploited – including 

the merger of  the Agnew and Lawlers mines and the 

subsequent closure of  Lawlers’ processing plant, as well as 

the leveraging of  Gold Fields’ existing regional management 

team

•  The familiarity of  Gold Fields’ regional team with local geology, 

particularly the kind of  orogenic ore bodies found at all of 

Gold Fields’ Australian mines

Any new acquisitions will be subject to a strict screening 

process – with only a small number of  opportunities ever likely to 

satisfy its requirements. This process ultimately aims to ensure 

that all new acquisitions actively upgrade the profile of  Gold 

Fields’ long-term portfolio. 

FOCUS 3: GROW GOLD FIELDS’ EXISTING ASSETS

Gold Fields recognises that in addition to favourable acquisitions, 

near-mine exploration offers one of  the best opportunities for 

cash-generative growth. This is due to the synergies offered by: 

PHASE 1
ScrEEn 
critEriA

PHASE 1
ScrEEn 
critEriA

PHASE 1
ScrEEn 
critEriA

PHASE 2
oPErAting 
ASSESSMEnt

PHASE 2
oPErAting 
ASSESSMEnt

PHASE 3
oPPortunity 
SHortLiSt

LOCATION
Australia, Ghana. Mali.  
Burkina Faso, Canada. US, Peru, 
Mexico, Brazil, Chile

GOLD ASSETS

PRODUCING  
ASSETS ONLY

AVERAGE AIC  
LESS THAN
US$1,000/oz over Life-of-Mine

AVERAGE  
FCF MARGIN
15% over Life-of-Mine

CASH FLOW/OZ
and Reserves/Share accretive

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 201482

PiLLAr: groWing goLd FiELdS

5.2 An integrated approach to growth 

As with production, Gold Fields integrates sustainability into all 

By building in the highest standards from the start, our regional 

of  its growth activities. This is due to its: 

growth teams are able to ensure that good-practice operational 

•  Desire to be seen – as a result of  its actions, track record and 
stakeholder relationships – as the ‘partner of  choice’ for host 

governments, local communities and peer companies
•  Recognition that the success or failure of  major growth 

projects (as well as the sale value that they can command) 

increasingly depends on how well companies manage 

sustainable development issues, particularly relationships 

with host communities

5.2.1 Bottom-up and top-down management 

Gold Fields’ integrated approach to growth is driven by each 

region’s management team – in line with Group-level standards. 
This ensures a consistent approach towards integrated growth 

management, whilst also allowing requisite flexibility for locally 

appropriate and project-specific decision-making. 

REGIONAL ACTION

In this context, Gold Fields’ regional growth teams continue to:

•  Apply Group-level best-practice sustainability standards 

(tailored to suit local circumstances) across all growth projects 

•  Apply ‘integrated’ risk management to all growth activity 

– covering financial, technical, political, social and 

environmental issues and dynamics likely to influence project 

success

•  Integrate the creation of  Shared Value into core project 

management is built into the ‘DNA’ of  any new mines that may 

ultimately be delivered, as is the case for the Group’s existing 

operations. It also means purchasers of  Gold Fields’ growth 

assets can be confident that any potential legacy issues have 

been identified and responsibly managed from inception to 

disposal. This is an increasingly important factor as it is a 

growing trend that projects have their social liabilities factored 

into their pricing. 

5.2.2 Earning and maintaining a social licence to 
operate 

The value offered by an integrated approach to growth is 

most apparent with respect to the securing and maintenance 
of  a strong political and social licence to operate. Indeed, 

companies’ licence to operate can – in many jurisdictions – 

be the key determinant of  project success. This is true both 

in higher-risk, ‘frontier’ operating environments, as well as the 

kind of  better-established, lower-risk growth environments that 

Gold Fields is increasingly targeting. 

Gold Fields places strong emphasis on ‘getting it right from 

the start’ on projects it wishes to pursue. This means operating 

in a way that generates trust and confidence amongst local 

stakeholders – and ensuring that each project has the kind of 

early political and social backing that will ultimately support its 

long-term execution and operation. 

development activities from the very start

One of  the advantages of  Gold Fields’ strategic refocussing 

•  Work with Group sustainability and risk management experts 

on near-mine exploration is that its existing local communities 

to ensure the smooth transition of  growth opportunities 

are generally already very supportive of  mine regeneration 

through the project lifecycle

and expansion. This is because these communities are often 

•  Implement comprehensive crisis management plans across all 

directly or indirectly economically reliant on the continued and 

growth projects

GROUP GUIDANCE

profitable operation of  Gold Fields’ mines. As such, most of  Gold 

Fields’ engagement efforts in this regard are focussed on their 

remaining advanced projects. 

Our regional growth teams are supported in this respect by 

Group-level guidance based on international best practice, 

STAKEHOLDER ENGAGEMENT AROUND OUR GROWTH 

which can be found at www.goldfields.com/sus-guide.php 

PROJECTS

This includes:

•  The ISO 14001 and OHSAS 18001 Certified Environment, 

Health and Safety Management Systems

•  Gold Fields’ Community Policy
•  Gold Fields’ Community Relations Handbook
•  Gold Fields’ Community Relations and Stakeholder 

Engagement Guidelines 

•  Gold Fields’ Shared Value strategy (p114 – 115)
•  Gold Fields’ Energy and Carbon Guideline 
•  Gold Fields’ Water Management Guideline 

1 AA 1000 AccountAbility Principles Standard 2008

Gold Fields’ approach to growth-focussed stakeholder 

engagement is based on our Community Relations Handbook 

and Guidelines, which are aligned to the AA 1000 principles 
of  inclusivity, materiality and responsiveness1. This includes 
extensive and ongoing engagement with, among others:

•  Local community members
•  Local traditional representatives
•  Local and national government officials
•  Local and national non-governmental organisations (NGOs)

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014PiLLAr: groWing goLd FiELdS

83

More specifically, this approach is supported by:

5.2.3 Supporting project divestment

•  The installation of  community relations experts at each project
•  Ongoing stakeholder mapping, analysis and monitoring
•  Detailed risk analysis – and the implementation of  effective 

risk management action plans

KEY STAKEHOLDER ISSUES IN 2014

Some of  Gold Fields’ key interactions between its regional 

growth teams and local stakeholders in 2014 include those 

relating to:

•  Water availability and access for the Salares Norte project, 

which is located in an arid, relatively unpopulated part of  the 

Atacama region of  Chile. A formal water rights application was 

made to the local authorities in Q1 2014

•  The finalisation of  an officially recognised agreement for the 
Free, Prior and Informed Consent (FPIC) of  the Kankana-ey 

community for the progression of  the Far Southeast project in 

the Philippines (p88)

•  The creation of  local value at the Far Southeast Project – 

including capacity-building for local community members. 

This is to ensure they are able to positively contribute to this 

process and benefit from its outcomes as the project develops

•  Ongoing engagement with local indigenous groups at the 

Agnew/Lawlers, Granny Smith and St Ives mines in Australia 

regarding land access for near-mine drilling and the protection 

of  cultural heritage  

Aside from supporting our own growth activities, a proactive 

sustainability approach also supports Gold Fields’ ability to 

divest itself  of  unsuitable growth projects – a key issue in the 

context of  Active Portfolio Management. Project divestment can 

place particular pressure on relations with local communities, 

due to frustrated expectations around employment creation 

and revenue generation, as well as Gold Fields’ withdrawal 

from hard-won stakeholder relationships. In this context, the 

Company’s regional growth teams actively work with community 

relations specialists to:

•  Explain the transition process
•  Mitigate the impacts of  our withdrawal
•  Honour our existing commitments

Examples of  key interactions in this regard include: 

•  The development of  environmentally sensitive work plans 

for the Arctic Platinum Project – to support the subsequent 

renewal of  the project’s water permit in Q1 2015. Retention of 
the water permit will play an important part in the divestment 

process 

•  Investment in school infrastructure at the Yanfolila Project in 

Mali, which the buyer of  the project, Hummingbird Resources, 

has undertaken to continue

This helps to ensure Gold Fields can maintain the value of  its 

divested assets by handing over a secure political and social 

licence to purchasers. Furthermore, the Company actively 

seeks out purchasers who will not undermine its own reputation 

through their subsequent operational standards and approach to 

stakeholder relations.

Exploration drilling at the Salares Norte project in Chile

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 201484

PiLLAr: groWing goLd FiELdS

5.3 Near-mine exploration performance

Gold Fields 
believes 
that its 
mines in 
Australia 
are key 
targets for 
near-mine 
exploration.

Gold Fields believes that near-mine exploration 

offers the best route to low-cost growth that can 

generate cash in the short and medium term. 

In 2014, Gold Fields raised its total near-mine 

exploration expenditure by 81% to US$58 million 

(2013: US$32 million) in pursuit of  this strategy. 

This budget supported a total of  349,511 metres of 

near-mine drilling (2013: 250,158 metres). 

Much of  this activity was focussed on the Australia 

and West Africa regions where the six mines in the 

Gold Fields portfolio have strong growth potential. 

5.3.1 Australia 

Gold Fields believes that its mines in Australia (and 

the areas around them) offer considerable upside 

potential – making them key targets for near-mine 

exploration. In the immediate term, such activity 

will seek to capitalise on the extensive and highly 

prospective tenement areas currently held, and the 

proven ability to replace the ounces extracted on a 

year-on-year basis. In the medium to longer term, 

near-mine exploration activity will focus on adding 

net ounces to the Mineral Resources and Mineral 

Reserves of  each mine. 

This approach is informed by Gold Fields’ historical 

experience with both the Agnew and St Ives mines. 

Over the past 12 years, both mines have produced 

over 8 million ounces of  gold – and are still going 

strong. Given the similar orogenic gold geology 

at each of  our Western Australian mines, Gold 

Fields hopes to deliver similar performance from 

its recently acquired Yilgarn South Assets over 

time – and to continue leveraging their existing 

processing plant capacity. 

In this context, Gold Fields invested a total 

of  A$60 million (US$54 million) in near-mine 

exploration at its Australian mines. Plans are 

in place to increase this figure to A$85 million 

(US$75 million) in 2015 – demonstrating Group 

commitment in this regard. 

WESTERN AUSTRALIA

Agnew/Lawlers

Darlot

Granny Smith

St Ives

PERTH

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014PiLLAr: groWing goLd FiELdS

85

AGNEW/LAWLERS  

Mineral	Resources	added	in	2014

Mineral	Reserves	added	in	2014

Ounces	produced	in	2014

Exploration	spend	in	2014

Exploration	budget	for	2015

Exploration	metres	drilled	in	2014

224,000	ounces

209,000	ounces	

271,000	ounces

A$15.1	million

A$20.0	million

56,137	metres

The Agnew/Lawlers mine is seeking to replicate the success it 
has enjoyed with the Kim ore body – which, after eight years of 
mining, is nearing its end. As such, current focus is on growing 
known resources. 

In this context, there are several key target areas that are likely to 
underwrite the longevity and sustainability of  Agnew/Lawlers: 

•  FBH: This newly defined, high-grade underground ore body 

sits immediately to the south of  the Kim ore body. FBH 
currently offers around 600,000 ounces in Mineral Resources 
at an average grade of  more than 9g/t. Development of  the 
FBH ore body started in 2014. It will supplement production 
from the Kim ore body in the second half  of  2015.

•  Waroonga North and Kath: These targets are located north of 
the Kim ore body and drilling to date has yielded encouraging 
results. Exploration will continue to better define the extent of 
these targets in 2015. In addition, drilling was carried out on 
the New Holland ore body in 2014.

DARLOT 

Mineral	Resources	added	in	2014

Mineral	Reserves	added	in	2014

Ounces	produced	in	2014

Exploration	spend	in	2014

Exploration	budget	for	2015

Exploration	metres	drilled	in	2014

112,000	ounces

48,000	ounces	

84,000	ounces

A$7.5	million

A$7.0	million

50,154	metres

Darlot’s 2014 priority was to self-fund an exploration programme 

to replace production depletion and to extend the LoM through 

discovery of  a ‘game changer’ ore body able to deliver a 

15% free cash flow margin. The Lords South Lower (LSL) and 

Centenary Depth Analogue (CDA) areas were targeted with the 

aim of  providing new mining fronts. Another years’ production 

was profiled at LSL creating an extended window for continued 

exploration within the present mining area and near-mine. The 

emphasis will however remain at CDA, where a well mineralised 

sequence with similar characteristics to the previously mined 

Centenary deposit shows potential for development of  a new 

production area. 

2014 Mineral Reserve Reconciliation (koz)
1,000

953

209

865

800

600

400

200

0

297

Reserves
2013

Depletion & 
Resource 
Modelling

Discovery 
& Inclusions

Reserves
2014

2014 Mineral Reserve Reconciliation (koz)

155

200

150

100

50

0

48

85

117

Reserves
2013

Depletion & 
Exclusions

Discovery 

Reserves
2014

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
86

PiLLAr: groWing goLd FiELdS

5.3  Near-mine exploration performance (continued)

GRANNY SMITH 

Mineral	Resources	added	in	2014

1,474,000	ounces

Mineral	Reserves	added	in	2014

Ounces	produced	in	2014

Exploration	spend	in	2014

Exploration	budget	for	2015

Exploration	metres	drilled	in	2014

406,000	ounces	

315,000	ounces

A$13.0	million

A$16.9	million

77,433	metres

Granny Smith offers significant near-mine exploration potential. 

This includes targets in and around the existing Wallaby 

underground operation – as well as the mine’s wider 61,000ha 

tenement area. These cover a geologically well-endowed area of 

gold mineralisation and offer the potential for additional deposits 

to be discovered, adding important and additional ore sources 

to Granny Smith. Many of  these areas (including Lake Carey) 

have been historically underexplored – something Gold Fields 

is keen to rectify. Immediate near-mine exploration will focus on 

continuing drilling and extending the Wallaby ore body at depth, 

as well as exploring for new, multi-million ounce ore bodies within 

the tenement area. 

ST IVES

Mineral	Resources	added	in	2014

Mineral	Reserves	added	in	2014

Ounces	produced	in	2014

Exploration	spend	in	2014

Exploration	budget	for	2015

Exploration	metres	drilled	in	2014

271,000	ounces

345,000	ounces	

362,000	ounces

A$24.8	million

A$41.1	million

133,765	metres

The St Ives mine continues to offer considerable upside 

potential. In the near term, the key source of  this upside 

potential is the new, high-grade Invincible deposit, which has a 

Mineral Resource of  1.03 million ounces and a Mineral Reserve 

of  628,000 ounces. Given that Invincible will have grades of 

between 3g/t – 4g/t, these ounces will significantly enhance 

the cash-generation potential of  the mine. It will also help extend 

the life of  the mine as production from the Athena underground 

operation comes to an end in 2015. Start of  production is 

planned for mid-2015.

Importantly, the planned open-pit is the ‘anchor point’ for a wider 

22km gold-bearing Speedway trend that extends along the Lake 

Lefroy salt lake and will be the key focus areas for near-mine 

exploration in 2015. In addition, St Ives started production on the 

Neptune deposit in 2014. The deposit has a Mineral Resource of 

508,000 ounces and Mineral Reserve of  267,000 ounces.

2014 Mineral Reserve Reconciliation (koz)
1,000

838

406

872

800

600

400

200

0

372

Reserves
2013

Depletion 
& Costs

Resource 
Modelling & 
Stockpile

Reserves
2014

2014 Mineral Reserve Reconciliation (koz)
2,400

2,022

2,000

1,600

1,200

800

400

0

345

1,803

565

Reserves
2013

Depletion,  
Resource 
Modelling, 
Exclusions & Costs

Discovery 

Reserves
2014

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014 
 
PiLLAr: groWing goLd FiELdS

87

5.3.2 West Africa

Although both of  Gold Fields’ mines in Ghana offer potential 

near-mine exploration opportunities, 2014 has seen most activity 

focussed on the Damang mine.  

TARKWA

Mineral	Resources	added	in	2014

Mineral	Reserves	added	in	2014

Ounces	produced	in	2014

Exploration	spend	in	2014

Exploration	budget	for	2015

Exploration	metres	drilled	in	2014	

457,000	ounces

782,000	ounces	

558,000	ounces

US$0.18	million

US$1.50	million

Samples	only

An extensive soil sampling programme carried out at Tarkwa in 

2014 indicates the presence of  hydrothermal deposits near to 

its existing processing plant. An initial infill-drilling programme 

will commence in Q1 2015 to establish the down-dip extension 
of  the hydrothermal deposit. In addition, plans are in place to 

extend future near-mine exploration on Tarkwa’s mining lease, 

in areas which had not been subject to drilling for more than 

a decade.

DAMANG

Mineral	Resources	added	in	2014

Mineral	Reserves	added	in	2014

Ounces	produced	in	2014

Exploration	spend	in	2014

Exploration	budget	for	2015

Exploration	metres	drilled	in	2014

16,000	ounces

362,000	ounces	

178,000	ounces

US$3.8	million

US$2.9	million

26,155	metres

Damang – which had until recently been facing potential closure 

(p62) – continues to offer significant growth potential. This 

includes potential extensions to the existing Juno pit, combining 

Huni and Saddle into a single pit, as well as at Tomento North 

and Amoanda. 

The mine is also focussing its longer-term near-mine exploration 

activity on potential ore sources within a 17km mineralisation 

trend running from the Damang pit to the Rex pit. This is with 

the aim of  adding additional Mineral Resources and Mineral 

Reserves over the next three years, substantially extending 

Damang’s Life-of-Mine.

2014 Mineral Reserve Reconciliation (koz)
8,000

7,273

782

7,491

564

7,000

6,000

5,000

4,000

3,000

2,000

1,000

0

Reserves
2013

Depletion

Model changes, 
Pit design, 
Pillar inclusion 
& Cut-off  Grade

Reserves
2014

2014 Mineral Reserve Reconciliation (koz)
1,400

362

1,235

1,073

200

1,200

1,000

800

600

400

200

0

Reserves
2013

Depletion

Inclusions, 
Mine Call Factor, 
Marginal Ore 
& Cut-off  Grade

Reserves
2014

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014 
 
 
 
88

PiLLAr: groWing goLd FiELdS

5.4 Update on our remaining growth projects

In 2014, Gold Fields continued – through its Active Portfolio 

Collectively, these qualities mean Salares Norte offers significant 

Management approach – to build on its efforts to maximise cash 

potential in terms of  future cash generation. As such, the 

generation through a serious rationalisation of  its exploration 

decision has been made to retain it within Gold Fields’ growth 

and growth projects. This has not only improved the quality of 

portfolio – and to explore its potential further. Indeed, an 

the Group’s growth portfolio (e.g. in terms of  cash-generation 

exploration budget of  US$23 million has been made available 

potential), but also significantly reduced expenditure on the 

for further drilling work in the first half  of  2015 – with a potential 

maintenance and development of  growth projects that are not 

pre-feasibility study to commence in Q4 2015. 

ultimately aligned with Gold Fields’ strategic objectives. 

Nonetheless, the Active Portfolio Management approach did 

identify two advanced growth projects that justified continued 

inclusion in Gold Fields’ growth portfolio. Salares Norte in Chile 

meets all of  the key criteria. It is in ‘the right address’, offers the 

right metal and is commercially sustainable. Far Southeast in the 

Philippines offers a world-class copper-gold deposit with the 

potential to deliver substantial strategic benefits to the Group 

in the long term. Further details about the two growth projects 

– both of  which sit within Gold Fields’ existing regions – are 

outlined in this section. 

5.4.1 Salares Norte, Chile 

5.4.2 Far Southeast, Philippines 

The Far Southeast Project is a proposed underground gold-

copper porphyry mine located in northern Luzon – 250km 

north of  Manila. The project is one in which Gold Fields has a 

40% interest, with an option to increase its stake to 60%, and 

is focussed on an existing mining operation with established 

infrastructure. Lepanto Consolidated Mining of  the Philippines 
holds the remaining 60% interest. Far Southeast is a 900 million 

tonne copper/gold porphyry with grades of  approximately 0.7g/t 

gold and approximately 0.5% copper. At end-December 2012 it 

declared an Inferred Mineral Resource of  19.8 million ounces of 

gold and 9,921Mlb of  copper.

The Salares Norte advanced drilling project is 100% Gold 

The ultimate execution of  the project will require the Free, Prior 

Fields owned and is focussed on a gold-silver deposit in the 

and Informed Consent (FPIC) of  local Kankana-ey indigenous 

Atacama region of  northern Chile. Mineralisation is contained 

people. Under the laws of  the Philippines, the FPIC of  the 

within a high-sulphidation epithermal system – offering high-

Kankana-ey is a prerequisite for the ultimate granting of  a 

grade, shallow oxides. The project is located within a core 900ha 

Financial or Technical Assistance Agreement (FTAA) to Gold 

concession area – and Gold Fields enjoys an option to purchase 

Fields. The FTAA is a regulatory instrument that allows for 

two adjoining concessions that would add a further 2,100ha.

majority foreign ownership of  mining projects – and is subject to 

In 2013, Gold Fields reported a maiden 23.3 million tonne 

a lengthy administrative process. 

Inferred Mineral Resource of  3.1 million ounces of  gold 

In this context, Gold Fields signed a formal Memorandum of 

at a grade of  4.1g/t, and 34 million ounces of  silver at an 

Agreement with the Mankayan Council of  Elders – the body that 

average grade of  45g/t. Preliminary indications, supported by 

offers the FPIC of  the Kankana-ey community. This builds on a 

metallurgical test work, suggest Carbon-in-Leach processing 

strong demonstration of  support by the Council of  Elders for the 

could deliver recovery rates of  around 90%. Furthermore, the 

development of  the project during a high-profile vote in Q2 2013.  

project is located in a highly favourable mining jurisdiction and 

sits in a remote location far from any communities. 

The FPIC process continues to be supported by Gold 

Fields’ efforts to leverage its positive economic impacts – 

Water security is not expected to pose a material challenge to 

through the establishment of  a strategic ‘development hub’ in 

project execution and operation. But it is an issue that requires 

the area. Ongoing community projects include, for example, 

proactive management. In Q1 2014, Gold Fields filed a water 

the establishment of  an interactive library and community 

rights application with the regulatory authorities for a nearby 

information centre, enterprise and livelihood training for food 

reservoir that could potentially yield 166 litres per second 

security in agriculture and livestock and water infrastructure. 

– which would be more than sufficient for future operations. 

The holding costs of  this project have been reduced to 

The remote location of  the site means there will be minimal 

approximately US$400,000 per month, related mainly to 

community impacts. Although there is a small possibility that  

community engagement work as well as activities to support the 

indigenous Colla ancestral lands are present in the project area, 

permitting process.

this does not appear to be a material issue. 

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014PiLLAr: groWing goLd FiELdS

89

5.4.3 Disposals

In 2014, Gold Fields continued to dispose of  a number of  growth 

assets – as set out in the figure below. This is in line with the 

Group’s strategy of  focussing on growing cash flow on a per 

ounce basis. 

Further material development of  the project will be dependent 

on the granting of  an FTAA and majority ownership by Gold 

Fields (with these prerequisites unlikely to be in place before 

2016). Although initial focus was on the potential development 

of  a major new mine at the site, current focus is (in line with 

current strategies) on the development of  a less capital-

intensive, higher-grade scoping study that can generate cash 

in the nearer term. A scoping study is underway that should 

be completed in the first half  of  2015. If  the project proceeds 

sometime in the future, Gold Fields is likely to integrate additional 

project partners. 

FiGure 5.2:	Disposal	of	exploration	and	growth	projects	

yanfolila (mali)

woodjam (canada)

100% held

85% to Hummingbird Resources

Arctic platinum project (Finland)

US$20m (in Hummingbird shares)

100% held

Not a majority gold project

Does not fit with growth strategy

Not a gold project

wooDJAm (cAnADA)

Arctic plAtinum proJect (FinlAnD)

tAlAS (kyrGyZStAn)

yAnFolilA (mAli)

ASoSA (ethiopiA)

FAr SoutheASt 
(philippineS)

chucApAcA (peru)
SAlAreS norte (chile)

chucapaca (peru)

Asosa (ethiopia)

talas (kyrgyzstan)

51% to Buenaventura

56%

100% to Robust Resources

US$81m + 1.50% royalty on future gold, 

Cash and shares

silver and copper production

Does not fit with growth strategy

Higher-risk operating environment

US$2m plus US$10.3m in Robust 

Resources shares – since cashed out 

for A$5m + 2% royalty

Does not fit with growth strategy

eXplorAtion proJectS

•  toodoggone, canada

51%

Sale pending

•  Australian exploration portfolio 

(five projects)

•  tacna, peru

100%

100%

Sale pending + JV

Sale pending

KEY

  Sold

  Retain/Reconfigure

  Sale pending

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 201490

PiLLAr: groWing goLd FiELdS

5.5 Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve 
Statement 

Gold Fields’ Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve strategy has 
been focussed on cash flow maximisation, which includes the 
implementation of  a number of  key interventions:  

•  The elimination of  marginal mining at all operations
•  Rationalisation of  corporate, regional and operational 
structures in conjunction with the strengthening of  the 
regionalised model. As a result the West Africa, Americas and 
Australia regions are now appropriately resourced to focus on 
building a sustainable business

•  Capital rationalisation and prioritisation (without undermining 

the future integrity of  the operations)

•  Divestment of  growth projects that are not fully aligned 

with our business objectives

A Mineral Resource gold price of  US$1,500/oz and Mineral 
Reserve price of  US$1,300/oz have been used for this 
declaration. This equates to A$1,570/oz and A$1,370/oz and 
R480,000/kg and R420,000/kg respectively. The gold price used 
for the Mineral Reserve declaration of  US$1,300/oz is within 
the guidelines of  the US Securities and Exchange Commission 
(SEC), as it is lower than the three-year trailing average price 
of  US$1,450/oz. The copper price used for Mineral Resource 
estimation is US$3.50/lb and US$3.0/lb for Mineral Reserves.  

Although the gold price used for the reserves is higher than 
the current spot price, our focus on strategically positioning the 
operations to deliver leading AIC, AISC and cash flow margins 
underpins their resilience to gold prices periodically trending 
lower. Business planning, over the next five years, entails the 
selection of  cut-off  grades, optimised pit shells, pit staging and 
stope sequencing with the objective of  ensuring that operations 
are sustainable and cash generative in the short to medium term 
at lower gold prices. Our commitment to ongoing exploration and 
resource to reserve conversion aims to ensure a quality pipeline 
of  reserves that will maintain operational flexibility and assist in 
sustaining margins at varying gold prices going forward. Annual 
production’s alignment to relevant Mineral Reserve head grades 
shows that, notwithstanding our focus on cash flow margins, we 
ensure retention of  the longer term Life-of-Mine integrity.

This section represents a condensed and consolidated 
overview of  Gold Fields’ Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve 
Supplement. The Supplement contains a comprehensive 
review of  our Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves as at 
31 December 2014, including additional detail on individual 
operations with respect to location, mine infrastructure, key 
operating statistics, geology, mining, processing, projects and 
sustainable development. It is available on the Gold Fields 
website at www.goldfields.com/inv_rep_ar.php.

5.5.1 corporate governance

The Group’s December 2014 Mineral Resource and Mineral 
Reserve Statement has been prepared in accordance with the 
requirements of  the South African Code for the Reporting of 

Exploration Results, Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves 
(the SAMREC Code, 2007 edition, as amended in 2009) and 
Industry Guide 7 for reporting to the SEC. Other relevant 
international codes are recognised where geographically 
applicable. 

In line with our commitment to sound corporate governance, 
this statement has been internally reviewed by regional and 
corporate technical and financial experts and, where applicable, 
also reviewed by leading, independent mining consultancies. 
This declaration has been found to fulfil the requirements of 
the relevant reporting codes, and the procedure followed in 
producing the statement is aligned to the guiding principles of 
the United States’ Sarbanes-Oxley (SOX) Act of  2002.

The headline Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Statement 
as at 31 December 2014 is compared to the 31 December 2013 
declaration in Figures 5.4 and 5.5. The Mineral Resource and 
Mineral Reserve figures are estimates at a point in time, and will 
be affected by fluctuations in the gold price, US Dollar currency 
exchange rates, costs, mining permits, changes in legislation 
and operating factors. All metal commodities are reported 
separately. As a result, no gold equivalents are stated to avoid 
potential anomalies generated through year-on-year metal 
price differentials.

Although all permits may not be finalised and in place at the 
time of  reporting, there is no reason to expect that these will 
not be granted. However, the length of  the approval process 
for such permits may have an impact on the schedules stated. 
All financial models are based on current tax regulations as 
at 31 December 2014.

All Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve figures are managed 
unless otherwise stated. Mineral Resources are reported 
inclusive of  Mineral Reserves and stability pillars when 
appropriate. The estimated volumes are reported in metric 
tonnes (t).

The respective operation-based Mineral Resource managers 
and relevant project managers have been designated as the 
competent persons in terms of  SAMREC and take responsibility 
for the reporting of  the Gold Fields Mineral Resources and 
Mineral Reserves. Corporate governance on the overall 
regulatory compliance of  these figures has been overseen 
and consolidated by the Gold Fields Competent Person, 
Tim Rowland, who consents to the disclosure of  this Mineral 
Resource and Mineral Reserve Statement. Mr Rowland is Vice-
President, Mineral Resource Management and Mine Planning, 
Pri-Sci Nat No 400122/00, BSc (Hons) Geology, MSc Mineral 
Exploration, GDE Mining Engineering and FSAIMM, FGSSA and 
GASA), with 29 years’ relevant experience in the mining industry. 
He is a permanent employee of  Gold Fields.

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014PiLLAr: groWing goLd FiELdS

91

5.5.2 Group summary

At 31 December 2014, Gold Fields had total attributable 

gold and copper Mineral Resources of  108.3 million ounces 

(December 2013: 113.4 million ounces) and 6,873 million 

pounds (December 2013: 7,120 million pounds), respectively. 

Attributable gold and copper Mineral Reserves are 48.1 million 

ounces (December 2013: 48.6 million ounces) and 620 million 

for underground mining. These changes, together with mine 

design enhancements, the sale of  the Chucapaca and 

Yanfolila projects, as well as mining depletion for the year, were 

primarily responsible for the reduction in the Mineral Resources 

(-8.5 million ounces gold), while Mineral Reserves (-500,000 

ounces gold) remained fairly constant, despite mining depletion 

of  2.3 million ounces of  gold across the Group.

pounds (December 2013: 708 million pounds) respectively, net 

The respective gold and copper Mineral Resource figures 

of  mined depletion.

The unchanged (year-on-year) metal prices and generally 

increased mining costs used for this year’s resource modelling 

and Life-of-Mine planning has resulted in marginally smaller 

pit shells for surface mining and optimised stope designs 

(December 2014) are inclusive of  all eight operating mines, 

as well as the APP, Salares Norte, Woodjam and Far Southeast 

projects. Other commodities and by-products that are reported 

as part of  the Mineral Resource (platinum, palladium, nickel 

and silver) are contained in the Mineral Resource and Mineral 

Reserve Statement Supplement.

FiGure 5.3:	Managed	gold	Mineral	Resources
FIGURE 5.2: Managed gold Mineral Resources
Moz

Growth projects

(4,43)

Americas region

Australia region

West Africa region

South Africa region

(0,30)

(1,48)

(2,04)

(0,21)

28,70

24,27

3,32
3,02

11,52

10,04

16,87

14,83

(10)

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

Variance

Dec 2013

Dec 2014

76,25
76,05

80

90

The South Africa region accounts for 59% of  our managed gold Mineral Resources, West Africa 12%, Australia 8%, the Americas 2% 

and our growth projects 19%.

FiGure 5.4:	Managed	gold	Mineral	Reserves	
FIGURE 5.2: Managed gold Mineral Reserves
Moz

Americas region

Australia region

West Africa region

(0,27)

(0.34)

2,03

1,76

3,97

3,63

0,38

South Africa region

(0,21)

8,35

8,73

(5)

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

Variance

Dec 2013

Dec 2014

38,22

38,02

40

45

The South Africa region accounts for 73% of  our managed gold Mineral Reserves, West Africa 17%, Australia 7% and the 

Americas 3%.

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 201492

PiLLAr: groWing goLd FiELdS

5.5  Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Statement (continued)

FIGURE 5.5: Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Statement as at 31 December 20141

heADline numberS

Gold only

Total Operating Mines
Total Projects

total operating mines 

managed mineral resources

Attributable ounces

31 Dec 2014

31 Dec 2013

31 Dec 2014 31 Dec 2013

tonnes
(mt)

903.9
1 164.6

Grade
(g/t)

3.58
0.65

Au
(moz)

103.925
24.271

Tonnes
(Mt)

975.0
1 291.4

Grade
(g/t)

3.44
0.69

Au
(Moz)

107.958
28.705

Gold
(moz)

96.187
12.104

Gold
(Moz)

 100.049
13.344

and projects

2 068.6

1.93

128.196

2 266.4

1.88

136.663

108.291

113.393

operAtionAl SummAry

managed mineral resources

Attributable ounces

Gold

Australia operations
Agnew/Lawlers
Darlot
Granny Smith
St Ives

total Australia region

South African 

operations
South Deep

total South Africa 

region

peru operation
Cerro Corona

total Americas region

Ghana operations
Damang
Tarkwa2

total west Africa region

operations – total Gold

31 Dec 2014

31 Dec 2013

31 Dec 2014 31 Dec 2013

tonnes
(mt)

Grade
(g/t)

Gold
(koz)

Tonnes
(Mt)

Grade
(g/t)

Gold
(koz)

resource
(koz)

Resource
(koz)

13.8
1.1
17.4
30.1

62.4

 5.79
7.17
6.61
3.63

5.00

2 570
263
3 696
3 508

10 037

19.2
1.6
36.2
38.4

95.4

5.92
5.3
2.8
3.51

3.75

3 657
271
3 254
4 340

2 570
263
3 696
3 508

3 657
271
3 254
4 340

11 521

10 037

11 521

382.4

6.19

76 046

382.8

6.20

76 249

69 804

70 042

382.4

6.19

76 046

382.8

6.20

76 249

69 804

70 042

115.2

115.2

85.3
258.7

344.0

903.9

0.81

0.81

1.92
1.15

1.34

3.58

3 015

3 015

5 260
9 568

14 827

103 925

125.3

 125.3

95.8
275.7

371.5

975.0

0.82

0.82

 2.14
1.16

1.41

3.44

3 318

3 318

6 579
10 291

16 870

107 958

3 001

3 001

4 734
8 611

13 345

96 187

3 303

3 303

5 921
9 262

15 183

100 049

Attributable 

Attributable 

copper
(mlbs)

1 001 

Copper
(Mlbs)

1 119 

(peru) – cerro corona
copper

tonnes
(mt)

Grade
(% cu)

copper
(mlbs)

Tonnes
(Mt)

Grade
(% Cu)

Copper
(Mlbs)

Copper (Cu) only

108.0 

0.42 

1 006 

118.3 

0.43 

1 124 

1  Managed unless otherwise stated
2  Includes 65Mt of  surface stockpiles at an ore grade of  0.43g/t

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
PiLLAr: groWing goLd FiELdS

93

FIGURE 5.6: Gold Fields Mineral Reserve Statement as at 31 December 20141

heADline numberS 

managed mineral reserves

Attributable ounces

31 Dec 2014

31 Dec 2013

31 Dec 2014 31 Dec 2013

Gold only

tonnes
(mt)

Grade
(g/t)

Au
(moz)

Tonnes
(Mt)

Grade
(g/t)

Au
(Moz)

Gold
(moz)

Gold
(Moz)

Total Operating Mines

558.1

2.90

52.123

563.2

2.90

52.564 

 48.122 

48.608 

total operating mines 

and projectsz

558.1

2.90

52.123

563.2

2.90

52.564 

48.122

 48.608 

operAtionAl SummAry

Gold

Australia operations
Agnew/Lawlers
Darlot
Granny Smith
St Ives

total Australia region

South African 

operations
South Deep

total South Africa 

region

peru operation
Cerro Corona

total Americas region

Ghana operations
Damang
Tarkwa2

total west Africa region

total Gold

managed mineral reserves

Attributable ounces

31 Dec 2014

31 Dec 2013

31 Dec 2014 31 Dec 2013

tonnes
(mt)

Grade
(g/t)

Gold
(koz)

Tonnes
(Mt)

Grade
(g/t)

Gold
(koz)

reserve
(koz)

Reserve
(koz)

3.6 
0.4 
4.5 
17.8 

26.3 

7.44 
7.36 
6.02 
3.14 

4.28 

865 
85 
872 
1 803 

3 625 

4.2 
1.0 
4.1 
20.7 

30.0 

7.05 
5.07 
6.34 
3.03 

4.11 

953 
155 
838 
 2 022 

3 968 

865 
85 
872 
1 803 

3 625 

953 
155 
838 
2 022 

3 968 

223.2 

5.30 

38 016 

224.4 

5.30 

38 224 

34 896 

35 113 

223.2 

5.30 

38 016 

224.4 

5.30 

38 224 

34 896 

35 113 

60.5 

60.5 

25.7
222.4 

248.1 

 558.1 

0.90 

0.90 

1.49 
1.05 

1.09 

2.90 

1 757 

1 757 

1 235 
7 491 

 8 725 

 52 123 

67.1 

67.1 

22.8 
218.8 

241.6 

563.2 

0.94 

0.94 

1.46 
1.03 

1.07 

2.90 

2 025 

2 025 

1 073 
 7 273 

 8 346 

1 749 

1 749 

1 111 
6 742 

7 853 

 52 564 

 48 122

 2 016 

 2 016 

966 
 6 546 

 7 512 

48 608 

Attributable 

Attributable 

(peru) – cerro corona
copper

tonnes
(mt)

Grade
(% cu)

copper
(mlbs)

copper (cu) only

60.5 

0.47 

623 

Tonnes
(Mt)

67.1 

Grade
(% Cu)

0.48 

Copper
(Mlbs)

712 

copper
(mlbs)

620 

Copper
(Mlbs)

708 

1  Managed unless otherwise stated
2  Includes 65Mt of  surface stockpiles at an ore grade of  0.43g/t

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
94

PiLLAr: groWing goLd FiELdS

5.5  Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Statement (continued)

5.5.3 regional summary

AmericAS

operations

The Americas region has a declared managed gold 

Mineral Resource of  3.0 million ounces at December 2014 

(December 2013: 3.3 million ounces) and a gold Mineral  

Reserve of 1.8 million ounces (December 2013: 2.0 million ounces). 

In addition, it has a managed copper Mineral Resource and 

Mineral Reserve of  1,006 million pounds (December 2013: 

1,124 million pounds) and 623 million pounds (December 2013: 

712 million pounds), respectively. Of  this, 99.5% is attributable to 

AuStrAliA

operations

The Australia region has a declared managed gold Mineral  

Resource of  10 million ounces (December 2013: 

11.5 million ounces) and a gold Mineral Reserve of  3.6 million 

ounces (December 2013: 4.0 million ounces) and is 100% 

attributable to Gold Fields. These figures are net of  1.0 million 

ounces from mined depletion. A key highlight for 2014 was that 

production from the region exceeded the one million ounce 

mark. St Ives is also planning to bring the Invincible pit into 

production during the first half  of  2015.

Gold Fields.

Far Southeast project

These figures are net of  153,600 ounces of  gold and around 

71 million pounds of  copper from mined depletion. 

woodjam project

The total declared Mineral Resource for the Woodjam Project 

in British Columbia, Canada, remains unchanged at 584,000 

ounces of  gold and 1,705 million pounds of  copper. The project 
is 51% attributable to Gold Fields and has been put up for sale.

Salares norte project

Gold Fields holds a 100% interest in the Salares Norte Project, 

which is situated in the Atacama region in northern Chile. The 

project has an Inferred Mineral Resource of  3.1 million ounces 

gold and 34 million ounces silver.

An Inferred Mineral Resource for the Far Southeast deposit 

was declared in September 2012 – this remains unchanged 

as at December 2014. This reported 891.7Mt at 0.7g/t Au and 

0.5% Cu for 19.8 million ounces of  gold and 9,921Mlb of  copper, 

inside a mining constraint which assumed an eventual non-

selective, bulk underground mining method. The classification 

of  Inferred was applied based on drill hole spacing, estimation 
quality, geological continuity and geological understanding of 

the deposit in early 2012 and is compliant with the SAMREC 

Code. A total of  40% of  this Mineral Resource is attributable 

to Gold Fields.

Exploration drilling at Woodjam project in Canada

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014PiLLAr: groWing goLd FiELdS

95

South AFricA

operations

weSt AFricA

operations

The South Africa region has a total declared managed gold 

The West Africa region has a declared managed gold Mineral 

Mineral Resource of  76.0 million ounces (December 2013: 

Resource of  14.8 million ounces (December 2013: 16.9 million 

76.2 million ounces) and a gold Mineral Reserve of  38.0 million 

ounces) and a gold Mineral Reserve of  8.7 million ounces 

ounces (December 2013: 38.2 million ounces), of  which, 91.8% 

(December 2013: 8.3 million ounces), which are 90% attributable 

is attributable to Gold Fields, in line with the agreed phase-in 

to Gold Fields. These figures are net of  736,000 ounces from 

participation of  BEE partners over 20 years. Ultimately the BEE 

mined depletion. 

partners’ stake will be 10%. These resource and reserve figures 

are net of  200,500 ounces from mined depletion during 2014.

Damang is currently bedding down the improved quality of 

production and is reviewing further opportunities within its lease 

At South Deep all mining-related activities were severely 

area. The mine is also focussing its medium-term near-mine 

curtailed for most of  2014 due the introduction of  an extensive 

exploration activity on potential ore sources within an 8km 

ground support remediation programme. A review of  South 

mineralisation trend running from the Damang pit complex to 

Deep’s current mining layout and methodology as well as 

the Amoanda pit. The Mineral Reserve of  1.2 million ounces is 

the geotechnical regime, commenced in 2014. The need for 

steady compared to that of  December 2013 (1.1 million ounces) 

a fundamental change in the regional pillar configuration of 

with positive cash flows forecast for the current six-year  

260 x 60 metres has been recognised, which will require more 

Life-of-Mine.

mining corridors as mining moves deeper. 

Importantly, this currently remains work in progress and 
geotechnical modelling and final independent peer review is 

time. Several hydrothermal prospects are being reviewed as 
possible additional sources of  ore that can potentially extend the 

Tarkwa’s figures are inclusive of  the Teberebie pillar for the first 

scheduled for 2015 to validate the work being completed by 

life of  the mine.

external consultants. Further optimisation and the tailoring of 

selected pillar layouts to adapt to local conditions across the 

proJectS For DiSpoSAl

mine will still be necessary. Final approval and sign-off  of  the 

Arctic platinum project (App) 

The total Mineral Resource figures for APP remain unchanged 

year-on-year. APP in Finland has a Mineral Resource of 

786,000 ounces of  gold, 2.4 million ounces of  platinum and 

9.8 million ounces of  palladium – as well as 1,034 million pounds 

of  copper and 438 million pounds of  nickel. Of  this 100% is 

attributable to Gold Fields. The project has been put up for sale. 

new pillar configuration impacting the Life-of-Mine plan can 

realistically only be expected during the course of  2015. 

In addition, two alternative mining methods are under review. 

The first method is the 4.5 x 4.5 metre destress method and 

the second is the Inclined Mining Slot method. Both of  these 

methods, if  successful, could significantly de-risk the South 

Deep build-up plan and future production profiles, and could 

have a meaningful positive impact on costs and the schedule. 

The destress method will be piloted in discrete areas of  the mine 

during 2015. It is too early to assess whether either of  these 

methods could be commercially deployed. 

Concurrent with the review of  the geotechnical layout, Gold 

Fields is undertaking a wholesale strategic review of  the 

operation with the objective of  achieving self-funding as soon as 

possible – likely at the end of  2016 at current rand gold prices – 

and deliver consistent free cash flow margins.

Given the material influence of  these studies, a holding pattern 

has been adopted with regard to the Mineral Resource and 

Mineral Reserve declaration for December 2014 in that the 

December 2013 model will merely be depleted for annual 

production and not be supported by a new design and 

schedule. In 2015 we will however focus on a new mining 

strategy which is aligned to the new pillar configuration, once 

finalised, and new mine designs and schedules will inform the 
December 2015 Mineral Reserves.

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014Livestock improvement project near the Cerro Corona mine in Peru

6.1 Gold Fields as an employer of choice

6.1.1 Our workforce
6.1.2
6.1.3

Employee development
Industrial relations

6.2 Government and social relations
Public policy
Total value distribution

6.2.1
6.2.2
Community relations
6.3.1
6.3.2 Community value distribution
6.3.3

Social licence to operate

Shared Value

6.3

98
98
100
101

102
102
106

108
108
111
114

6future responsibly 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
98

PiLLAr: SEcuring our FuturE rESPonSibLy

6.1 Gold Fields as an employer of choice 

Gold Fields’ People Strategy drives a high-performance culture 

In total during the year, the workforce decreased 8% to 

across all operations. Despite the challenges posed by the 

15,440 (2013: 16,852). This total comprised 8,954 employees 

current low gold price, Gold Fields remains committed to being 

(2013: 10,167) and 6,486 (2013: 6,685) contractors. 

an employer of  choice. This means ensuring that employees:

•  Receive market-aligned pay and benefits
•  Have access to a wide range of  training and development 

opportunities

•  Work in a safe, productive and respectful environment
•  Are acknowledged and recognised for their role in value 

creation 

6.1.1 Our workforce

In line with its new, cash-generative production profile and low-

cost operating model – the Group has established a leaner, more 
efficient and better skilled workforce. This has driven increased 

emphasis on employee efficiency, accountability and rewards; 

and enhanced training for key personnel – with particular 

emphasis on further developing mechanised mining skills at 

South Deep. 

LABOUR SIZE AND PROFILE 

These reductions were effected through both voluntary and 

involuntary retrenchments – as well as through natural attrition. 

A regional breakdown of  retrenchments is set out below: 

•  The Americas: 47 (2013: 57) 
•  Australia: 98 (2013: 228)
•  South Africa: 529 (2013: 51)
•  West Africa: 628 (2013: 17) 
•  Corporate head office: 3 (2013: 52)
•  Denver office: 4 (2013: 57)

The ongoing rightsizing of  Gold Fields’ workforce has played an 
important role in ensuring the Group’s long-term sustainability in 

the wake of  continued cost pressures, and supports the ability to 

generate free cash flow despite a very challenging gold price. 

Following the reduction in its headcount, Gold Fields has 

focussed on ensuring that employees and contractors are:

The comprehensive restructuring of  Gold Fields since 2013 – in 

•  Effectively deployed to operate efficiently and safely across 

particular the unbundling of  Sibanye Gold in 2013 – has led 

the remaining production base

to a significant reduction in the size of  the workforce but also 

•  Incentivised in-line with the Company’s sustainable cash-

to a change in the workforce profile, which now predominantly 

generation targets

comprises labour-efficient mechanised mining skills. 

•  Equipped with the appropriate skills to achieve a world-class 

mechanised mining performance 

These processes continued during 2014, driven by: 

•  The re-basing of  production and development at South Deep
•  The integration of  the Yilgarn South Assets, which 

included workforce rationalisation at Agnew/Lawlers
•  The closure of  Tarkwa’s North Heap Leach facility and 

workforce restructuring at Damang

FiGure 6.1:	Group	human	resources	performance

category

Total employees (excluding contractors)
Contractors
HDSA employees in South Africa (%)¹
HDSA employees in South Africa (%) (Senior Management)¹
National employees in Ghana (%) (excluding contractors)
Minimum wage ratio²
Female employees (%)
Ratio of  basic salary of  men to women
Employee wages and benefits (US$m)
Average training (hours per employee)
Employee turnover (%)4

2014

8,954
6,486
71
47
99
1.7
14
1.1
468
181
20.2

2013

10,167
6,685
70
44
99
3
11
1.2
595
97³
10.0

2012

9,684
8,961
68
31
98
3
12
1.4
780
142³
8.0

1 Excluding foreign nationals, but including white females and corporate office; HDSAs – Historically Disadvantaged South Africans

2 Entry level wage compared to local minimum wage. The narrowing of  the ratio reflects a sharp rise in the minimum wage in Ghana

3 Figures do not include Yilgarn South Assets

4

Includes voluntary and involuntary turnover

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014PiLLAr: SEcuring our FuturE rESPonSibLy

99

FiGure 6.2:	Workforce	breakdown

Employee accommodation 

total 

Different accommodation options are offered to South Deep 

employees below middle management level. These include 

workforce employees contractors

upgraded single-unit hostel accommodation for 845 employees, 

Australia
Ghana
Peru
South Deep
Corporate functions

Total

BENEFITS

2,270
6,132
1,710
5,246
82

15,440

1,564
3,344
450
3,514
82

8,954

706
2,788
1,260
1,732
0

6,486

Gold Fields remains committed to attracting and retaining 

motivated, high-calibre employees. This requires the right 

balance of  guaranteed pay, employee benefits and both short-

and long-term incentives. In 2014, the average guaranteed pay 

for employees increased 5% (2013: 5%). These rates of  increase 

are lower than those seen historically in the gold industry, and 

partially reflect reduced competition for scarce skills in the 

mining sector amid weaker commodity markets. Gold Fields 

continues to provide employees (where relevant) with retirement 

savings, healthcare assistance, life and disability insurance, 

housing assistance and personal accident cover.

Senior managers and executives

In 2014, the Company reconfigured the balanced scorecards 

and long-term incentive schemes for senior management – to 

bring about closer alignment with shareholders’ interests in 

the immediate and medium term. Important changes included, 
inter alia:

•  Explicit emphasis on cash generation 
•  Revision of  the long-term incentive scheme to one that 

rewards focus on total shareholder returns and free cash flow 

margin generation

South Deep

In South Africa, in addition to the Company’s normal 

benefit schemes, a lot of  emphasis is also placed on the 

accommodation of  employees as regulated under the Mining 

Charter (p104 – 105). 

family unit and housing accommodation for 1,148 employees 

and their families, or a living-out allowance of  R2,000 (US$170) 

per month, with which employees can finance their own private 

accommodation.  

In accordance with the Mining Charter obligations, Gold Fields 

has achieved one person per room for its mine accommodation 

by 31 December 2014.

The Company remains committed to ensuring that mine 

accommodation affords employees privacy, dignity and a 

decent living environment. In a key change to its housing 

strategy during 2014, South Deep has decided to team up with 

a property development firm to construct and manage 1,000 

new homes between 2015 and 2018 at an average cost of  about 

R400,000 each. These houses will either be sold or leased to 

employees. Employees who want to buy a house within a 10-year 
lease period will have the option to use the South Deep home 

ownership programme, comprising a housing allowance and a 

subsidy in the form of  an interest free loan. This programme is 

set to be rolled out during 2015.

EMPLOYMENT OF NATIONALS 

Gold Fields is committed to employing nationals (and in South 

Africa, HDSAs) where possible, as this maximises the impact 

of  its operations on host societies in terms of  economic value 

generation and skills transfer. Gold Fields’ approach aims to: 

•  Enhance the local skills base, build local capacity and foster 

international employment standards 

•  Contribute to local development through the direct/indirect 

economic impacts from workers’ salaries

•  Meet relevant national regulatory requirements

FiGure 6.3:	Proportion	of	nationals	per	region	

region

Peru
Australia 
South Africa 
Ghana 

2014

99.2%
98%
84%1
99%

2013

99.9%
97%
83%
99%

1  71% HDSAs in management in South Africa (excludes foreign nationals, but includes 

white females and corporate office)

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014 
 
 
 
 
100

PiLLAr: SEcuring our FuturE rESPonSibLy

6.1  Gold Fields as an employer of choice (continued)

6.1.2 Employee development

The provision of  world-class training and skills development 

is central to driving a high-performance culture. It enables the 

Group to attract and retain the best talent; enhance employee 

productivity and safety; and achieve its strategic objectives. 

In 2014, approximately US$13.4 million – 1% of  our revenue – 

was spent on training and skills development across the Group 

(2013: US$16 million – 1% of  our revenue). This was invested 

chiefly in the delivery of  fit-for-purpose technical training, 

comprehensive leadership development programmes and 

training to ensure global alignment with the new Gold Fields 

culture. 

•  Artisan upskilling:  Highly skilled artisans from Australia were 
brought to South Deep to coach and mentor our local artisans. 

A foreman training programme was also developed to ensure 

that supervisors were able to support artisans on the job. 
•  Specialist training in mechanised mining: As previously 
planned, a team of  highly qualified mechanised mining 

experts were brought in from Australia. This was with the aim 

of  transferring their technical mechanised mining expertise 

and supporting the establishment of  international mechanised 

mining standards at the mine – whilst remaining sensitive to 

the mine’s history and context. The majority of  this team has 

since left South Deep after assisting with the ongoing training 

and skills transfer programmes. Furthermore, 12 South Deep 

employees visited our Australian mines and teamed up with 

Extensive technical training was carried out in all regions. 

their counterparts at these operations.

This included bespoke programmes targeting supervisors and, 

at South Deep, a particular focus on mechanised mining skills 

•  Skills and leadership training for managers: Gold Fields 
assessed the competency of  all employees at D-band and 

development. On the leadership development front, all regions 

above. This included a series of  psychometric and literacy 

rolled out a management development programme. 

tests, as well as ‘in-basket’ and roleplay exercises. The results 

Around 86% of  employees underwent training in the Gold 
Fields ‘DNA’ – an internal programme that defines the Gold 

Fields culture, values, strategic objectives, ways of  working and 

engagement with stakeholders.

SKILLS DEVELOPMENT AND TRAINING AT SOUTH DEEP 

A major independent review at South Deep identified a number 

of  shortfalls in the mine’s workplace culture, practices and skills 

base. These relate to a shortage of  advanced underground 

mechanised mining skills, the challenging nature of  the project 

itself, unsafe behaviour and workforce legacy issues. It is of 

strategic importance that these challenges are addressed as 

they are acting as a key barrier in the journey of  the mine from 

development to full production. 

In this context, Gold Fields undertook the following initiatives in 

2014: 

are informing future training needs of  individual employees – 

and of  the management team as a whole. The first Gold Fields 

management development programme was run for middle- to 

senior managers

•  Training on the new operating model: An intensive training 

programme was implemented to support the safe and 

effective shift to the 7-2/7-5 roster. The focus here was not only 

on the new roster schedule but also on launching  

a) a new safety induction training programme, b) Gold Fields’  

DNA campaign, c) mechanised mining awareness 

programme, d) basic supervisory skills, e) performance and 

talent management processes and procedures, f) health 

key tips and how to ask for support, and g) update of  all 

personnel records and data clean up

•  Recognition of  prior learning programme: This programme 
enables employees to receive formal qualifications linked to 

their current employment profile

•  Review of  job profiles: Around 30 core job profiles were 

•  Operator skills assessment and training: All operators 
were reassessed to better understand their skill levels. In 

revised to better suit the needs of  underground mechanised 

mining. This included the review of  role profiles for all mine 

response, a competency programme was implemented to 

executives, operators, artisans, business critical positions 

ensure every operator had a valid licence to operate relevant 

and future positions

mining equipment – and additional training was also delivered 

to operators and artisans working with new specialised 

mechanised mining equipment. Where appropriate English 

language literacy was lacking, operators were offered Adult 

Basic Education and Training (ABET) courses to improve 

their literacy. 

In addition, a wider training strategy is being developed to 

meet the future needs of  the mine. The focus in 2014 was on 

operators and artisans and ensuring key and critical roles had 

highly skilled employees. 

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014PiLLAr: SEcuring our FuturE rESPonSibLy

101

6.1.3 industrial relations 

WEST AFRICA

During 2014, Gold Fields continued to focus on improving 

relations with the Ghana Mineworkers Union (GMWU), following 

illegal strikes at the Tarkwa and Damang mines in 2013. The 

Group engaged closely with the GMWU over the retrenchment 

of  workers at both Damang and Tarkwa. Constructive dialogue 

focussed on the specific challenges posed by the low gold price 

– and the potential implications for each operation. As a result, 

the retrenchment process was carried out without disruptions to 

the operations. 

Around three-quarters (73%) of  Gold Fields’ workforce is 

unionised – though patterns of  union activity vary considerably 

between the regions:

•  The Americas: 12% (2013: 14%)
•  Australia: 0% (2013: 0%)
•  South Africa: 93% (2013: 91%)
•  West Africa: 96% (2013: 95%)

Maintaining constructive industrial relations is particularly 

important in Ghana and South Africa. In these countries Gold 

Fields includes trade unions and other labour organisations 

in key decision-making processes, including those relating 

to compliance, health and safety, and training. This inclusive 

and collaborative approach has contributed to the fact that 

there were no incidents of  industrial action in 2014 – legal or 

otherwise. 

SOUTH AFRICA

In recent years, the South African mining sector has been 

affected by high-profile labour unrest. The length and magnitude 

of  the resulting strikes have severely affected the sector, in 

particular the platinum industry. Although Gold Fields was not 

affected by these issues in 2014, the risk of  industrial action – 

ahead of  the 2015 wage talks in the gold mining sector and the 

emergence of  new unions in the industry – is significant and 

needs to be closely and constructively managed. 

Gold Fields actively engages with senior representatives from all 

unions present at the mine. The National Union of  Mineworkers 

(NUM) is the majority union at South Deep, representing around 

83% of  employees. Another 10% of  employees is represented 

by the United Association of  South Africa (UASA). Although the 

Association of  Mineworkers and Construction (AMCU), which 

played a pivotal role in the 2014 platinum industry strikes, has 

not yet gained formal recognition status at South Deep, it is 

playing an increasingly influential role in the gold mining sector. 

In February 2015 Gold Fields took a decision to conduct 

Company-specific negotiations with organised labour around 

the 2015 wage talks. While these negotiations will still be held 

under the auspices of  the South African Chamber of  Mines, it is 

not anticipated thay they will form part of  the centralised wage 

negotiations conducted by the Chamber on behalf  of  other the 

gold producers operating in South Africa. 

This decision was taken because, while Gold Fields shares many 

of  the broader socio-economic circumstances of  the South 

African gold producers, its only South African operation – South 

Deep – has a significantly different operating model and labour 

profile to the other gold mining companies. South Deep is the 

only fully mechanised gold mining operation in South Africa and 
it employs a small highly skilled workforce, with unique skills not 

necessarily found in the gold sector – its wage structure needs 

to attract and retain these specialised skilled employees.

Twin shafts at the South Deep mine in South Africa

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014102

PiLLAr: SEcuring our FuturE rESPonSibLy

6.2 Government and social relations 

6.2.1 Public policy

As the issuer of  mining licences, developers of  policy and 

overseers of  regulation, host governments are among Gold 

Fields’ most important stakeholders. Engagement with national 

governments typically takes place on a collective basis through 

local chambers of  mines. Gold Fields also regularly engages 

with regional regulatory authorities and municipal authorities 

in its host communities. Gold Fields does not provide financial 

contributions to political parties and lobby groups, unless 

explicitly approved by the Gold Fields Board of  Directors. 

TAXATION AND THE MAXIMISATION OF NATIONAL MINERAL 

BENEFITS 

It is natural and right that governments seek to maximise the 

social benefits that accrue from the extraction of  scarce natural 
resources. As a matter of  policy Gold Fields fully complies with 

the fiscal and taxation regulations and laws of  the countries 

it operates in, understanding that these fiscal contributions 

are critical to fund governments, its employees and public 

sector infrastructure and projects. Nonetheless, attempts to 

secure these benefits through higher levels of  targeted taxation 

can – in the long term – have the opposite effect. Indeed, the 

weak commodities market – including the low price of  gold 

– is throwing into sharp focus just how damaging short-term 

attempts to secure a greater proportion of  companies’ earnings 

can be. Mining investment is falling, new growth projects are 

being left undeveloped and existing projects are facing closure 

– even without additional fiscal uncertainty. The implications 

for longer-term national and host community development 

are obvious. 

Boilermaker at work at Tarkwa mine in Ghana

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014PiLLAr: SEcuring our FuturE rESPonSibLy

103

FISCAL CHALLENGES IN GHANA

In Ghana, Gold Fields continues to remain disproportionately 

exposed to the consequences of  a heavier fiscal regime for 

the mining sector. This follows a range of  fiscal measures 

taken in recent years to address public budgetary challenges. 

These include:

In July 2014, Australia’s new coalition government repealed 

the Carbon Pricing Mechanism (CPM) – which had been 

implemented under the previous administration in 2012  

(p65 – 66). Gold Fields believes that the repeal of  the CPM 

will allow for the pursuit of  more economically sustainable 

approaches to carbon management in Australia.

•  Increased corporate income tax rates and royalties
•  A much reduced capital allowance 
•  Increased customs duties on mining items
•  Increased ‘stool tax’ – a local tax calculated on the size  

BLACK ECONOMIC EMPOWERMENT IN SOUTH AFRICA 

The mining sector is regulated by the Mineral and Petroleum 

Resources Development Act of  2002, which requires mining 

companies to facilitate meaningful and substantial participation 

of  all exploration and mining lease areas 

of  Historically Disadvantaged South Africans (HDSAs) in 

Gold Fields remains one of  the largest individual contributors 

to public revenues in Ghana – paying US$142 million in taxes 

and other contributions last year. Whilst proud of  making 

the mining industry. To provide guidance on this open-

ended requirement, the Mining Charter, as revised in 2010, 

was published.

such a substantive contribution to national development, this 

The Mining Charter guides mining companies in their 

contribution continues to be disproportionate to that of  its  

empowerment initiatives by providing for a range of 

in-country peers. 

In 2014, these commercial pressures – in combination with the 
low gold price – helped influence Gold Fields’ decision to reduce 

empowerment actions and a corollary time frame target 

(March 2015) for their respective implementation. Our Mining 

Charter Scorecard is on p104 – 105.

exploration activity to near-mine activities only and to postpone 

Gold Fields’ Black Economic Empowerment ownership 

the potential expansion of  the Damang mine.

transactions are detailed on the Company’s website at  

www.goldfields.co.za/reports/annual_report_2013/integrated/

Gold Fields continues to constructively engage with the 

Government of  Ghana regarding the potential introduction of 

sec-ethics.php

a common taxation framework that would be equally applicable 

Gold Fields, through its membership of  the South African 

to all gold mining companies. The first formal engagements with 

Chamber of  Mines, is an active participant in the Mining Industry 

the Government’s Mining Review Committee in terms of  a new 

Growth, Development and Employment Task Team (MIGDETT). 

stability agreement were held in late 2014. A level playing field 

The MIGDETT is a vehicle used by the South African Department 

with a supportive and globally competitive tax regime would 

of  Mineral Resources, companies and trade unions to promote 

significantly improve fiscal predictability for the mining sector, 

sustainable growth and meaningful transformation of  the 

which is critical for long-term investment planning. 

mining sector.

PROPOSED REVIEW OF ROYALTIES IN WESTERN 

AUSTRALIA

The current Government of  Western Australia is reviewing 

royalties charged on mining – with suggestions that gold mining 

royalties could potentially be increased. Gold Fields has joined 

with its peers in the region to highlight the threats posed by 

such a change to the shared value that the industry generates 

for a broad base of  stakeholders – particularly given the current 

low gold price. This includes active participation in the ‘Heart of 

Gold’ publicity campaign to highlight the benefits of  the industry. 

A decision on the mining royalty review is expected in the first 

half  of  2015. 

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014104

PiLLAr: SEcuring our FuturE rESPonSibLy

6.2  Government and social relations (continued)

FIGURE 6.4: Mining Charter Scorecard

In September 2010, the South African Department of  Mineral Resources (DMR) amended the Mining Charter (the Charter) by 
proclamation in the Government Gazette.  

All mining rights holders (including South Deep as the mining rights holder) are required to submit an annual compliance assessment 
to the DMR on progress made against meeting the annual targets in the Charter. Gold Fields had submitted its 2012 and 2013 annual 
assessment report in accordance with these requirements. In early 2015, the DMR requested all mining rights holders  

ELEMENT

DESCRIPTION

MEASURE

REPORTING

Report on the level of  compliance with the 
Revised Charter for the calendar year

Documentary proof of receipt from the DMR

OWNERSHIP

Minimum target for effective HDSA ownership

Meaningful economic participation

HOUSING AND 
LIVING CONDITIONS

PROCUREMENT  
AND ENTERPRISE  
DEVELOPMENT

Conversion and upgrading hostels to attain the 
occupancy rate of  one person per room

Percentage reduction of occupancy rate towards 2014 
target

Occupancy rate of one person per room

Hostels: South Deep has completed 100% of the planned hostel upgrades. At the end of December 2014, the 

occupancy rate averaged one person per room, thus meeting the Mining Charter compliance scorecard target

Conversion and upgrading hostels into family units

Percentage conversion of hostels into family units

Family units established

(100% complete)

Family Units: South Deep has completed the establishment of  family accommodation at its hostels 

Procurement spent on BEE entity

Capital goods

Services

Consumable goods

Multi-national suppliers’ contribution to the social 
fund

Annual spend on procurement from multi-national 
suppliers

0.5%	of	procurement	value

0.23%. South Deep is not aware of any social fund that has been established for the mining industry and 

the DMR has yet to provide clarity in this regard. The percentage is based on contributions that have been 

set aside by our major multinational suppliers. South Deep’s largest multinational suppliers all operate local 

subsidiaries, which are BEE certified

EMPLOYMENT EqUITY

Diversification of  the workplace to reflect the 
country’s demographics to attain competitiveness

Middle management

Top management (Board)

Senior management

Junior management

Core and critical skills

HUMAN RESOURCES 
DEVELOPMENT

Developing requisite skills, including support for 
South Africa-based research and development 
initiatives intended to develop solutions in 
exploration, mining, processing, technology, mining, 
beneficiation as well as environmental conservation

Human resources development expenditure as a 
percentage of total annual payroll (excluding mandatory 
skills development levy)

MINE COMMUNITY  
DEVELOPMENT

Conduct ethnographic community consultative 
and collaborative processes to delineate 
community needs analysis

Implement approved community projects

Up-to-date project implementation

As part of  South Deep’s Social and Labour Plans, South Deep is involved in a number of  community 

development projects focussed on infrastructure development, job creation and poverty alleviation, with 

particular emphasis on enterprise development. Despite being in a loss-making position due to South 

Deep being in a ramp-up phase, the mine spent R34 million on socio-economic development in 2014. 

59% of  the SED spend (or R20 million) is spent on implementation of  community projects approved in 

the SLP. 96% of  the projects were implemented in 2014

Improvement of  the industry’s environmental 
management

Implementation of approved environmental 
management programmes (EMPs)

SUSTAINABLE  
DEVELOPMENT  
AND GROWTH

Improvement of  the industry’s mine health and 
safety performance

Implementation of tripartite action plan on health and 
safety

Utilisation of  South Africa-based research facilities 
for analysis of  samples across the mining value

Percentage of samples in South African facilities

BENEFICIATION

Contribution towards beneficiation

Added production volume contribution to local value 
addition beyond the baseline 

Section	26	of	MPRDA	(%	of	above	

baseline)

Current regulations and guidelines are not clear in relation to the baseline levels and targets. However, Gold 

Fields has made a capital-intensive investment in our smelting facility at South Deep, which adds significant 

value to the gold being mined as well as creating jobs. Gold Fields also owns 2.76% of Rand Refinery, which 

has established the ‘Gold Zone’. The aim is for the Gold Zone to become a major hub for precious metals 

fabrication in South Africa for global export, while at the same time assisting local communities with skills 

development (including beneficiation)

Annually

26%

40%

70%

50%

40%

40%

40%

40%

40%

5%

100%

100%

100%

Target met (Annual Submission)

35%

82%

73%

85%

50%

50%

63%

52%

72%

10%

100%

100%

100%

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014PiLLAr: SEcuring our FuturE rESPonSibLy

105

(including Gold Fields’ South Deep Mine) to re-submit the 2012 and 2013 compliance assessments and submit its 2014 compliance 
assessment onto an on-line template (designed by the DMR). Gold Fields has submitted the information online as requested and 
continues to engage with the DMR in this regard.  

Details of  South Deep’s performance against the 2014 targets are set out below.

MINING CHARTER COMPLIANCE 
TARGET BY 2014

PROGRESS AGAINST 2014 MINING CHARTER TARGET 

Capital goods

Services

Consumable goods

Top management (Board)

Senior management

Junior management

Core and critical skills

REPORTING

Report on the level of  compliance with the 

Revised Charter for the calendar year

Documentary proof of receipt from the DMR

OWNERSHIP

Minimum target for effective HDSA ownership

Meaningful economic participation

Annually

26%

Target met (Annual Submission)

35%

Conversion and upgrading hostels to attain the 

occupancy rate of  one person per room

target

Percentage reduction of occupancy rate towards 2014 

Occupancy rate of one person per room

Hostels: South Deep has completed 100% of the planned hostel upgrades. At the end of December 2014, the 
occupancy rate averaged one person per room, thus meeting the Mining Charter compliance scorecard target

Conversion and upgrading hostels into family units

Percentage conversion of hostels into family units

Family units established

Family Units: South Deep has completed the establishment of  family accommodation at its hostels 
(100% complete)

Multi-national suppliers’ contribution to the social 

Annual spend on procurement from multi-national 

fund

suppliers

0.5%	of	procurement	value

0.23%. South Deep is not aware of any social fund that has been established for the mining industry and 
the DMR has yet to provide clarity in this regard. The percentage is based on contributions that have been 
set aside by our major multinational suppliers. South Deep’s largest multinational suppliers all operate local 
subsidiaries, which are BEE certified

40%

70%

50%

82%

73%

85%

HOUSING AND 

LIVING CONDITIONS

PROCUREMENT  

AND ENTERPRISE  

DEVELOPMENT

Procurement spent on BEE entity

EMPLOYMENT EqUITY

Diversification of  the workplace to reflect the 

country’s demographics to attain competitiveness

Middle management

HUMAN RESOURCES 

DEVELOPMENT

Developing requisite skills, including support for 

South Africa-based research and development 

initiatives intended to develop solutions in 

exploration, mining, processing, technology, mining, 

beneficiation as well as environmental conservation

Human resources development expenditure as a 

percentage of total annual payroll (excluding mandatory 

skills development levy)

40%

40%

40%

40%

40%

5%

50%

50%

63%

52%

72%

10%

MINE COMMUNITY  

DEVELOPMENT

Conduct ethnographic community consultative 

and collaborative processes to delineate 

community needs analysis

Implement approved community projects

Up-to-date project implementation

As part of  South Deep’s Social and Labour Plans, South Deep is involved in a number of  community 
development projects focussed on infrastructure development, job creation and poverty alleviation, with 
particular emphasis on enterprise development. Despite being in a loss-making position due to South 
Deep being in a ramp-up phase, the mine spent R34 million on socio-economic development in 2014. 
59% of  the SED spend (or R20 million) is spent on implementation of  community projects approved in 
the SLP. 96% of  the projects were implemented in 2014

Improvement of  the industry’s environmental 

management

Implementation of approved environmental 

management programmes (EMPs)

SUSTAINABLE  

DEVELOPMENT  

AND GROWTH

Improvement of  the industry’s mine health and 

Implementation of tripartite action plan on health and 

safety performance

safety

Utilisation of  South Africa-based research facilities 

for analysis of  samples across the mining value

Percentage of samples in South African facilities

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

BENEFICIATION

Contribution towards beneficiation

Added production volume contribution to local value 

addition beyond the baseline 

Section	26	of	MPRDA	(%	of	above	
baseline)

Current regulations and guidelines are not clear in relation to the baseline levels and targets. However, Gold 
Fields has made a capital-intensive investment in our smelting facility at South Deep, which adds significant 
value to the gold being mined as well as creating jobs. Gold Fields also owns 2.76% of Rand Refinery, which 
has established the ‘Gold Zone’. The aim is for the Gold Zone to become a major hub for precious metals 
fabrication in South Africa for global export, while at the same time assisting local communities with skills 
development (including beneficiation)

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014106

PiLLAr: SEcuring our FuturE rESPonSibLy

6.2  Government and social relations (continued)

6.2.2 Total value distribution 

Gold Fields generates significant value for all the societies in which it operates – some of  which can be quantified and some which 

cannot. The most important means by which Gold Fields generates quantifiable value is outlined below: 

IN 2014, THE VALUE WE 
DISTRIBUTED TO OUR HOST 
COUNTRIES AMOUNTED TO:

US$2.65 billion

US$m

Government

Business

Employees/
contractors

SEd

Capital providers

Total value
 distribution

Americas

Australia

South Africa

West Africa

Total Gold Fields

62

64

2

66

194

168

819

212

625

1,8351

42

185

125

116

468

1 Total includes US$10.6 million for exploration expenses 

8

2

3

3

16

80

0

2

55

137

359

1,070

344

866
2,6501

PAYMENTS INCLUDE

•  Mining royalties and land-use payments
•  Income taxes, including taxes paid to government on 

the basis of  profitability

GOVERNMENT

•  Taxes, duties and levies related to the procurement of  

goods and services

•  Dividends (where government holds an equity stake 

in our business, such as in Ghana)

BUSINESS

Payments to business, including both operational and   
capital procurements

EMPLOYEES/  
CONTRACTORS

Payments to employees and contractors, such as 
wages, benefits and bonus payments (including shares 
and payroll taxes)

SED

Socio-Economic Development (SED) spending, 
including on infrastructure, health and wellbeing, 
education and training, local environmental initiatives 
and donations

CAPITAL 
PROVIDERS

Payments to providers of  capital, including interest and 
dividend payments to shareholders

WHY THESE  
STAKEHOLDERS MATTER

•  Government provides us with access 
to ore bodies by granting mining and 
other licences. They also deliver the 
infrastructure necessary to build and 
maintain our mines, including roads, 
electricity and water supply. 

•  Our supply chain businesses provide 

the equipment and services needed to 
develop and maintain our operations. 

•  The technical skills, experience, and 

manpower of  our people drive the day-
to-day operations of  our business, while 
their intellectual capital contributes to 
our strategy.   

•  Host communities provide us with 

our social licence to operate, and are 
the source of  a large portion of  our 
workforce

•  Financial institutions, shareholders 

and bond holders invest with us, thus 
enabling us to fund the development, 
maintenance and growth of  our 
operations.

FIGURE 6.5: National value distribution – Americas 2014 (US$m)

FIGURE 6.6: National value distribution – Australia 2014 (US$m)

62

168

42

8

80

Government

Business

Employees/contractors

SED

Capital providers

64

819

185

2

0

Government

Business

Employees/contractors

SED

Capital providers

FIGURE 6.7: National value distribution – South Africa 2014 (US$m)

FIGURE 6.8: National value distribution – West Africa 2014 (US$m)

2

212

125

3

2

Government

Business

Employees/contractors

SED

Capital providers

66

625

116

3

55

Government

Business

Employees/contractors

SED

Capital providers

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014PiLLAr: SEcuring our FuturE rESPonSibLy

107

PAYMENTS IN TAXES, ROYALTIES, DUTIES AND LEVIES

Gold Fields recognises that the payment of  taxes, royalties, 
dividends and other sums to host governments is vital if  national 
mineral wealth is to be converted into broad-based, sustainable 
development. In 2014, the Company’s payments in this regard 
amounted to US$194 million (2013: US$380 million).

Gold Fields is currently recognised as one of  the largest 
taxpayers in Ghana – a status it has now held for the last four 
years. This is despite the lower gold price – as well as lower 
production levels at Damang and Tarkwa. In part, this reflects 
the fact that Ghana’s current tax stability agreements have 
protected other gold mining companies in the country from the 
impact of  its evolving fiscal regime. In addition, Gold Fields paid 
the Ghanaian government US$10 million in dividends in lieu of 
its 10% shareholding in the Ghanaian operations.

Compared to global norms, all of  Gold Fields’ countries 
of  operation enjoy relatively strong democratic governance 
standards and are considered to pose low to moderate 
corruption risks by third parties. Furthermore, Ghana and 
Peru adhere to the Extractive Industries Transparency Initiative 
(EITI). Collectively, this helps ensure that Gold Fields’ payments 
to government actively contribute to broader socio-economic 
development in its host societies. 

PAYMENTS TO BUSINESS

In 2014, Gold Fields spent a total of  US$1,835 million on 
suppliers and contractors – representing 69% of  its total value 
creation (2013: US$1,817 million; 61%). 

Where possible, Gold Fields uses suppliers based in its 
host countries. This not only helps build and sustain local 
supply pools – but also enhances the Company’s socio-
economic impact and strengthens its social licence to operate. 
Where local suppliers lack capacity to meet the Company’s 
needs, Gold Fields will actively work with them to improve 
their business processes, management approaches and 
production standards. 

Of  total 2014 procurement expenditure, US$1.41 billion or 
76% was spent on businesses based in countries where 
Gold Fields has operations (2013: US$1,44 billion/79%). 
Within this figure, US$600 million or 24% of  total procurement 
expenditure was spent on suppliers and contractors from mine 
host communities (2013: US$430 million/12%). This reflects the 
integration of  the Yilgarn South Assets – and the overwhelming 

FiGure 6.9:	Local	and	host	community	procurement	by	country

region

Peru
Australia2
South Africa3
Ghana

reliance of  Gold Fields’ Australian mines on suppliers and 
contractors based in Western Australia.2 A regional breakdown 
of  local procurement spending is set out in Figure 6.9.

PAYMENTS TO EMPLOYEES AND CONTRACTORS

In 2014, Gold Fields paid US$468 million to employees in terms 
of  salaries, dividends and other benefits (2013: US$595 million). 
This reflects the full integration of  the workforces at the Yilgarn 
South Assets. Gold Fields continues to provide employees 
(where relevant) with additional benefits in terms of  retirement 
savings, healthcare assistance, life and disability insurance, 
housing assistance and personal accident cover (p98 – 100).

PAYMENTS TO PROVIDERS OF CAPITAL

In 2014, Gold Fields paid US$137 million to providers of  equity 
and debt capital, mainly in the form of  dividends and interest 
on debt (2013: US$172 million). In addition the Group paid 
down net debt by US$282 million during the year. Despite the 
low gold price, Gold Fields remains committed to paying out 
25% – 35% of  its normalised earnings as dividends – meaning it 
pays amongst the highest dividends in the gold mining industry 
(expressed as a % of  earnings). 

During 2014 Gold Fields’ net debt was reduced by 
US$282 million to US$1.45 billion (2013: US$1.74 billion). 
The maturity date of  US$715 million of  this debt was extended, 
on the same terms as before, from November 2015 to 
November 2017.  

SOCIO-ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT SPEND

Gold Fields recognises that not all of  the value it creates at 
a national level benefits its host communities. To address this 
deficit – and to maintain its social licence to operate – Gold 
Fields implements a range of  Socio-Economic Development 
(SED) initiatives, in addition to community procurement and 
employment, in its host communities. These focus on the key 
priorities in these communities. In 2014, Gold Fields spent 
US$16 million on SED programmes (2013: US$16 million).1

The Company is also implementing innovative Shared Value 
projects (p114 – 115) in local communities. These are truly 
sustainable projects that support Gold Fields’ own business 
objectives – whilst also generating positive socio-economic 
impacts for local people, whether in the form of  skills transfers, 
enterprise development, environmental rehabilitation or 
employment creation. 

local procurement as a 

% of regional budget

host community2 procurement 
as a % of regional budget

2013

91%
99%
100%
68%

2014

88%
99%
100%
72%

2013 

6%
72%
12%
6%

2014

5%
69%
9%
6%

1 The SED definition is aligned to the World Gold Council definition, which excludes employee-based SED

2 Host communities are those communities living in settlement in an operation’s direct area of  influence. For Gold Fields’ Australian operations, Western Australia is classified as a 

‘host community’ due to the extremely remote nature of  this region 

3 This figure also includes procurement spent on local subsidiaries of  foreign companies

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014 
 
 
 
 
 
108

PiLLAr: SEcuring our FuturE rESPonSibLy

6.3 Community relations

6.3.1 Social licence to operate

Many mining companies face increasing pressures over their 

social licence to operate – i.e. the acceptance or approval of 

their activities by local stakeholders. Whilst formal permission to 

operate is ultimately granted by host governments, the practical 

reality is that many operations also need the ‘social permission’ 

of  host communities and other influential stakeholders to carry 

out their operations effectively and profitably. 

As such, Gold Fields believes it is important to minimise the 

negative impacts of  its operations on local stakeholders, 

The finalisation of  a summary version of  the Community 
Relations Handbook, that will be accessible to all employees, 
was completed in early 2015.  

It is a Gold Fields requirement that all regions establish 
grievance mechanisms through which communities can voice 
their concerns and complaints with the Company, including on 
environmental issues.

Our community policy and our community relations and 
stakeholder engagement guidelines can be found at  
https://www.goldfields.com/sus_guide.php

while also maximising the positive benefits. In current market 

THE AMERICAS 

conditions – which have the potential to curtail the ability 

of  Gold Fields to deliver local benefits – active stakeholder 

engagements, in combination with the Company’s Shared Value 

development approach (see p114 – 115) is particularly important 

as it shifts the focus from spending to the actual social and 

business impacts.

Despite ongoing friction between local communities and other 
mining operators in the Cajamarca region – as well as tense 
district, provincial and regional elections – Gold Fields’ Cerro 
Corona mine so far remains largely unaffected. This was 
largely due to the strength of  the mine’s relations with the local 
community, which is supported by: 

In this context, Gold Fields actively identifies and engages with 

the representatives of  the following groups on a regular basis – 

both formally and informally: 

•  Central and local government 
•  Informal community groups
•  NGOs
•  Organised labour
•  Local businesses

Such engagement is guided by, for example:

•  Applicable legislation 
•  South Deep’s mandated Social and Labour Plan (SLP)
•  Gold Fields’ Community Policy and Guideline (including the 
Community Relations Handbook). These are aligned with 

a range of  good international industry practice standards, 

including: 
–  The ICMMs 10 Principles and Community Development 
Toolkit – and Position Statement on Indigenous Peoples
–  The International Finance Corporation (IFC) Performance 

Standards 

–  The Equator Principles
–  The UN Global Compact’s 10 Principles
–  The AA1000 Stakeholder Engagement Standard
–  The ISO 26000 Social Responsibility Standard

In the case of  significant operational changes, relevant public 

consultation processes are also defined within our Environmental 

and Social Impact Assessments (ESIAs).

•  Ongoing implementation of  a well-established engagement 
framework that helps identify and address host community 
priorities – including the availability of  potable water and 
employment generation 

•  Gold Fields’ participation in the ‘Mesa de Dialogo y 

Concertacion de Hualgayoc’ (a community-based, multi-
stakeholder roundtable focussed on regional development 
projects) 

•  Joint water monitoring with the host community, to provide 
assurance around the mine’s water impacts – a key focus 
point for communities in conflict with other mining operators 
in the area 

•  Financial and managerial support for the organisations 

responsible for the management of  the Tingo and 
Maygasbamba rivers to improve irrigation infrastructure

•  Visible benefits to the host community through the employment 

of  community residents and targeted SED projects

Gold Fields recognises that the maintenance of  its social licence 
to operate in this otherwise challenging region will require 
sustained and ongoing efforts to pre-empt and address potential 
community concerns – quickly and effectively.

AUSTRALIA 

The remote location of  Gold Fields’ mines in Australia – as 
well as strong local socio-economic conditions – mean that 
community engagement is largely focussed on local indigenous 
groups. This includes engagement around native land titles on 
Gold Fields’ licence areas, land access for near-mine drilling and 
the preservation of  indigenous heritage. 

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014PiLLAr: SEcuring our FuturE rESPonSibLy

109

Under Gold Fields’ Community Policy, the Company is committed 

to working to obtain the consent of  indigenous peoples for new 

projects (and changes to existing projects) – where they are 

located on lands traditionally owned by or under customary use 

of  indigenous peoples – and that are likely to have significant 

adverse impacts on indigenous peoples. 

Wongatha royalty claim

In Q1 2014, the Wongatha People raised an issue with Gold 

Fields in relation to a historical claim of  native title over land 

including the Granny Smith mine. In 2002, in recognition of  this 

claim, the then-owner, Barrick Gold, agreed to pay the Wongatha 

people a royalty of  1% of  gross profits for the life of  the Wallaby 

mine, part of  the Granny Smith mine. The Wongatha Native 

Title claim was subsequently dismissed by the Federal Court 

of  Australia in 2007 – although Barrick Gold continued to pay 

the royalty up until the sale of  the mine to Gold Fields. Gold 

Fields ceased royalty payments on taking ownership of  the 

Granny Smith assets in 2013, on the basis that the obligation 

to continue payments no longer existed as the Native Title was 

not recognised by the Court. The Wongatha People have since 
requested that Gold Fields reinstate the royalty payments. Gold 

Fields remains confident in its decision, which has been fully 

communicated to the Wongatha People. The matter has not been 

progressed any further by the Wongatha People.

Ngadju Native Title claim

In Q3 2014, a single judge of  the Federal Court of  Australia 

upheld a claim made by the Ngadju People for recognition 

of  their Native Title rights over a large parcel of  land in the 

Goldfields region of  Western Australia, including a number 

of  tenements held by St Ives. During the course of  the 

proceedings, the Court found that certain of  St Ives’ mining 

tenements, which were re-granted by the State in 2004, are 

invalid to the extent that the exercise by St Ives of  its rights under 

those tenements is inconsistent with the Ngadju People’s Native 

Title rights (such as the rights to conduct ceremonies, or hunt). 

The Court’s decision does not affect the underlying grant of 

mining tenure to St Ives under Western Australia’s Mining Act 

1978, and as the proceedings were not an action against St Ives 

for failure to take certain steps, the Court had no jurisdiction to 

apply any penalty against St Ives. In Q4 2014, both St Ives and 

BHP Billiton Nickel West appealed various aspects of  the Federal 

Court decision. The appeal will be heard by the full bench of  the 

Federal Court (three judges) – with a hearing set for May 2015. 

If  necessary, Gold Fields may seek leave to appeal any adverse 

decision by the full Federal Court to the High Court of  Australia. 

Gold Fields is continuing to liaise with the State regarding both 

the Appeal and the broader implications of  the decision. It is 

anticipated that operations at St Ives will continue as usual 

pending the outcome of  the appeal process. 

For further information on indigenous peoples’ rights at the Far 

Southeast project in the Philippines, see p88. 

Oil palm harvest at the rehabilitated South Tailings dam site near the 
Tarkwa mine in Ghana

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014110

PiLLAr: SEcuring our FuturE rESPonSibLy

6.3  Community relations (continued)

SOUTH AFRICA

Under the 2002 Mineral and Petroleum Resources Development 

Act, mining companies must submit an SLP as a prerequisite for 

the granting of  mining or production rights. Each SLP requires 

the Company in question to implement: 

•  Employee development programmes, with an emphasis on 

BEE

•  Local Economic Development (LED) programmes – with a 
focus on host communities and labour-sending areas 

As such, the LED element of  the SLP provides the basic 

framework for Gold Fields’ engagement with host community 

stakeholders in South Africa. In this context, Gold Fields 

restructured South Deep’s three community trusts to: 

This included a pilot study carried out by the Federation for a 

Sustainable Environment (FSE), KPMG and the South Deep 

Community Relations team. The study employed UK-based 
Relational Analytics’ ‘Relational ProximityTM’ tool, which was 
applied via community-level workshops at four of  the mine’s 

16 host communities. 

The study, which showed a strong level of  community 

unhappiness with their relationship with South Deep, produced 

the following key recommendations for Gold Fields: 

•  Engage with communities through more informal means, 

including social media 

•  Provide more information about positive community impacts, 
such as the number of  host community members working at 

South Deep, for example

•  Refocus trust activities on the communities in and around 

•  Have senior management acknowledge the role of  – and 

South Deep 

impacts on – local communities 

•  Endow trustees with responsibility for all trusts, to ensure that 

•  Empower South Deep’s Community Relations team to 

they pursue common, coordinated goals 

directly address specific issues – thus enabling more timely 

Gold Fields works closely with Sibanye Gold on the delivery of 

responses to community concerns

its LED projects in the South Deep area, due to the overlapping 

Gold Fields is planning to implement these recommendations 

of  each company’s stakeholders and interests.

in 2015. In addition, the study will be extended to South Deep’s 

Whilst Gold Fields remains committed to fulfilling South Deep’s 

SLP, it is also exploring additional opportunities for insightful 

stakeholder engagement. In 2014, the Company undertook 

a high-profile project to measure the strength, quality and 

challenges of  its stakeholder relationships at South Deep. 

12 remaining host communities – and potentially to other 

Gold Fields regions as well. 

Gold Fields Ghana Foundation constructed ICT centres at the New Atuabo Community School near the Damang mine

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014PiLLAr: SEcuring our FuturE rESPonSibLy

111

WEST AFRICA 

6.3.2 community value distribution

In light of  local socio-economic realities, community relations 

are a major focus for the Damang and Tarkwa mines. However, 

the mines’ lower production in 2014 has resulted in lower levels 

of  funding for the Gold Fields Ghana Foundation (Gold Fields’ 

main SED vehicle in the country, which receives US$1 per 

ounce of  gold sold and 0.5% of  pre-tax profits) – as well as a 

number of  retrenchments, including that of  employees from host 

communities. As a result, Gold Fields has been carrying our 

targeted engagement with key host community stakeholders to 

minimise the impacts of  this restructuring on both the affected 

individuals themselves, and host communities more broadly. 

This is in addition to ongoing engagement that took place 

through the mines’ well-established consultation channels, 

including their: 

•  Broad-based Mine Consultative Committees
•  Formalised, regular engagement with local chiefs
•  Regular Community Committee meetings
•  Direct community forums
•  Continual informal engagement

Key community issues in 2014 included:

•  Compensation of  farmers at Kottraverchy, Tarkwa: Despite 
400 farmers previously accepting crop compensation, in 

2014 a small group of  farmers challenged the value of  that 

compensation. Gold Fields is participating in a mediation 

process with the farmers, overseen by the Environmental 

Protection Agency (EPA) 

•  Retrenchments associated with the closure of  the North Heap 
Leach facility, Tarkwa: Gold Fields engaged with all those 

workers affected – many of  whom originate from or live in the 

host community – offering alternative employment and relevant 

training where possible 

CORE CONTRIBUTIONS

Despite its substantial economic impact on the national level, not 

all of  Gold Fields’ contributions necessarily ‘trickle down’ to host 

communities. In order to maintain its social licence to operate, 

Gold Fields is committed to more direct initiatives focussed on 

the delivery of  benefits to host communities. These include: 

•  Direct employment
•  Indirect employment
•  Skills development
•  Educational investment
•  Health investment
•  Infrastructure support

Such initiatives are supplemented by Gold Fields’ Shared Value 
projects, which are described on p114 – 115. 

Direct employment

Gold Fields is committed to the employment of  members of 

host communities at all its operations – where this is feasible. By 

doing so, it is able to align the interests of  host communities to 

those of  its mines, maximise local value generation and build up 

its local skills pools. Nevertheless, Gold Fields’ ability to recruit 

such workers can be constrained by the limited availability of 

skills at the host community-level in the first place – underlining 

the need for Gold Fields to also support local education and 

skills development (p112 – 113). 

The number of  host community members – including both 

employees and contractors  – working at each of  Gold Fields’ 

regions is set out below:

•  The Americas: 414 (2013: 533), with the high percentage of 
local community members reflecting early and successful 

•  Compensation of  disturbed areas at the Rex pit, Damang: 

efforts to integrate members of  the host community from the 

Gold Fields paid US$623,000 to claimants for the loss of  their 

mine’s very inception

land 

•  Land compensation relating to the construction of  the Far 

East Tailings Storage Facility (FETSF), Damang: Gold Fields 

•  Australia: 2030  (2013: 1218) 
•  South Africa: 2,469 (2013: 1,965) – many of  whom have been 
recruited from the mine’s community-focussed Adult Basic 

paid US$300,000 to claimants, resolving a dispute over land 

Education and Training (ABET) courses

between Suromani and Kyekyewere – and allowing work on 

the FETSF to begin 

•  West Africa: 3,909 (2013: 3,837) – despite the retrenchments 
in early 2014, the Group’s Ghanaian mines have sought to 

•  Relocation of  Ainoo residents, Damang: After raising concerns 
about the health and safety implications of  their proximity to 

limit the number of  community members retrenched and have 

committed to employing them, where feasible, to limit the 

the Lima South Pit, six residents were successfully rehoused, 

economic impact on these communities. 

with the process concluded in August 2014

Growth projects

For further information on community engagement around Gold 

Fields growth projects, please see p82 – 83. 

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014112

PiLLAr: SEcuring our FuturE rESPonSibLy

6.3  Community relations (continued)

Local communities near South Deep have benefited from skills development and job creation centres

Indirect employment 

Where possible, Gold Fields seeks to procure goods and 

services from its host communities. This serves to:

•  Agricultural improvement programme, Cerro Corona: 

This ongoing programme saw Cerro Corona plant 320ha of 

improved dairy pasture (benefiting 350 local families) – and 

provide a heifer each to 185 families in the local communities

•  Enhance the local supply base, which is vitally important given 

•  Westonaria Bakery, South Deep: This included support – 

the remote nature of  some mines 

•  Generate employment opportunities for local people 

under South Deep’s SLP – for the establishment of  a bakery 

franchise in the Westonaria community, which provides bread 

In 2014, Gold Fields spent a total of  US$600 million (2013: 

US$430 million) on goods and services from suppliers in its host 

communities. The impact of  these contributions is most marked 

at Cerro Corona, where Gold Fields has proactively developed 

Hualgayoc-based suppliers to provide the mine with secondary 

equipment and light transport. In South Africa, the South Deep 

Business Development Centre works to identify community-

based suppliers (including for cleaning, mud loading, track 

loading and track maintenance). The centre also trains local 

entrepreneurs in bookkeeping, business planning and other 

disciplines – enabling them to access contractor opportunities 

at South Deep.

In addition, Gold Fields works with communities and government 

to develop broader, more diversified local economies – primarily 

by helping local people start and consolidate their own 

businesses. Examples of  community enterprise initiatives carried 

out in 2014 include:

•  Local supplier competiveness programme, Cerro Corona: 
This aims to enhance the competiveness of  local suppliers 
and promote economic opportunities for host community 

members – whilst also delivering better quality and prices 

to the mine itself. In 2014, 51 existing suppliers participated 

in the programme and each is applying a well-defined 

improvement plan

both to the mine and host community members

•  Sustainable Community Empowerment and Economic 

Development (SEED) programme, Tarkwa: The ongoing SEED 

programme promotes palm oil farming in the mine’s host 

communities – including through the provision of  seedlings, 

as well as marketing and technical support. In 2014, the 

programme benefited around 600 local people. The mine is 

looking at donating the palm oil plantations to communities 

during 2015

Skills development

Gold Fields recognises that skills development is critical for 

integrating members of  its host communities into its workforce – 

or those of  its suppliers. In 2014, specific skills development 

initiatives included: 

•  The Americas: This includes the training – in conjunction 

with Hualgayoc municipal office and contractor San Martin 

– of  community members as truck and excavation drivers. 

The programme acts as a ‘feeder’ programme for recruitment 

at both Cerro Corona and other local mines 

•  South Africa: Gold Fields supports the development of  small- 
and medium-sized local businesses by helping community 

members attend courses in business law, ethics and 

entrepreneurship at Monash University. In addition, eight-week 

accredited vocational training courses are made available 

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014PiLLAr: SEcuring our FuturE rESPonSibLy

113

to employees, contractors and host community members. 

•  The Americas: Investment in a Children’s Nutrition Programme 

Graduates who subsequently set up a business are then able 

for Hualgayoc, which provides education in nutrition and 

to make use of  the South Deep Business Development Centre
•  West Africa: Both Damang and Tarkwa provide apprenticeship 
programmes for local people – who are trained to operate 

health. In addition, Gold Fields funded the construction of  a 

new hospital in Hualgayoc Health Centre. The management 

of  the centre will be the responsibility of  the Regional Health 

mining vehicles. This is supplemented by an external 

Board, who will also employ doctors, nurses and provide 

apprenticeship programme aimed at training local youths in 

medicine.

locally marketable, non-mining skills such as car mechanics 

and hairdressing

Education investment 

•  West Africa: Ongoing support for Tarkwa Mine Hospital, which 
is state-owned but managed and partially funded by Gold 

Fields. In 2014, this included extra provision to help address 

a potential Ebola outbreak. During 2014 the majority (80%) 

Gold Fields recognises that education is critical for the social 

of  the patients at the hospital were mine employees or their 

and economic development of  its host communities, the 

dependants and 20% members of  the local community. 

improvement of  its operating environments and the long-term 

Damang also handed over a modern clinic and nurses’ 

integration of  host community members into its workforce. In 

quarters to the Bompieso community, to be operated by 

2014, relevant educational initiatives included: 

the Ghana Health Service. Other initiatives include the 

•  The Americas: The provision of  40 university scholarships 

for the top-performing students in the Hualgayoc district. In 

addition, Gold Fields built a new rural school in the Anexo 

Chilon community as part of  its commitment under the 
Hualgayoc Round Table Dialogue

•  Australia: Financial support for the Laverton Leonora Cross 

Cultural Association which provides education to the Laverton 

community near the Granny Smith mine – as well as the 

Kambalda Primary School and Kambalda West District 

High School (both of  which service the local indigenous 

community) near St Ives. In addition, Gold Fields provided 

scholarships for eight indigenous students in 2014 to achieve 

tertiary educations

sponsorship of  a weekly local radio programme (focussed 

on community health and preventative medicine) – as well as 

the training of  Community Health Facilitators and Community 

Health and Sanitation Committees

Infrastructure support

Some of  Gold Fields’ areas of  operation suffer from a severe 

lack of  infrastructure. This not only impacts the development of 

host communities but can also – in certain cases – impact Gold 

Fields’ own operations. As such, infrastructure development 

represents a key area of  focus. In 2014, Gold Fields spent a 

total of  US$5 million on host community infrastructure initiatives, 

including: 

•  South Africa: Financial support for the South Deep Education 
Trust – which has a mandate to improve education at both 

community and national level. In addition, Gold Fields works 

•  The Americas: Gold Fields funded the construction of  the 
Bambamarca Central Market, a US$9.4 million investment1 
project that will benefit 110,000 residents. It is one of  the most 

with secondary and tertiary education providers by extending 

modern public markets in Peru’s northern region, equipped 

a range of  university bursaries and directly funding the Mining 

with cold rooms, laboratories for food testing, electronic scales 

School of  the University of  the Witwatersrand

and a drinking water system

•  West Africa: A total of  173 scholarships bursaries to support 
attendance in the 2014/2015 academic year at local schools 

•  South Africa: Construction (under its SLP) of  150 new homes 
in Westonaria and 13 homes in Poortjie, both adjacent to 

and tertiary institutions – both directly and through the Gold 

the South Deep mine. Constructed at a combined cost of 

Fields Ghana Foundation. In addition, Tarkwa and Damang 

R29 million (US$3 million) the homes were handed over to 

helped enhance the salaries of  87 local teachers to help 

the local municipality to be allocated to needy community 

attract high-quality teaching talent into community schools. 

members. This is in addition to the development of  community 

In addition, 2014 saw the construction of  a junior high school 

clinics at Thusanang and in the Eastern Cape labour-sending 

for the Wangarakrom community, as well as a 30-seater ICT 

area. Gold Fields also supported the development and/or 

centre for the Huni Valley Methodist School

restoration of  educational buildings including Simunye High 

Health investment 

Many of  Gold Fields workers are drawn from host communities, 

School, Bekkersdal, and Healdtown in the Eastern Cape
•  West Africa: Work on the all-weather road between Samahu 
and Pepesa near Tarkwa, which will cost US$2.3 million on 

resulting in a high degree of  interaction between the workforce 

completion – is ongoing. This project – which is being carried 

and the local community. The promotion of  community health 

out in partnership with the Ministry of  Roads and Highways 

is therefore not only important from the perspective of  local 

and the Tarkwa-Nsuaem District Council – will deliver 

socio-economic development – but also employee wellbeing 

significant benefits to around 5,000 community members 

and operational continuity. In 2014, relevant health initiatives 

along its route, in terms of  their access to markets, public 

included: 

services and other communities

1  With US$6.9 million to be recovered in tax credits over the next four years

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014114

PiLLAr: SEcuring our FuturE rESPonSibLy

6.3  Community relations (continued)

6.3.3   Shared Value – Creating economic and 

community value

WHAT IS SHARED VALUE?

SHARED VALUE AT GOLD FIELDS

Shared Value is created when companies take a proactive 

The relatively low gold price and the restructuring of  Gold 

role in simultaneously addressing business and social needs. 

Fields’ key operations has made maintaining historical levels of  

Shared Value goes way beyond mitigating the potential harm in a 

SED spending a challenge. Furthermore, it is not clear whether 

Company’s value chain – it is about identifying new opportunities 

SED spending is the most effective way to support long-term, 

for economic success by incorporating social priorities into 

sustainable community development. 

business strategy and working collaboratively with multiple 

stakeholders to find solutions to various socio-economic and 

environmental issues. A key component of  this approach is to 

ensure that the value created is shared by the business and 

the community. Strong local businesses and skilled individuals 

contribute to the overall economic upliftment and sustainability of  

communities, while delivering the goods and services that Gold 

Fields needs to develop and operate its mines.

In this context Gold Fields introduced Shared Value to the 

business in 2012 – making it one of  the earliest adopters of  this 

approach. Taking a leadership role is integral to how Gold Fields 

implements Shared Value – the Company facilitates collaboration 

between multiple stakeholders to solve environmental issues 

such as water security, which have been identified as a 

community priority.

Our Shared Value approach is based on four key pillars:

1

2

Strategic interventions 
to proactively address 

socio-economic 

challenges that can 

drive community 

The ‘integration’ of  
business activities and 

the management of  

community relations 

– to  maximise 

tensions, NGO activism 

contributions to host 

or more restrictive 

regulation

communities and 

realise business 

efficiencies

3

Participation in 
collaborative action 
with other stakeholders 

to address shared 

social challenges

4

Transparency 
regarding Gold Fields’ 

economic contributions 

to its host societies, 

in line with the 

World Gold Council 

(WGC) guidelines on 

‘Responsible Gold 

Mining and Value 

Distribution’

IN 2015, GOLD FIELDS PLANS TO:

•  Identify and implement two new Shared Value projects at South Deep and in the West Africa region
•  Develop and apply a rigorous methodology to assess the impact of  each Shared Value project

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014PiLLAr: SEcuring our FuturE rESPonSibLy

115

DAMANG MINE (GHANA)

CERRO CORONA MINE (PERU) –  
Water and the environment

PROJECT

Under a two-year renewable agreement, 
Damang Quarry – an independent business 
– processes waste rock from the Damang 
mine into smaller aggregate for use in the 
construction industry.

BENEFIT  
TO THE 
COMMU- 
NITY

Crushed waste rock is used for road and 
building construction, which is expected 
to reduce the cost of  local construction 
by between 30% – 40%, while generating 
ancillary business opportunities within the 
local community. Of  the 50 people employed 
by Damang Quarry, 35 are from the local 
community.

BENEFIT  
TO GOLD 
FIELDS

Gold Fields receives 5% of  the crushed material 
for free, which will save the mine between 
US$25 000 to US$30 000 a month currently 
spent on aggregates. The Damang mine will 
also lessen its future land requirement for waste 
rock dumping, thereby reducing potential 
purchase and/or compensation costs and other 
related issues. In addition, the mine closure 
liability will also be reduced. 

SOUTH DEEP (SOUTH AFRICA) –  
Maths and science

PROJECT

Edumap College partnered with South Deep to 
help post-matric students who had not achieved 
university exemption or had not been able to 
qualify for entrance into tertiary institutions, 
to improve their grades in Mathematics and 
Science. They received extra tuition and life skills 
training, and re-wrote matric at the end of  2014. 

BENEFIT  
TO THE 
COMMU- 
NITY

Apart from the obvious benefit derived by the 
individual students, the broader community 
benefits from the fact that a greater proportion of  
their youth is likely to receive tertiary education 
and ultimately find employment. This is 
significant, given the fact that a single employed 
individual in the mining industry supports on 
average eight dependants.  

BENEFIT  
TO GOLD 
FIELDS

The programme provides Gold Fields with a 
much-needed local skills pipeline of  individuals 
with maths and science-related degrees. 

PROJECT

Improving water quality and access in 
Hualgayoc City through the construction of  a 
water pipeline from a well at Cerro Corona, a 
programme to identify and repair water leaks in 
the existing water infrastructure, and remediation 
of  legacy mining activities (not associated with 
Gold Fields) that are contaminating a local 
stream. 

BENEFIT  
TO THE 
COMMU- 
NITY

Close to 90% of  the city’s households now have 
access to sufficient clean, safe running water. 
Those families whose homes are situated at an 
altitude too high to be connected to the water 
pipeline receive water tanks from Gold Fields, 
and will receive water supply from the Company’s 
reverse osmosis plant from 2015. Apart from 
strengthening relationships between Gold Fields, 
the regulator and our host communities, the 
remediation of  legacy mining sites near Cerro 
Corona will significantly improve the quality of  the 
water in the El Tingo river, on which communities 
depend for various uses. 

BENEFIT  
TO GOLD 
FIELDS

Strengthens our social licence to operate in a 
region in which other mining companies have 
experienced water-related conflict with local 
communities. The research being conducted to 
remediate the non-Gold Fields legacy mining  
sites will be used to reduce Gold Fields’ own 
future mine closure costs. 

CERRO CORONA MINE (PERU) –  
Local suppliers

PROJECT

A project to build the competitiveness of  local 
suppliers has identified 83 local businesses, 
each of  which will benefit from an individual 
improvement plan. 

Individual local suppliers will derive long-
term benefit from targeted plans to help them 
improve their competitiveness, while the broader 
community will experience economic upliftment 
and employment opportunities from having 
stronger, sustainable local businesses. 

Gold Fields will be able to obtain a better service 
at more competitive prices from local suppliers.  

BENEFIT  
TO THE 
COMMU- 
NITY

BENEFIT  
TO GOLD 
FIELDS

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014Processing plant at the Tarkwa mine in Ghana

7.1

7.2

First party Internal Audit statement

Independent assurance report to the 

directors of Gold Fields Limited

7.3

Assured data

118

119

123

7118

ASSurAncE

7.1 First party: Internal Audit statement

Gold Fields Internal Audit (GFIA) is an independent assurance 

Based on the work performed by GFIA during the year, the 

provider to the Gold Fields Audit Committee on the effectiveness 

Vice-President and Group Head of  Internal Audit has presented 

of  the risk management, control and governance processes 

the Audit Committee with an assessment on the effectiveness of 

within Gold Fields. The risk-based annual audit plan covers 

the Company’s system of  internal control and risk management, 

the breadth and depth of  the Gold Fields value chain, which is 

internal financial controls as well as the IT control framework. 

approved by the Audit Committee annually.

It is GFIA’s opinion that the internal control environment and 

The internal audit activities are conducted in terms of  the 

annually approved mandate provided by the audit committee 

and is executed by either a team of  appropriate, qualified and 

experienced internal auditors, or through the engagement 

of  external practitioners on specified and agreed terms. The 

Internal Audit team is based in South Africa and services all 

the Gold Fields operations globally. The Vice-President and 

Group Head of  Internal Audit provides quarterly-feedback to the 

Audit Committee and has a functional reporting line to the Audit 

Committee Chair.

risk management processes are adequate within the Gold Field 

business and provide reasonable assurance that the objectives 

of  Gold Fields will be met. This GFIA assessment, forms one 

of  the bases for the Audit Committee’s recommendation in this 

regard to the Board.

GFIA follows a risk-based audit methodology, which is 

in compliance with the Institute of  Internal Auditors’ (IIA) 

Shyam Jagwanth
Vice-President and Group Head of  Internal Audit

“International Standards for the Professional Practice of  Internal 

Auditing”. Furthermore GFIA operates a quality assurance 

programme that involves performing detailed quality review 

assessments at an activity and functional level.

Johannesburg
South Africa

23 March 2015

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014ASSurAncE

119

7.2  Independent Assurance Report to the 
Directors of Gold Fields Limited

report on Selected Sustainability information

We have undertaken an assurance engagement on selected sustainability information, as described below and presented in the 

Integrated Annual Report of  Gold Fields Limited (Gold Fields) for the year ended 31 December 2014 (the Report). This engagement 

was conducted by a multi-disciplinary team of  health, safety, social, environmental and assurance specialists with extensive 

experience in sustainability reporting.

SUBJECT MATTER AND RELATED ASSURANCE 

We are required to provide reasonable assurance on the subject matters set out in the tables below. 

Subject matter a: 

Selected performance data presented in compliance with Subject matter 4 of the 

international council of mining and metals’ (icmm) Sustainable Development Framework: 

Assurance procedure (icmm Assurance procedure), and prepared in accordance with the 

Global reporting initiative (Gri) G4 Guidelines: (pages 123 – 124)

unit

environment

Total CO2 Equivalent Emissions, Scope 1 – 3  

Total Energy Consumed (GJ)/ounce of  gold produced

Number of  environmental incidents – Level 3 and above

Electricity  

Diesel 

Total water withdrawal 

Total water recycled/reused per annum 

Water intensity

health

Number of  cases of  Silicosis reported

Number of  cases of  Noise Induced Hearing Loss reported

Number of  new cases of  Cardio Respiratory Tuberculosis reported

Number of  cases of  Malaria tested positive per annum

Number of  South African and West African employees in Highly Active Anti-Retroviral Therapy 

(HAART) programme

Percentage of  South African and West African workforce on the voluntary counselling and 

testing (VCT) programme

Safety

Total Recordable Injury Frequency Rate (TRIFR) 

Number of  Fatalities

Social

Tonnes CO2e

Total GJ of  energy 

consumed per ounce of 

gold produced

Number

MWh

TJ

Mℓ

Mℓ

Kℓ withdrawn per ounce of 
gold produced

Number of  cases

Number of  cases

Number of  new cases

Number of  positive cases

Cumulative

Percentage

Rate

Number

Total socio-economic development (SED) spend in US Dollars  

US Dollars

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014 
 
 
 
120

ASSurAncE

Independent Assurance Report to the Directors of Gold Fields Limited (continued)

Subject matter b: 

Selected mining charter elements prepared in compliance with the broad-based  

Socio-economic empowerment charter for the South African mining and minerals 

industry (bbSeec) (2002) and related Scorecard (2004): (pages 123 – 124)

unit

Number of  houses built as part of  the housing and hostel upgrade programme

Number of  houses built

Rand value spent on LED projects in the SLP in the current reporting year

Rand value

Subject matter c: 

Selected mining charter elements prepared in compliance with the Amendment to the 

bbSeec (2010) and related Scorecard (2010): (pages 123 – 124)

unit

Percentage Historically Disadvantaged South Africans (HDSA) in Management (DL – FU) 

Top management %

who are classified as designated groups and who are employed at management levels 

(Top Management (Board), Senior, Middle, Junior, Core Skills and Total), including and 

excluding Corporate and including and excluding white females

Senior %

Middle %

Junior %

Core %

Total %

Conversion or upgrading of  hostels to attain an occupancy rate of  one person per room by 

Occupancy rate

2014

Percentage conversion of  hostels to family units

Percentage

Human Resource Development (HRD) expenditure as a percentage of  total annual payroll 

Percentage

(excluding mandatory skills levy)

Total procurement spend from BEE entities (BBSEEC, 2010)

Rand value

Percentage procurement spend from BEE entities (in line with the Mining Charter categories of 

% Capital goods

capital goods, services and consumable goods)

Percentage of  samples in South African facilities

% Services

% Consumable goods

Percentage

DIRECTORS’ RESPONSIBILITIES 

The Directors are responsible for the selection, preparation 

and presentation of  the selected sustainability information in 

accordance with the reporting criteria set out in the following 

paragraph. This responsibility includes the identification of 

stakeholders and stakeholders’ requirements, material issues, for 

commitments with respect to sustainability performance and for 

the design, implementation and maintenance of  internal control 

relevant to the preparation of  the report that is free from material 

misstatement, whether due to fraud or error. 

The following reporting criteria were used in the preparation and 

presentation of  the respective subject matter:

•  (a) Gold Fields’ reported performance during the given 
reporting period for the identified material Sustainable 

Development (SD) risks and opportunities (ICMM Subject 

Matter 4): the Global Reporting Initiative (GRI) G4 Guidelines.
•  (b) selected Mining Charter elements: the BBSEEC (2002) and 

related Scorecard (2004).

•  (c) selected Mining Charter elements: the Amendment to the 

BBSEEC (2010) and related Scorecard (2010).

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014ASSurAncE

121

OUR INDEPENDENCE AND qUALITY CONTROL

We have complied with the Code of  Ethics for Professional 

Accountants issued by the International Ethics Standards 

Board for Accountants, which includes independence and 

other requirements founded on fundamental principles of 

integrity, objectivity, professional competence and due care, 

•  Testing the processes and systems to generate, collate, 
aggregate, monitor and report the selected sustainability 

information.

•  Inspecting supporting documentation and performing 

analytical procedures on a sample basis to evaluate the data 

generation and reporting processes against the reporting 

confidentiality and professional behaviour. 

criteria.

In accordance with International Standard on Quality Control 1, 

KPMG Services Proprietary Limited maintains a comprehensive 

•  Undertaking physical site visits to Gold Fields’ South Deep, 
Granny Smith and St Ives operations and remote reviews 

of  the Tarkwa, Agnew/Lawlers, Darlot, Damang and Cerro 

system of  quality control, including documented policies and 

Corona operations. 

procedures regarding compliance with ethical requirements, 

professional standards and applicable legal and regulatory 

requirements.

OUR RESPONSIBILITY

We believe that the evidence we have obtained is sufficient and 

appropriate to provide a basis for our opinions.

OPINIONS

Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the selected 

In relation to the report for the year ended 31 December 2014, 

sustainability information based on the evidence we have 

we report

obtained. We have conducted our engagement in accordance 

with the International Standard on Assurance Engagements 

(ISAE 3000), Assurance Engagements Other than Audits or 
Reviews of  Historical Financial Information, issued by the 

International Auditing and Assurance Standards Board. That 

Standard requires that we plan and perform our engagement 

to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the selected 

a.  On the selected performance data identified

In our opinion, the selected performance data identified in 

(a) above have been prepared, in all material respects, in 

accordance with the Global Reporting Initiative (GRI) G4 

Guidelines. 

sustainability information is free from material misstatement.

b.  On the selected Mining Charter elements prepared in 

accordance with the BBSEEC (2002) and related Scorecard 

A reasonable assurance engagement in accordance with 

ISAE 3000 involves performing procedures to obtain evidence 

(2004)

about the quantification of  the selected sustainability information 

In our opinion, the selected Mining Charter elements 

and related disclosures. The nature, timing and extent of 

identified in (b) above have been prepared, in all material 

procedures selected depend on the practitioner’s judgement, 

respects, in compliance with the BBSEEC (2002) and related 

including the assessment of  the risks of  material misstatement, 

Scorecard (2004).

whether due to fraud or error. In making those risk assessments 

we considered internal control relevant to Gold Fields’ 

preparation of  the selected sustainability information. 

A reasonable assurance engagement also includes: 

•  assessing the suitability in the circumstances of  Gold Fields’ 
use of  the criteria, as the basis for preparing the selected 

sustainability information; 

•  evaluating the appropriateness of  quantification methods 

and reporting policies and internal guidelines used, and the 

reasonableness of  estimates made by Gold Fields; and 

•  evaluating the overall presentation of  the selected 

sustainability information and whether the information 

presented in the report is consistent with our findings, overall 

knowledge and experience of  sustainability management and 

performance at Gold Fields. 

c.  On the selected Mining Charter elements prepared in 

accordance with the Amendment to the BBSEEC (2010) and 

related Scorecard (2010)

In our opinion, the selected Mining Charter elements 

identified in (c) above have been prepared, in all material 

respects, in compliance with the Amendment to the BBSEEC 

(2010) and related Scorecard (2010).

COMPARABILITY

Our report includes the provision of  assurance on the number 

of  West African employees in the HAART programme, 

the percentage of  the West African workforce on the VCT 

programme, percentage conversion of  hostels to family units, 

HRD expenditure as a percentage of  total annual payroll 

(excluding mandatory skills development levy) and Percentage 

Our work included the following evidence-gathering procedures:

of  samples in South African facilities data. We were previously 

•  Interviewing management and senior executives to obtain 
an understanding of  the internal control environment, risk 

assessment process and information systems relevant to the 

sustainability reporting process. Inspecting documentation 

to corroborate the statements of  management and senior 

executives in our interviews.

not required to provide assurance on this selected performance 

data. In addition, the prior year HDSA in management data was 

provided for Gold Fields South Africa, but this year the data has 

been split to show a breakdown for Corporate and South Deep, 

including and excluding white females.

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014122

ASSurAncE

report on the icmm Assurance procedure

We are required to report our findings on the International 

Council of  Mining and Metals’ (ICMM) Sustainable Development 

2.   Gold Fields has not reported material sustainable 

development risks and opportunities based on a review of  its 

business and the views and expectations of  its stakeholders. 

(SD) Framework: Assurance Procedure (ICMM Assurance 

3.   Gold Fields has not implemented systems and approaches 

Procedure) in respect of:

to manage its material safety risks and opportunities.

1 

 The alignment of  Gold Fields’ sustainability policies to the 

other matters

ICMM 10 SD Principles and any mandatory requirements 

set out in ICMM Position Statements (ICMM Subject Matter 1).

2.   The reporting of  Gold Fields’ material sustainable 

development risks and opportunities based on a review of  its 

business and the views and expectations of  its stakeholders 

(ICMM Subject Matter 2). 

The maintenance and integrity of  the Gold Fields website is the 

responsibility of  Gold Fields management. Our procedures did 

not involve consideration of  these matters and, accordingly we 

accept no responsibility for any changes to either the information 

in the report or our independent assurance report that may have 

occurred since the initial date of  presentation on the Gold Fields 

website.

3.   The implementation of  systems and approaches that 

Gold Fields is using to manage its material safety risks and 

restriction of liability

opportunities (ICMM Subject Matter 3).

DIRECTORS’ RESPONSIBILITIES

The Directors are responsible for:

•  The alignment of  Gold Fields’ sustainability policies to the 

ICMM 10 SD Principles and any mandatory requirements set 

out in ICMM Position Statements. 

•  The reporting of  Gold Fields’ material sustainable 

development risks and opportunities based on a review of  its 

business and the views and expectations of  its stakeholders. 

•  The implementation of  systems and approaches that 

Gold Fields is using to manage its material safety risks and 

opportunities.

OUR RESPONSIBILITY

Our engagement included reporting on the ICMM Assurance 

Procedure in respect of  1, 2 and 3 above based on the 

knowledge obtained in our evidence gathering procedures in our 

assurance engagement on the subject matters in (a) set out in 

our ‘Report on Selected Sustainability Information’ above. 

FINDINGS

Based on our evidence gathering procedures in our assurance 

engagement for the year ended 31 December 2014 on 

the subject matter in (a) set out in our ‘Report on Selected 

Sustainability Information’ above, nothing has come to our 

attention that causes us to believe that:

1.   Gold Fields’ sustainability policies are not aligned with 

the ICMM 10 SD Principles and any mandatory requirements 

set out in ICMM Position Statements.

Our work has been undertaken to enable us to express the 

opinions on the subject matters in (a), (b) and (c) in our ‘Report 

on Selected Sustainability Information’ together with findings on 

1, 2 and 3 in our ‘Report on the ICMM Assurance Procedure’ to 

the Directors of  Gold Fields in accordance with the terms of  our 

engagement, and for no other purpose. We do not accept or 

assume liability to any party other than Gold Fields, for our work, 

for this report, or for the conclusions we have reached.

kpmG Services proprietary limited

per pD naidoo
Director
Johannesburg

per c basson
Director
Johannesburg

23 March 2015 

23 March 2015

KPMG Crescent
85 Empire Road
Parktown
Johannesburg
2193

KPMG Crescent
85 Empire Road
Parktown
Johannesburg
2193

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014ASSurAncE

123

7.3  Assured data

The following key sustainability performance information was selected by Gold Fields, for assurance 
by KPMG in 2014: 

parameter 

level of Assurance  management figure 

environment

Total CO2 Equivalent Emissions, Scope 
1 – 3  (in tonnes)

Reasonable 

1 694 043 tonnes

Electricity (MWh) 

Reasonable 

1 338 074 MWh

Number of  environmental incidents – 

Reasonable 

4 incidents

Level 3 and above 

Total Water Withdrawal (Mℓ) 

Diesel (TJ) 

Total Water recycled/re-used per annum 
(Mℓ) 

Water Intensity (Kℓ withdrawn per ounce 
of  gold produced) 

Reasonable 

30 207 Mℓ

Reasonable 

Reasonable

6 066 TJ

42 409 Mℓ

Reasonable

30 206 760 Kℓ/2 294 645 ounces = 13.16

Total Energy Consumed (GJ)/Ounce of 

Reasonable

10 465 746 GJ/2 294 645 ounces = 4.56

gold produced

heAlth

Number of  cases of  Silicosis reported 

Reasonable 

Number of  cases of  Noise Induced 

Reasonable 

15 cases

13 cases

Hearing Loss reported 

Cardio Respiratory Tuberculosis 

Reasonable

49 new cases

(Number of  new cases reported) 

Number of  cases of  Malaria tested 

Reasonable

690 positive cases

positive per annum 

Number of  South African and West 

Reasonable

282

African employees in the HAART 

programme (cumulative)

Percentage of  South African and West 

Reasonable

4 091 people on VCT / 11 398 people = 35.9%

African workforce on the voluntary 

counselling and testing (VCT) 

programme

SAFety

TRIFR¹ 

Number of  Fatalities 

SociAl

Reasonable 

Reasonable 

200 TRIs/ 49 456 833 man hours = 4.04

3

Total socio-economic development (SED) 

Reasonable 

US$16,387,920

spend in US Dollars²

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014124

ASSurAncE

7.3  Third party: Independent assurance (continued)

parameter 

level of Assurance  management figure 

mininG chArter

employment equity

Percentage HDSA in Management   

Reasonable 

excluding corporate and 

excluding corporate and 

(DL – FU) who are classified as 

designated groups and who are 

employed at management levels (Top 

Management (Board), Senior, Middle, 

Junior, Core Skills and Total)

including white Females

excluding white Females

Top: 50%
Senior: 56%4
Middle: 63%

Junior: 52%

Core: 72%

Total: 71%

Top: 50%

Senior: 44%

Middle: 55%

Junior: 49%

Core: 70%

Total: 70%

including corporate and 

including corporate and 

including white Females

excluding white Females

Top: 33%

Senior: 47%

Middle: 67%
Junior: 58%

Core: 72%

Total: 71%

Top: 22%

Senior: 30%

Middle: 49%
Junior: 53%

Core: 70%

Total: 69%

housing and living conditions

Conversion or upgrading of  hostels to 

Reasonable 

1 person per room

attain an occupancy rate of  1 person per 

room by 2014

Number of  houses built as part of  the 

Reasonable 

0 houses3

housing and hostel upgrade programme

% conversion of  hostels into family units

Reasonable

100%

Skills and Development

HRD Expenditure as a percentage of 

Reasonable

10%

total annual payroll (excluding mandatory 

skills development levy)

local economic Development

Rand value spent on LED projects in 

Reasonable 

R20,106,077

the SLP in the current reporting year

procurement and enterprise 

Development

Procurement spend from BEE entities 

Reasonable

Capital goods: 82%

(in line with the mining charter categories 

of  capital goods, services & consumable 

goods)

Services: 73%

Consumable goods: 85%

Total procurement spend from BEE 

Reasonable 

R1,482,752,617

entities (BBSEEC, 2010)

Percentage % of  samples in South 

Reasonable

100%

African facilities

1  Per million hours worked, including employees and contractors
2  Our SED definition has been aligned to the World Gold Council definition, which excludes employee-related SED spend
3  Although no houses were built as part of  the housing and hostel upgrade programme, South Deep owns 258 houses and purchased 198 from Sibanye and 489 have been rented 
from third parties by Gold Fields for our employees. We are also finalising our updated housing strategy in 2015, which will focus on home ownership and rentals. The housing 
strategy is being developed in addition to the requirements of  the Mining Charter Scorecard element for ‘Housing and Living Conditions’, which saw the hostel conversions 
resulting in the availability of  845 single unit hostels in 2014 and 203 family units.    

4  The employment equity percentage (excluding corporate and including white females) for ‘senior management’ is reported in the Mining Charter scorecard (p104 – 105 

of  this report) as 50%. This percentage is reported to include only the percentage of  HDSA’s on Exco, whereas the assured percentage of  56% is aligned to the Patterson 
grading scale.   

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014Notes

125

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014126

Notes

The Gold Fields Integrated Annual Report 2014Administration and corporate information

coRpoRAte secRetARy

Lucy mokoka

Tel: 
Fax: 
Email: 

+27 11 562 9719
+27 11 562 9829
lucy.mokoka@goldfields.co.za

InVestoR enQuIRIes

Avishkar Nagaser
Tel: 
+27 11 562 9775
Mobile:   +27 82 312 8692
Email: 

avishkar.nagaser@goldfields.co.za

ReGIsteRed oFFIce

Johannesburg

Gold Fields Limited
150 Helen Road
Sandown 
Sandton
2196

Postnet Suite 252
Private Bag X30500
Houghton
2041
Tel: 
Fax: 

+27 11 562 9700
+27 11 562 9829

oFFIce oF the unIted KInGdom secRetARIes

London

St James Corporate Services Limited
Suite 31, Second Floor
107 Cheapside
London EC2V 6DN United Kingdom
Tel: 
Fax: 

+44 20 7796 8644
+44 20 7796 8645

AmeRIcAn deposItoRy ReceIpts tRAnsFeR AGent

Bank of  New York Mellon
BNY Mellon Shareowner Services
PO Box 358516
Pittsburgh, PA15252-8516
US toll-free telephone:   +1 888 269 2377
+1 201 680 6825
Tel: 
 shrrelations@bnymellon.com
Email: 

GoLd FIeLds LImIted

Incorporated in the Republic of  South Africa
Registration number 1968/004880/06
Share code: GFI 
Issuer code: GOGOF 
ISIN – ZAE 000018123

websIte

www.goldfields.com

LIstInGs 

JSE/NYSE/NASDAQ Dubai: GFI  
SWX: GOLI

North America
Willie Jacobsz
Tel: 
Mobile:   +1 857 241 7127
Email: 

+1 (617) 535-7545

willie.jacobsz@gfexpl.com

medIA enQuIRIes

Sven Lunsche
Tel: 
+27 11 562 9763
Mobile:   +27 83 260 9279
Email:  

sven.lunsche@goldfields.co.za

tRAnsFeR secRetARIes

South Africa
Computershare Investor Services (Pty) Ltd
Ground Floor
70 Marshall Street
Johannesburg
2001

PO Box 61051
Marshalltown
2107
Tel: 
Fax: 

+27 11 370 5000
+27 11 688 5248

united Kingdom  
Capita Asset Services  
The Registry
34 Beckenham Road

Beckenham Kent BR3 4TU England

0871 664 0300 

Tel: 
[calls cost 10p a minute plus network extras, lines are open  
8.30 – 17:00 Mon – Fri] or [from overseas]

Fax: 
Email: 

+44 20 8639 3399
+44 20 8658 3430
ssd@capitaregistrars.com

sponsoR

JP Morgan Equities South Africa (Pty) Ltd

dIRectoRs 

CA Carolus (Chair)° NJ Holland* (Chief  Executive Officer)  
PA Schmidt (Chief  Financial Officer) K Ansah # AR Hill≠° 
GM Wilson° RP Menell° DN Murray° DMJ Ncube° 

*British     #Ghanaian     ≠Canadian     °Independent Director  
Non-independent Director

 
G

o

l

d

F

i

e

l

d

s

I

n

t

e

g

r

a

t

e

d

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

2

0

1

4

G

o

l

d

F

i

e

l

d

s

I

n

t

e

g

r

a

t

e

d

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

150 Helen Road 

Sandown 

Sandton, 2169 

Johannesburg 

Gauteng 

South Africa

Private Bag X30500 

Houghton, 2041 

South Africa

Telephone: (+27) (11) 562 9700 

Facsimile:  (+27) (11) 562 9838 

Website:  www.goldfields.com